Home

View Online

1. 1 Escalation status o sne wile we L ALL ESCING ACKD Jop nams s 4 NP go ee aS iL Name generic CURRENT U D USEE ty ese 3 see ch cen ee ie Bice ee at SS iL Name generic CURRENT Message text Delivery type ALL EMAIL FAX for more values Sequence option E DATE RCP GRP Entries to be displayed first FIRST LAST OUEDUE er a Ms B BR Ake et A ao S PRINT The Work with History WRKHSTICM command display allows you to specify various options that you like to perform on messages in ICOM 400 s history file Choosing to use all the defaults allows you to display all of ICOM 400 s activity For example you may specify messages sent to a specific pager company or a specific pager recipient You may specify a specific date range of messages to display or messages sent by a certain user Output can be displayed or printed to a spooled file Some important parameters of the WRKHSTICM command display are defined below If you need an in depth definition of a parameter refer to the online help for WRKHSTICM Q Company You can specify if you want to display messages sent using all pager companies ALL or those sent using a particular company Q Recipient Specify the name of the recipient to whom the messages were sent You may display messages sent to all recipients ALL or to a specific recipient Q Recip
2. FC Fl Gl FI EENAA ERE 2 o E oa DAS m AR s Ge CF EENEI Some important fields on the Display Escalation Information display include Page ID number The internal number generated by ICOM 400 to track this message Escalation table The name of the escalation table that was used to escalate this message Table passes The number of passes through the specified escalation stable Entries generated The number of entries generated so far within this escalation process Entries processed The total number of entries that have been processed so far Oocoo ICOM 400 User Manual 51 Chapter 5 Work with Activity onitor activity is another important feature of ICOM 400 It allows you to work with activity that has occurred as a result of monitor initiated messages as well as those generated by users You can keep track of activity generated by any monitor that you specify There are several different types of monitors for use with ICOM 400 A list of those monitors is displayed below Configuration status CFGSTS This monitor allows you to monitor the status of your lines devices and controllers CPU CPU This monitor allows you to monitor for jobs that exceed CPU processing capacity as well as monitors total system CPU capacity Job JOB This monitor allows you to monitor the length and existence of individual jobs Job queue JOBQ This monitor allows you to monitor the number of j
3. Type choices press S quence aei G8 eo Goa a SO ew Number 001 999 Seheduibe arafa ita a MS Ahan wlte ty Name ALLDAYS Severity Limit aae s a s so g sos s Number 00 99 ODOM erdirsin Eg Oa SS we Oo a iL Name generic USES easy Be ep ee aL at es A gO a ah he iL Name generic Message ID so kocer Boke Be ww 8 iL Name generic Message type e6e iL Type ALL ACELOR a ee go ees er ee em Name NONE F4 for list Include Exclude INC EXC Skip to sequence 001 999 END NEXT F rce action as 4 Be BO Se ear eds NO YES Base on command response NO YES For more information on the fields on this display refer to Add Message Queue Monitor Entry The fields are the same You may also change the compare data for a message entry To do this enter a 7 beside the entry and press Enter You are taken to the Change Compare Data display For more information on this display see the information regarding the message queue monitor Displaying a QHST monitor To display a QHST monitor type a 5 beside the monitor you want to display and press Enter You are taken to the Display QHST Monitor display Here you may display monitor entries by entering a 5 beside an entry ICOM 400 User Manual 105 Remote Device RMTDEV The remote device monitor allows you to monitor for the presence of remote devices to see if you
4. JULIA Text s ee Gos Ge ee ee Re Oe we te NONE Type changes to current authorities press Enter Recipient Send List Display User Authority Message History History Escalate PUBLIC USER DEE X X X The Edit Recipient Authority display shows a list of the current users authorized to functions associated with a recipient and the authority levels that each user has been assigned You can add users to the list remove users from the list and change the authority level of users When the authority of a recipient is checked ICOM 400 first checks the user profile If the user profile is not found ICOM 400 checks for a group profile If neither is found ICOM 400 checks PUBLIC You can specify authority levels in one of two ways 64 1 Assign one of the predefined system values for recipient authority level USE ALL CHANGE or EXCLUDE 2 Assign user defined authority levels User defined authority levels are created by placing or removing X s from the columns Whichever technique you use the system determines the recipient authority values or specific authorities based on the information you have typed If you type both recipient authority values and specific authorities for a user the specific authorities are used To change the authority level of a user type over the appropriate columns in the user s row Except for the Recipient Authority column you give the user the named authority by typing a
5. 000000000 0000000 From QGATE mbabky pinnsys com Subject UNDELIVERABLE MAIL Message text e NOTABLE TO DELIVER MAIL TO SOMI iL RECIPIE S REPLY CODES WITH FIRST DIGIT 4 OR 5 ARE ERROR REPLIES ERRORS THAT NOT HAVE ERROR REPLY CODES MAY EXIST HOST mbabky NOT ABLE TO DELIVER MAIL O FOLLOWING RECIPIENT S lt BRIANYOUNGER BELLSOUTHIPS COM gt RETRIES EXHAUSTE WHILE ATTEMPTING TO CONNECT TO REMOTE HOST BELLSOUTHIPS wE TE T OF MAIL FOLLOWS Received from pinnsys com by MBABKY PINNSYS COM IBM OS 400 SMTP VO3RO7M00 with TCP Tue 2 Mar 1999 08 44 25 0000 From icom pinnsys co Subject ICOM 400 notification To ICOM 400 Recipient does this still wor k On this display you can view the date and time the message was received the Handle ID for e mail or Page ID for pages of the sender the e mail address of the sender the subject of the message and the message text Option 8 Start ICOM 400 subsystem Select this option to start the ICOM 400 subsystem ZICOM400 Option 9 End ICOM 400 subsystem Select this option to end the ICOM 400 subsystem ZICOM400 136 Chapter 10 ICOM 400 Commands This chapter contains a listing of the various commands available in ICOM 400
6. The Display Log for ICM DSPLOGICM command allows you to display the ICOM 400 log The ICOM 400 log is a display by date and time of messages that ICM has created because of processing The DSPLOGICM command allows you to display or print all or part of the log The parameters for this display include the following Type TYPE The type of entry for which you want to review log entries ALL Selects all log entries for display MSG Selects only message log entries for display MNT Selects only maintenance log entries for display REPLY Selects only reply log entries for display Time period for log output PERIOD Specifies the period of time for which the log entries are selected for the display or report This parameter contains two lists of two elements each Element 1 Beginning time One of the following is used to specify the beginning creation time at which or after log entries are included Any log entries created before the specified time and date are not included in the display or report AVAIL Any time that is available for the beginning date is included begin time Specify the beginning time for the specified beginning date that indicates which log entries are to be included The time is specified in 24 hour format and can be specified with or without a time separator 138 Without a time separator specify a string of 4 digits hhmm where hh hours and mm minutes Hours and minutes must each be ex
7. Change Command List Change Command List AGELGM ar Js 4 etal amp ok 4 Sr cs oe CHECKJOB Textar 6 Sey Baa ke Ro 6 Se Bc oa NONE Type choices press Seq Command 10 CALL ICOMTOOLS CHKJOB PARM QTCPIP QSYSWRK The Change Command List display shows the current stored commands for the Action that you have selected You can enter up to 999 commands for each Action Each command line is assigned a sequence number Commands can be added changed or removed from the Change Command List display Note On full screen edit displays you must press Enter to save your changes and Enter again to exit the display You will need to specify e The sequence number from 1 to 9999 in front of each entry e The command that you want to associate with this Action Work with Schedules Work with Schedules POSTELTON CO a 0 s th as ce Starting characters Type options press Enter 1 Add 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Remove 5 Display Opt Schedule Text HMMMMM NONE ATEST NONE BSSCHE NONE SAMPLE Sample off hours TEST test The Work with Schedules display shows all schedules that are defined Schedules are user defined groupings of dates that suggest when ICOM 400 processing should be used ICOM 400 User Manual 13 Schedules have many uses including specifying a recipient s availability and on call schedules scheduling a monitor to monitor your job events or for Message Queue and
8. NONE knowledge time 0 00 Some important fields include Type The type of monitor that generated the activity Acknowledged recipient If the message was escalated the recipient of the acknowledgement NONE specifies that the activity has not been acknowledged or does not need acknowledgement Acknowledged by user The ID of the person who acknowledged the activity message NONE specifies that the message was not acknowledged by a recipient or was not set to escalate Acknowledged date and time The time and date that the message was acknowledged 0 00 00 specifies that the message has not been acknowledged or does not need acknowledgement Option 8 allows you to display the detail of the activity message 3 15 03 Display Activity Detail 7234735 3 10 03 Sending spooled file QPJOBLOG number 0001 for job 018584 BRIAN DOICM20 ATTACH sent to briany webzone net 1 type EMAIL sent 0 spooled file pages not sent The Display Activity Detail display lists text associated with the detail of an activity message For any message that you want to see additional information place cursor on that line and press Help or F1 to go to the Additional Activity Detail display where you can review the entire message plus any additional information that is available ICOM 400 User Manual 55 Ro information is an integral part of ICOM 400 In order to be able to send any kind of message y
9. Z a Za Za E O F F HF 2222427 222424 NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO AA AAAs ee w w A A A A o A A a A Cree O OT eee O Z Z To activate a recipient e Specify the name of the recipient Recipients are people or locations to whom you have assigned delivery types and numbers so they can receive messages The recipient name is user defined The name of the escalation table for this recipient The text that describes the recipient The sequence number for the recipient entry The type of delivery method s for the recipient These include PAGER EMAIL PHONE MSGQ FAX YUUNY 14 gt SPLF gt NETMSG You will also need to e Specify the schedule for which recipient will be available this is the schedule from which the recipient will be available to receive messages e Specify the schedule for which the recipient will be on call This is the schedule during which the recipient is on call Messages sent to on call recipients would go to recipients that are on call during the specified time period and e The exact address or number which is defined for the recipient delivery entry For paging you must e Specify the destination pager number e Specify the pager company name of the pager For a list of pager companies place the cursor on the Pager Company field and press F4 and e Specify the type of pager for the recipie
10. ccccccceceeee testes eens sense eee e eae nnee tee eaeeeaees 165 Work with Spooled Files WRKSPLFICM cccccce cece eter ere EEE E EEE DEAE EEE E EEE EEE EEE 165 CHAPTER 11 AUTOMATED CUSTOMER SUPPORT cccccseceneeceenceeeeeseaeenseneeseeseeseesessensens 168 TFOUDIESHOOtIAG sivavivecn savts Bovine medesraaie ener aa a a aa a e See a E A E aaa 168 AS Manager Customer Support MenU ssssssssssssssrssrssrtsrtsrttnttittttttt rrtt EEE EEE nAn RA REREN Annne aS 168 PTE Retrieval szare a a i NAE EEE ETE VAEA Sau Aba A TESE A ENEA ECA cared 169 Sign on to AS Manager Support SysStemM ssssssssrssrrrrrrrsrrssttsrtsrturttuntinrrnnttrtnnnnrnn annn EEE SEES 169 AS MAanaGer COMMUNICATION a a a a a EE AAAA AAEE DEE ENARE RENEE 170 APPENDIX A PRODUCT WARRANTY AND SUPPORT cccccecsneeneeeeeeeeeseeeensesseeeeneeesensenees 171 Product Support Worldwide 2 0 cc UU Gna ENa ANAA AAKE LAANA AAE EEE EEE EEE EE 171 When You Have A QUESTION sn coi cee siine Ved ee A ee aac va EAA sa AAE A yea tenet a Ta a eee es 171 Product Warranty and Maintenance oo EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE EE 171 APPENDIX B ICOM 400 VOICE ccccsccsecsncssescessesseeeeeeeeneeneeneeneeaeeaseaseaseasenaeaneaseasensenaes 173 PE REGUIREMENKS ser arere TEEI AAE EILA EARS DEEA A ERAEN AIRE E ERATARA AREKE bana sake geenats 173 Installation INStructions PC naonao aaa eaa a AATE ea AAEE Eaa ana a ORES EE AAAA AAA TAREA 173 Reinstallation sinees einiaid taa aR A E E EEE E DEEI
11. mode To use it in asynchronous mode e Locate the dip switches on the right side of the modem e Flip the 12 dip switch to the down position To use it in synchronous mode putting the modem in temporary synchronous mode e Make sure the 12 dip switch is in the up position e ICOM 400 software will create a line description for you automatically each time you send a message This is helpful if you need to keep the 7852 modem in synchronous mode at all times I e connecting to IBM ICOM 400 User Manual 41 NOTE Your system must be an AS 400 O S release of V3R7MO or higher to use the temporary asynchronous mode Configuring a Hayes Compatible Modem for Asynchronous Operation If your IBM ECS modem is not available or if you would like to configure a second resource on your AS 400 for use by ICOM 400 see Chapter 9 System Controls then you may want to dedicate a modem to this purpose Since the factory default settings for most asynchronous modems are not compatible with AS 400 requirements external configuration is usually required This may be accomplished by connecting the modem either to a display station or a PC running some type of terminal program Due to the wide variety of asynchronous modems on the market it is impossible to list a configuration string for each one Possible setup strings for common modems Hayes Smartmodem 1200 2400 AT EO QO V1 amp C1 amp D2 amp Q0 amp WO Hayes Smartmodem 9600 AT EO Q
12. 135 155 WRKGRPICM 135 155 156 WRKHSTICM 19 35 42 47 48 WRKMAILICM 133 135 156 WRKMONIcM 89 110 WRKPAGICM 135 158 WRKPAGQICM 135 162 WRKRCPICM 135 162 WRKSCDICM 135 163 WRKSPLFICM 130 131 135 163 Z ZICOM400 24 38 111 121 134 ICOM 400 User Manual 221
13. 18 Networking ICOM 400 allows you to send messages to other AS 400s in your network You can send a network message from one system to a message queue in another system Work with History Menu The History Information menu allows you to review analyze print and dispose of information stored in the ICOM 400 history file Work with History Work with History 3 23 03 17 03 32 tion to Date options press Enter Hold 4 Remove 5 Display 6 Release Resend messag Display escalation 9 Acknowledge Entry Entry Delivery Escalation Date Time Type Recipient Status Message 3 15 03 2 13 29 EMATL NONE None Sierra Pacifi 3 17 03 200817 EMAIL NONE None NONE 3 17 03 2 56 35 ETMSG ANCENE None MBABKY 021804 3 17 03 2 00 11 ETMSG ANCENE None MBABKY 021804 3 18 03 2 58 07 AGER TESTR None test from Lan 3 18 03 2 19 07 EMAIL BYEMAIL None CPF0907 Serio 3 18 03 22 26 EMAIL BYEMAIL None 022052 BRIAN 3 23 03 2 54 03 FAX SAMPLE None test 3 23 03 ete eol EMAIL NONE None from sndmsgic 3 23 03 2 34 15 EMAIL BYEMAIL None NONE F F F FF HF H G o o B O D o YP DP CT eer er tr or er oer cer oct COMO nNNOA UH BF The Work with History using ICM display shows all messages that you requested as a result of processing the Work with History using ICM WRKHSTICM command or as a result of selecting a menu option to work wi
14. 50 Number 1 999 Schedule A Tete eye ten ee Ge 45 tee aes Oe ce He SAMPLE Name ALLDAYS F4 Inactivity interval 15 Minutes 1 999 ACERO te ta Ean O ea e ag SE SOs SAMPLE Name F4 for list Number of occurrences 10 Number 1 99 Text cor ek Se Se a OS e Monitor QPRINT for 50 spooled files Some important fields for this display include the following Q Output queue The output queue that you want to monitor Q Library The library that contains the output queue that you are monitoring Q Spooled file limit The upper limit of the number of spooled files in the output queue QHST QHST The QHST monitor allows you to monitor the system history log to catch messages that are not available in the message queue These are messages that are generated as a result of activity on your system Adding a QHST monitor To add a QHST monitor enter a 1 on the first line under the Opt column on the Work with Monitors display You will also need to enter a name for your new monitor under the Monitor column and QHST under Type When you press Enter you are taken to the Add QHST Monitor display On this display you will need to enter the inactivity interval for the QHST monitor Add QHST Monitor MONPEOK anm a Ss eo Se eo ao we eB QHST Type choices press Enter Inactivity interval Seconds 1 999 Text Changing a QHST monitor Once you have added a QHST
15. Bie at ke J gk ote E ICMASMI Libary 0 d ai ICOM400 Member ICMASMI Record COMETOML Ia ra k Column Find a a gt Os Hor date ORPI ETE E A ty SANTIS ILS wD BUENOS Sx A Pee Tne gt Validating server smtp webzone net gt gt Requesting connection with mailserver 205 219 23 7 lt Connection with mail server 205 219 23 7 granted gt HELO pbsnow com lt 250 yoda webzone net gt mail from lt icom pbsnow com gt lt 250 Sender lt icom pbsnow com gt Ok gt rcpt to lt LANCE PBSNOW COM gt lt 250 Recipient lt LANCE PBSNOW COM gt Ok gt data lt 354 Ok Send data ending with lt CRLF gt lt CRLF gt gt Sending message data gt Sending attachment header gt Sending attachment data This menu option executes the Display Physical File Member DSPPFM command to display all the ICOM 400 instructions associated with the last e mail message sent using ICOM 400 This file is used to identify problems if any with a particular message The Display Physical File Member display presents information in a selected file member and allows you to look at the data Option 11 Print E mail Communications Entries To print the e mail communications entries enter 11 on the command line of the History Information menu The communications entries are printed to a spooled file 84 Option 12 Display Fax Communications Entries To display the fax communications entries enter 12 on the comma
16. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS cccccccecceeseeseeseeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeaseaseaseasensensensensenee 213 TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE WORKSHEET vs incctetien Siete fee ddan els dowd T A AEN aa E NE D Ge 217 ICOM 400 SET UP WORKSHEET ccccscececcuueueucuuaueeevaucaueeueveueusereueucuneueueeguuseesesuguseesrevcunanenega 218 ICOM 400 User Manual 5 Chapter 1 Product Highlights and Technical Overview A Quick Look at ICOM 400 Providing Cost Effective amp Time Savings Benefits It s Dynamic It s Flexible Message amp Delivery Types E mail Alphanumeric or digital pagers Digital Phones Workstations Fax Spooled files Network message Messaging Individual group amp on call recipients Escalation of pages until acknowledgement is received Multi user amp multi line interface for dispatching Standalone paging system Customized delivery delays Multiple paging companies simultaneously We send over 3 000 pages to over 300 people a month explained Jim Hartley of Arapahoe County Sheriff s Office Thanks to Pinnacle s software it s an invisible system it runs error free We often recommend it to other agencies It s Responsive It s Powerful It s Convenient 6 Actions Remote command issuance Default message replies Forward messages Run or cancel jobs amp execute commands Time stamp acknowledgements Send a customized message Reset failed communications
17. Opt Group ROUP1 ROUP2 EST The Work with Recipient Groups display shows all recipient groups that have been defined to ICOM 400 Recipient groups are groups of recipients that you have assigned to receive messages collectively rather than having individual messages sent to each recipient from ICOM 400 From this display you have several options You can create a new recipient group by entering a 1 on the first line of the Opt column along with the name of the new group You can change a group that has already been created by typing a 2 beside the group you want to change Enter a 3 beside a recipient group to copy the group Delete a recipient group by entering a 4 beside the group you want to delete To display a recipient group enter a 5 beside the group you want to display You can send a message to a recipient group by entering a 7 beside the group To edit the authority of a group enter a 9 beside the group you want to edit Adding a Recipient Group To add a recipient group type a 1 on the first line of the Opt column along with the name of the recipient group you want to add Press Enter to go to the Create Recipient Group display Create Recipient Group Recipient group GROUPA Text By aA eh ew A fe Type choices press Seq Recipient No entries found The Create Recipient Group display is used to create a recipient group identifier and information about that recipient group Recipient groups
18. 2 4 Ba Bod Soo ten ce Gea wee Name F4 for list Schedule se a cee se ay an wo Be we eS ALLDAYS Name F4 for list On this display you can specify the Action for the spooled file entry as well as the schedule for the entry Press Enter to add the entry and return to the Spooled File Entries display NOTE If you wish to send your spooled file as a fax the Action you utilize for your spooled file entry must have SNDSPLFICM as a command in the command list When you set up your Action specify the following as an entry in your command list SNDSPLFICM SPLF your spooled file JOB SPLNBR LAST MSG Attached is your spooled file DVYTYP FAX FAX 555 1212 John Doe On the Action itself you must specify NONE in the Recipient Group field This lets ICOM 400 know that you are using a command to determine the recipient Subsystem SBS A subsystem monitor allows you to specify the subsystem you want to monitor as well as a limit on the number of jobs and number of occurrences for each job This monitor behaves similarly to a job queue monitor but monitors the number of jobs that are active in your subsystem rather than the number of jobs in the job queue You can specify the upper limit on the number of jobs that you will allow to run in your subsystem If that number is exceeded ICOM 400 will initiate the Action you have specified Adding Changing or Displaying a Subsystem Monitor To add a subsystem monitor enter a 1
19. ALLDAYS F4 Inactivity interval Minutes 1 999 AGELONY pp feels Rey aL Se Bee ee Se ae aes Name F4 for list Message An important field on this display includes Message The message that you would like to associate with the monitor This is the message that the monitor will send if the specified Action include notification information such as arecipient NONE indicates that you want the ICOM 400 user defined monitor default message sent Option 2 Start monitor The Work with ICOM 400 Monitors command display allows you to start specific monitor types Enter a 2 on the command line to start a specific monitor type or types Work with ICOM 400 Monitors WRKMONICM Type choices press Enter Action to perform gt START LIST END START Monitor CYPE amp lt i al es Bo ao ey 8 ALL ALL CFGSTS CPU for more values You may start all monitor types or only a specific type You can specify as many monitor types as you want Monitors that are not currently running will be started Option 3 End monitor The Work with ICOM 400 Monitors command display allows you to end specific monitor types Enter a 3 on the command line to end a specific monitor type or types Work with ICOM 400 Monitors WRKMONICM Type choices press Enter Action to perform gt END LIST END START Monitor types a acho eee ae ae e ALL XALDby CHGSTS CPUs for more
20. ICOM400 Member ICMASDI Record CONTEO ase a th a a Column Find Be es oe E ara Taaa a Sack coe huge eg resect a a ts tes wher tite ese ea fe Paget te 0000 lt ATEOQOV1 a0000 gt OK a0000 lt ATDT 9 18008682835 0000 gt CONNECT 2400 0000 lt 0310 gt 0000 lt 20310 gt 20000 lt 0000 gt ID 0000 lt 2Q01briany 0000 gt Good Morning Processing Pages p 0000 lt briany 0 2 4 0000 gt brianyounger 0142 00 031099111229 6031099111229Back at ya 0000 gt brianyounger 0142 00 031099111229 6031099111229Back at ya o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o ICOM 400 User Manual 83 This menu option executes the Display Physical File Member DSPPFM command to display all the ICOM 400 instructions associated with the last message sent using ICOM 400 This file is used to identify problems if any with a particular message The Display Physical File Member display presents the information in a selected file member and allows you to look at the data Options 5 and 7 Print Resource Communications Entries 1 and 2 To print the resource communication entries enter 5 Resource 1 or 7 Resource 2 on the command line of the History Information menu The communications entries are printed to a spooled file Options 10 Display E mail Communications Entries To display the e mail communications entries enter 10 on the command line of the History Information menu Display Physical File Member
21. Location Information EI xi At this point there are a lot of panels on the screen If the Location Before you can make any phone or modem connections Inf 3 Ii h Windows needs the following information about your current nformation panel is shown enter location your area code then click OK Then click OK again on the Phone And Modem Options panel What country region are you in now What area code or city code are you in now If you dial a number to access an outside line what is it The phone system at this location uses Tone dialing Pulse dialing Cancel Found New Hardware Wizard The Wizard informs you then that Windows has installed the software required for the PhoneRider Accelerator Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard PhoneRider ISA 1 2 Accelerator Windows has finished installing the software for this device Do not press Finish or reboot until the PhoneRider board Wizard described below has completed Despite of the label Finish on the button the installation procedure will continue The PhoneRider Board Wizard opens automatically If an error occurs during the Wizard reboot and start the Wizard from the Start Programs menu and continue below To close this wizard click Finish PhoneRider board Wizard The MediaPhonics PhoneRider Board Wizard may appear when Windows opens after restarting the PC a Welcome to the MediaPhoni
22. So if there is no name in the text field and the Introduction field in the PHONE delivery type is changed to NONE then the introduction would only say Press 1 to continue Or Enter your security code followed by the sign 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Can I replay the message Answer Yes The message can be replayed at any point during the message or during the list of responses by pressing Can I replay the list of responses Answer Yes The list of responses can be replayed at any point during the message or during the list of responses by pressing How do I skip listening to the rest of the message Answer You can press any number or the What happens if I enter a response then hang up Answer Normally you are asked to confirm your response but if you hang up before the confirmation the response that is entered will be used Does the message stop escalating after the recipient hears the message Answer Yes Once the recipient enters the appropriate numbers on the introduction the message is marked as being heard and will be acknowledged within ICOM 400 history Why does it sometimes tell me that my security code is not correct Answer There are times that the modem does not detect a number that was pressed because the signal was not strong enough When this happens key the numbers in slower and more defined What if I do not want to respond to the message Answ
23. Work with Spooled Files ccceece cece eA EERE E EE EEE E EEE EEE 132 Option 6 Work with ICOM 400 e mail cccececcecee cece eee eee ceases eeeeee eases eeaeeeeaneeeaneneganeeeanes 135 Option 8 Start ICOM 400 SUDSYStEM c cece cece EEE EERE EE EEE EE EEE EERE E EEE EEE 136 Option 9 End ICOM 400 subsystem oo eeccecc cece ee EEE AREER EERE EEE E EEE EEE EEE 136 CHAPTER 1 aociras a daraa Oa eara aa aare aeaaea Ea epedana eeseaceasenteussweawdcenscedeued 137 Display ICOM 400 Log Entries DSPLOGICM ssssssssssssssssssssuesrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrnnrrnnnnrnntannnnnnnrrsernerne 138 Display Message Queue DSPMSGICM sssssssssssssssssssrsrrinrrinrrrrrrrrrrrrrrnrrnn rnnt EEE EEE EEE EE Ee 140 End Message Queue Monitor ENDMSGQICM sssssssssssssssssssrsnrrrnrrrrrrrrrrrrrrnrnnrrntnnnannasrrssrserne 144 Hold Monitor using ICOM 400 HLDMONICM sssssssssssssssssssssssnrrrnrrrrrrrrrrnrrnnrnnrnnrnnrannnnrrserserne 144 Hold Message Queue Monitor HLDMSGQICM ciccecee cetera 145 Monitor Message Queue MONMSGQICM vee cecc ct EEE EEE EEE EERE EEE nS 145 Release Monitor using ICOM 400 RLSMONICM ccecceetee et eer nnn Entree nee ees 146 Release Message Queue Monitor RLSGMSGQICM ccceccccte cere ne nen nent nen nee eae 147 Remove ICOM 400 Activity RMVATVICM ccccecce cet rr nnn n EE EEE EE EE 148 Remove ICOM 400 History RMVHSTICM ccccecc eet EEE EEE EEE EEE Eee 149 Remove Log Entries using ICOM 400 RMVLOGEICM 0 e
24. X ICOM400 ICOMVoice SETUP EXE where X is the CD ROM drive Follow the prompts on the panels and finish setup by rebooting when prompted The ICOM400 Voice panel appears when Windows opens after restarting the PC Select the PhoneRider device and desired voice As a quick test use a telephone to dial the number of the phone line connected to the voice modem device Windows 2000 1 Install the voice modem device 2 If you are installing a ModemBlaster a Load the CD provided by Pinnacle Business Systems b Shut down and turn off the computer c Install the modem d Turn on the computer ICOM 400 User Manual 173 e Follow the New Hardware prompts noting the following i When asked to Locate Driver Files select the CD ROM drives option only ii Click Yes on the Digital Signature not Found panel f Continue with the next step 3 If you are installing a PhoneRider board follow the instructions on PhoneRider Installation under Windows 2000 in Appendix D Plug in the analogue phone line into the Tel Line phone connection on the voice modem device Using the CD provided by Pinnacle Business Systems select Run from the Start menu and run X ICOM400 ICOMVoice SETUP EXE where X is the CD ROM drive a Follow the prompts on the panels and finish setup by rebooting when prompted b Note During the copy of files you may encounter the Confirm File Replace panel select No to all button Later in the process if the install
25. capacity percentage This monitor also allows you to monitor the CPU percentage capacity for the entire system You can choose to monitor a specific job for exceeding CPU capacity or any job on the system ANY for exceeding this capacity The CPU capacity allowed for a job is defined in the CPU limit field You can specify what percentage of the system s CPU capacity you do not want the job to exceed in the Based on system CPU field that must be exceeded before the Action is initiated This is only used with a specific job generic jobs or ANY If you wish to monitor the entire system for exceeding the CPU capacity specify SYSTEM in the Job field The SYSTEM CPU usage is compared with the percentage specified in the CPU limit field It is not compared to the Based on system CPU field If the job or system exceeds the allotted capacity you may choose to initiate an Action for the monitor to perform Adding changing or displaying a CPU monitor To add change or display a CPU monitor enter a 1 on the first line under the Opt column on the Work with Monitors display You will also need to enter a name for your new monitor under the Monitor column and CPU under Type To change an existing monitor enter a 2 beside the monitor you want to change or enter a 2 in the first line under the Opt column along with the name and monitor type To display an existing monitor enter a 5 beside the monitor you want to display or enter a 5 in
26. nnnnn TO Gate socas a teats abo ak fee oe As E Date CURRENT D nnnnn Pages Stabuss lt o oo ee AR iL ALL SENT PE ERROR Escalation status iL ALL ESCING ACKD Job MAME aasre e Es ad ky HOR ee wn iL Name generic CURRENT USEF ee Mae te ee SR CA eh a a a iL Name generic CURRENT Message text Sequence option DATE RCP GRP Entries to be displayed first FIRST LAST QUE DUT Wer or Mee a wes a a et oie 5 Ye PRINT The Work with Pages ICM WRKPAGICM command allows you to work with pages for selected companies recipients recipient groups date ranges in various sort sequences Output can be a display or printed report You may reach this screen by typing WRKPAGICM on the command line and pressing F4 Company CMP Specify the name of the company or group of companies that you want to display or report ALL You want to work with all companies generic company name Specifies that the company name is generic For example specifying MC would cause all pager companies whose names begin with MC to be included in the report or on the display company name Specifies the name of a specific pager company that you want to display or report Recipient RCP Specify the name of the recipient or recipients that you want to report or display 160 ALL You wan
27. 129 130 Quick Start 25 R Recipient Authority 63 Changing 62 178 Copying 62 178 Displaying 63 179 Removing 63 178 Sending a message 63 Recipient Authority 63 64 Recipient group Authority 66 Recipient Group Adding 65 Changing 66 Copying 66 Displaying 66 Removing 66 Sending a message 66 Recipient Information 36 42 55 67 70 73 74 Recipients Adding 56 177 179 Release Message Queue Monitor 145 Release Monitor using ICOM 400 144 Remove ICOM 400 Activity 146 Remove Log Entries 82 Remove Log Entries using ICOM 400 149 Removing a Schedule 69 Removing ICOM 400 38 Resource Communication Entries 82 Resource Communications Entries 83 resource name 119 120 121 123 166 168 restricted state 119 121 124 126 143 RLSMONIC 135 144 RLSMSGQICM 135 145 RMVATVICM 81 135 146 RMVHSTICM 79 135 147 RMVLOGEICM 82 135 149 S Schedule Adding 68 Changing 69 Copying 69 Displaying 69 security code 60 173 174 175 Selected recipients 113 Send program message 114 Send Spooled File 131 154 Send using ICOM 400 149 Sending a Message Using ICOM 400 44 Sending a page with PHONE 59 Set up Worksheet 216 SMTP host server address 120 123 SNDMSGICM 10 37 42 44 45 46 51 53 59 63 66 75 76 122 131 135 SNDSPLFICM 51 53 130 131 132 133 135 154 SNDSPLFICM Fax information 133 Start ICOM 400 sub
28. 65535 110 Number 1 65535 icom icom400 Minutes 1 99 The Change System Attributes display allows you to change ICOM 400 defaults Changing a default value here can affect the entire system Not only can you change the general system defaults for this display you can also change the defaults relating to paging email faxing and spooled files 122 General defaults The following list contains the general defaults for ICOM 400 These defaults affect all functions on ICOM 400 Q Activity retention days The number of days to retain activity history before it is automatically purged by ICOM 400 The default for this parameter is 10 days You may specify between 1 and 999 days to retain activity Activity that is older than the number of days specified will be automatically removed from the system Log entries retention days The number of days that you want to keep history log entries before they are automatically removed by ICOM 400 The default for this parameter is 30 days You may specify a number of days between 1 and 999 to retain history History older than this number of days will be automatically removed from the system Dial type Specifies whether you want to use a pulse or tone for messages sent to pager devices T specifies tone P specifies pulse Inactivity interval The number of minutes for ICOM 400 to wait before retrying to send pending and ready status messages This interval is used only when other
29. A Name LIBL Text Some important fields on this display include the following Output queue The output queue that you want to monitor Q Library The library that contains the output queue Changing a spooled file monitor Once you have added your spooled file monitor you must add spooled file entries to it Type 2 beside the monitor you want to change and press Enter You are taken to the Work with Spooled File Entries display Work with Spooled File Entries MONLTEOR S fe ce aly Sdn eee E oe er ck eS BYOUTQ Q tput QUeUC s se Ree eal es Oe BYOUTQ Tel i Sal a es Nog aes as Cie aa AP es AE BYLIB TEXG Aso ug Soi ek tay a cam ve ae amp ok ee ce NONE Position to Type options press Enter 1 Add 2 Work with spooled file actions 3 Copy 4 Remove 5 Display Spooled Program Remove Opt File Name User Data File Text ALL ALL ALL NO NONE From this display you can add copy remove and display spooled file entries as well as work with spooled file actions To add an entry type a 1 on the first line of the Opt column and press Enter You are taken to the Add Spooled File Entry display ICOM 400 User Manual 107 Add Spooled File Entry MALCOR sI 03 y ch ae ren eit Soe 2 ee e BYOUTQ OUEDUE GUSE w ah ces eet DS ek ee E BYOUTQ TIONED Es Y he he oe a Sa Lt gate cae ath Eg ay TS BYLIB Type choices press Enter Spotted files a So we ee eh Sie Bes iL Name ALL Progr
30. Change System Attributes display from the Main Menu take Option 7 System Controls and then Option 1 System Attributes This display allows you to change the ICOM 400 defaults or the line resource description that you set up with Quick Start Wizard Change a default value here affects your entire system Resources 1 and 2 allow you to specify multiple lines that can be used for communications Also from the Change System Attributes display input any necessary pre and post modem instructions These will be defined by your paging service Pager Companies There are two General Set up worksheets at the end of this manual Use the first worksheet to enter the specified information about each pager company or service that you use You will then input this information on the Add Pager Company display From the Main Menu take Option 4 Recipient Information and then Option 4 Work with pager companies ICOM 400 User Manual 37 E mail The second General Set up worksheet at the end of the manual is for e mail information After you have completed the worksheet for each Internet Service Provide that provides you with internet service go to the Change System Attributes display and input the required information Recipients From the pager company and e mail worksheets please enter each recipient and recipient ID for each recipient that is to be paged on the Add Recipient display from the Work with recipients display Each recipient can hav
31. DIAG Include only diagnostic messages Diagnostic messages provide information about errors detected by this program ESCAPE Include only escape messages An escape message describes an irrecoverable error condition The sending program does not continue to run Exclude message ID EXCID Specifies that you want to exclude the message IDs from the message queue information that you want to display or print You can enter multiple values for this parameter If you are on an entry display and you need additional entry fields to enter multiple message ID exclusions type a plus sign in the entry field opposite the phrase for more values and press the Enter key NONE You do not want to exclude any of the message IDs from the message queue information that you want to display or print message name Specify the name of the message IDs which you want to exclude Severity SEV Specify the message severity level that you want to include in the report display For example a severity level of 30 would include all messages that are severity level 30 and above The severity level can be specified from 0 to 99 Output OUTPUT Specify whether messages are to be displayed at the requesting work station or to be printed with the job s spooled output The output is displayed PRINT The output is printed Detail DETAIL Specifies the format used for the printed output BASIC The entries are printed in abbreviated list fo
32. ICOM 400 User Manual 31 Quick Start Wizard display 15 ICOM 400 Quick Start Wizard will take you through the steps necessary to deliver messages via e mail pager message queue ring a telephone or fax The first step will be to set specific system attributes that can be used by recipients Then we will define individual recipient information ld yo j send e mail messages y n ld yo j to send fax messages y n ld yo j send pager messages y n ld yo j to add recipients y n This display inquires if you would like to add recipients to ICOM 400 If you would place a Y in the space provided If you do not place an N If you do want to add recipients you will be taken to the next display otherwise you will skip this step Press Enter Quick Start Wizard display 16 A recipient is a person group of persons or a device to whom you want to deliver a pager message AS 400 message e mail message ring a telephone or fax Recipients can have multiple delivery methods i e pager e mail etc Enter the recipient name Leave blank when done This display explains that a recipient is a person group of persons or a device to which you send a message be it by pager e mail or message queue or ring a telephone analog phone A recipient can have more than one delivery method You are asked to provide a recipient name After specifying the various delivery methods you can add
33. NN EIEEE RER TEE ai 174 Installation Instructions AS 400 sssessssssrrrssssnrnusnnnnnnnnnusnnnnnnnnsnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnreennnnnn 175 Frequently Asked Questions about Voice MESSAGING ou cceecceece ee te eee ee nee need tne n nnn 176 APPENDIX C INBOUND ICOM 400 VOICE ccccsccccennneccnneceensecesnneeeeneeennnneeeneneeeenneneeanes 179 Option 1 Work with User Codes cccccecccece eect eee eee e ene e ee eee ene HDDS ESSE EEE SESS ESSE ESSE ESE EEE 179 Option 2 Work With VOICE MENUS cccccecec cece eee O KENEEN e een ee ee de Ee ease Seen EAA TAE REFERRE EREE KNEE 181 Option 3 Work with IP Entri S cnai arein dennin aaa E AAAA CAA aa a aaa E aa ERIE iaa SA ala 185 Frequently Asked Questions about Inbound VOICE s sssssssssssssssnrrrsrrrrrrrrrrnrrnrrnrnnnnsrrsrrssrserne 185 APPENDIX D PHONE RIDER MODEM cccccccceccnceeccnneeenneeuennneusaneeeeaneeneaaeeneaaneueuaeeenaeeuen 187 PhoneRider Installation under Windows 98 sssssssssssnusnusnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnenrnnnrnnnunrnnrnnrrnrrnn 187 PhoneRider Installation under Windows 2000 s ssssssssusssannenrnurnunnnnnunnnnnnnnnunnrnnnnnnnnnnnrrenrrnrrnn 194 PhoneRider Installation under Windows NT 4 0 ccccccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeueeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeetesgeeuguaaas 201 APPENDIX E INFO EXIT PROGRAM REFERENCE cccccccccccccececcncecenceeuenceenenneenenneuenaaenes 211 Sample program Sickie vcs die ee aan E REEE R OAE AENA ATETA EA TE AAAA 212
34. PAGER PHONE EMAIL MSGQ FAX SPLF and NETMSG There are several important fields that are common to all delivery entries These include QO Sequence If you have not done so you must assign a sequence number to the delivery entry No two sequence entry numbers can be the same for the delivery entry ALLDAYS means that the recipient is always available For more information see Schedules QO On call schedule Specify the schedule during which the recipient will be on call for the Available schedule Specify the schedule during which you want the recipient to be available delivery entry The messages sent to the on call recipient would go to recipient on call during the specified time period Recipients can be permanently assigned an on call status ALLDAYS or can be permanently excluded from an on call status NONE the delivery entry This information can be text variables or a combination of the two the delivery entry This information can be text variables or a combination of the two The following variables can be used for pre or post information amp QJOB Qualified job that originated the page in the format JOBNBR USER JOB amp JOB amp USER S amp JOBNBR amp SYSID amp DATE amp TIME amp MSGNBR PAGER PAGER Pre message information Specify the information that you want to precede a message for Post message information Specify the information that you
35. Primary shared resource name Name Secondary shared resource name Name Telephone prefix Character V2ROM10 Change System Attributes Type choices press Enter Vary lines off after transmission Default pager ID Default pager company Pre Modem instructions Post Modem instructions ICOM 400 User Manual 121 Reply message inactivity interval Batch message queue Library Interactiv Library message queu Voice Communication PC IP address Communication PC port Telephone prefix V2ROM10 Type choices press Enter Spooled file Copies Sie Ae Form type a Hold spooled fil Save spooled file Fax Line resource nam Telephone prefix Number of retries Baud rate Company name Return fax number Line wrap action V2ROM10 Type choices press Enter E mail ICOM 400 e mail address SMTP host server address Por POP3 host server address Port Account Name Password Reply message inactivity interval 1 Minutes 1 99 Name USER NON Name LIBL Name USER Name LIBL NONI Number 1 65535 Character Change System Attributes Number 1 99 Character STD NO YES NO YES Name Character Number 1 9 2400 4800 7200 WRAP More NOWRAP NOWRAP Change System Attributes icom pbsnow com smtp webzone net 25 Number pop3 webzone net 1
36. QHST entry scheduling The Work with Schedules display allows you to add change copy remove or display schedules that you want to use for ICOM 400 processing The schedule name is user defined You can use a schedule to specifically include dates such as all the days of the year that you want to utilize for notification purposes or special values such as FRI Friday to specify days that you want ICOM 400 to utilize For example you could specify a schedule for Monday through Friday by specifying MON TUE WED THU and FRI This schedule would allow the messages to be issued to the appropriate recipient each Monday through Friday You can also specify dates like 4 22 03 as dates to include in a schedule You can add an unlimited number of specific dates and times to make up a schedule You can also specify dates like 4 22 without a year which indicates April 22nd of each year Automatic Delivery of Messages You can customize ICOM 400 for your staff message delivery needs Each recipient of a message can be specified with delivery types schedules escalation tables and individual group affiliations Work with Recipients Work with Recipients POSICION GO asi ha a Saye Starting characters Type options press Enter 1 Add 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Remove 5 Display 7 Send messag 9 Edit authority Opt Recipient Escalation Z Za Zz Zz Zz Zz Zz Z Z y webzone net Z Zi Zz
37. Some important fields on this display include the following Message ID The message ID of the pre defined message 76 Text The body of the pre defined message Changing a Pre defined Message To change a pre defined message enter a 2 beside the message you want to change on the Work with Pre defined Messages display Press Enter to go to the Change Pre defined Message display For more information on the fields of this display refer to Adding a Pre defined Message Copying a Pre defined Message To copy a pre defined message enter a 3 beside the message you want to copy on the Work with Pre defined Messages display Press Enter to go to the Copy Pre defined Message display Enter the name of the new message in the New name field Press Enter to add your new message and return to the Work with Pre defined Messages display Removing a Pre defined Message To remove a pre defined message enter a 4 beside the message s that you want to remove and press Enter You are taken to the Confirm Remove of Pre defined Messages display Press Enter to remove your message s or F12 to return to the Work with Pre defined Messages display where you can change your selections Displaying a Pre defined Message To display a pre defined message enter a 5 beside the message you want to display on the Work with Pre defined Messages display Press Enter to go to the Display Pre defined Message display For more information on the fields of th
38. Start MOMILOR roii E EEEE AA TEN AE EE AEEA EA AR ea 111 Option l ENG MO O a a a aE A aad Eea A Da A EN a Aaa Aa E e a a iiS 111 Option 4 Work With monitor tYPES cece EEE EEE EERE EEE E EERE EERE E EEE EEE 112 Option 5 Work with monitor subsystem c cece cece ne E EERE EEE EEE EEE E EEE EEE EEE ES 112 Option 6 Work With SCHECUIES ccc LEED EEE EE DEERE EERE EERE EEE 113 Option 7 Work With ACON Siinsisiririmaiiirriasniaiiii aiii nav a sia uaveeeeetasvad devs exe Veciava vote Naan 113 Option 8 Send program MESSAGE 0 ccc cette eee ee tennant 116 Option 12 Add monitor entries based on message QUEUE e cece e eee teeta teense eee eee eeeee eae 116 ICOM 400 User Manual 3 Option 13 Add monitor entries based ON QHST ceeccecccecee eee eee eee eee eens ene n aetna nee EEE eae 118 Option 16 Work with address information ccccceceee eee eee eee eee nee e ne eee eee ene nS EEE EEE EEE 119 CHAPTER 9 SYSTEM CONTROLS cccccceceneececeeeeceeeeeeseasenseseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaneaneaeseeneens 121 Option 1 Change System Attributes cece cece EEE EE EEE Ene E EEE EEE EEE 121 Option 2 Work with Function AUTHOTitieS cece eee reer E nee E EAHA EEE EEE EEE 126 Option 3 Reset ICOM 4OO D erien Ea ena eE AIEEE E EEE eee ee AA A REAREA AAE AAN EE EREEREER ERS 131 Option 4 Work with Page Queues ssssssssssnsenrorrerrernrsrrennennannunnnennesnasnasnsenronrornorreerroris 131 Option 5
39. Work with User Codes display shows all user codes that have been defined to ICOM 400 A user code is a numerical code that can be used to verify an ICOM 400 Inbound Voice user and determine what menu is played for that user From this display you have many options You can add Option 1 user codes change Option 2 user codes that you have already defined copy Option 3 user codes remove Option 4 user codes and display Option 5 user codes The display lists the user code and a text description of the code Adding a User Code To add a user code enter a 1 on the first line of the Opt column along with the numerical code you want to add Press Enter to go to the Add User display ICOM 400 User Manual 179 Add User Code Type choices press Enter User code Password Codey a al a ee ee ed May a e Numbers Tnverak Menu re 4 G e uar e i a Name F4 for list Associated recipient Name F4 for list Associated user profile Name Allow answer messages NO YES Identifier s Mele oe ga es Re ee ee Sh a e F Characters Text The Add User Code display allows you to add a user code and its associated information such as password code initial menu associated recipient user profile and other information There are several important fields that are common to all delivery entries These include User code The numerical code that will be used to determine which menu is played when u
40. You can also use a store bought asynchronous modem for example a Hayes or U S Robotics but you will need to install a setup string that we have in our manual to take off some factory defaults to be able to use it with the AS 400 You can install the setup string from a PC using a modem program such as Terminal HyperTerminal or ProComm For faxing you will have to use a class 2 data faxing modem which can be used for paging as well It will still need the setup string that we recommend For further instructions about modems and about the setup strings See ICOM 400 manual Chapter 2 Modem Configurations or see our list of modems in our Quick Start Wizard See ICOM 400 manual Chapter 2 Quick Start Wizard Is there any way to page using a modem set to synchronous A Normally most all modems are not able to do this but there is one IBM modem that is capable of doing this The IBM 7852 is able to receive any asynchronous pages going out while still set to synchronous The only condition is you will have to be on an OS 400 version of 3 7 or above If you are using the 1 2 version of the ICOM 400 software it will create the line description automatically according to what release of the operating system you are on If you are using 1 0 release of ICOM400 then you will need to run a CHGLINASC ICOM400 command and put a END in the Set modem to ASYNC parameter The only drawback of the 1 0 version is if the ICOM400 line description was ever de
41. additional entry fields to enter multiple recipients type a plus sign in the entry field opposite the phrase for more values and press the Enter key If you need to choose a recipient name or recipient group name from a list of names specify SELECT to select one or more recipients SELECT A list is displayed for selection of one or more recipients without having to type each recipient name individually NONE The message will not be sent to a recipient If NONE is selected the E mail field will be used ALL The message is to be sent to all recipients or all groups depending on the value in the Send type prompt recipient name Specify the name of the recipient or recipient group that is to receive the message Message MSG Specify the message that you want to send Messages can be entered that are up to 999 characters in length ICOM 400 also allows you to send pre defined messages These are defined on the Work with Pre Defined Messages display You can enter the identifier of the pre defined message in the message field to send any pre defined message 154 Note Since you are sending an e mail message you may specify amp NL to start a new line All text appearing after amp NL will appear on the next line of the message amp NL will not appear in the message NONE You do not want to send a message This is possible if you just want to attach a file to be sent to an e mail address and you don t want a
42. all jobs to produce a list of spooled files job name Specify the name of the job that produced the spooled file User USER Specifies the user that originated the spooled file ICOM 400 User Manual 165 CURRENT You want to use the current user to produce a list of spooled files ALL You want to use all users to produce a list of spooled files user name Specify the name of the user that originated the spooled file Output queue OUTQ Specifies the output queue and its associated library where the spooled file resides ALL You want to use all output queues to produce a list of spooled files output queue name Specify the name of the output queue where the spooled file resides LIBL The library list is used to locate the output queue name library name Specify the name of the library where the output queue is located Time period for list PERIOD Specifies the period of time for which the spooled file entries are selected for display This parameter contains two lists of two elements each Beginning time One of the following is used to specify the beginning creation time at which or after spooled file entries are included Any entries created before the specified time and date are not included in the display AVAIL Any time that is available for the beginning date is included begin time Specify the beginning time for the specified beginning date that indicates which spooled file entries are to be include
43. changes ONLY after you have pressed the Enter key When you press Enter on a display after keying updates you are shown the list again with the updates applied If you press Enter again without typing on the display the system returns you to where you were when you requested the edit function Some important fields on this display include the following Q Function authority The authority that a user has to a function Several different system defined function authority levels may be assigned to users ALL allows all operations on the function CHANGE allows all operations on the function except remove and change authority authorities EXCLUDE indicates that all operations on this function are excluded USE allows read access of the function The user cannot change the function USER DEF is displayed by the system when the specific function authorities do not map to any of the pre defined function authorities above Add Specify an X under the Add column to specify the function authority to add an entry If this authority is not granted Add should be blank Update Specify an X under the Update column to specify the function authority to update an entry If this authority is not granted Update should be blank Remove Specify an X under the Remove column to specify the function authority to remove an entry If this authority is not granted Remove should be blank Display Specify an X under the Display column to specify t
44. consists of a group of recipients that you want to send a message to collectively rather than having to send each individual recipient a message NOTE You must press Enter to save your changes Pressing F3 or F12 will lose any changes that you make 66 To add a recipient group follow the steps below 1 If you haven t already enter a name for the recipient group in the Name field 2 Specify a text description of the recipient group in the Text field 3 Enter a sequence number on the first line under the Sequence column Enter the name of a recipient to add to the recipient group under the Recipient column 4 Repeat step 3 until you have added all the recipients you wish to add 5 Press Enter when you are finished adding recipients You will be returned to the Work with Recipient Groups display To exit without saving your changes press F3 or F12 Changing a Recipient Group To change a recipient group enter 2 beside the group you want to change and press Enter You are taken to the Change Recipient Group display where you can make any necessary changes To change the sequence number and associated name of a recipient change the current sequence number to the desired sequence number and press Enter For instance if you want to move a sequence number 10 to appear between sequence numbers 30 and 40 change sequence number 10 to 35 and press Enter The system re sequences them for you To delete a recipient position the cursor on
45. continue processing the next sequence in the list of message queue monitor entries discontinue after the current sequence number or skip to a specific sequence number Whether a message meeting the message queue monitor entry specifications should be excluded or included as a candidate for initiating an Action ICOM 400 User Manual 11 Work with Actions Work with Actions POSLELON GO ar stad Va de Gk Starting characters Type options press Enter 1 Add 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Remove 5 Display 7 Change command list Rep Opt Act Recipient Cmd H ke e 0 ve O 5 mn K H 0 X EMAIL Z z NO Y YE YE YE Y YE N N N N N N N N 2 zZ Zz 4 Zz 4 2 zZ 4 2 O O O O O O O O NZZ Core oe ee ee AA K AAP ee z i D 4 F HF F Zz O Z HRA RRR AA MA Z 4 t 4 FF FH OF J U U U W w w yt t E E E E FH OF zZ UE U G E a e Sample action The Work with Actions display shows all entries for Actions which are defined to ICOM 400 Action entries are parameters which include such items as the name of the Action the type of recipient the name of the recipient you want the Action to affect the message reply whether a command needs to be executed and a text description of the Action You can set up an unlimited number of Actions with
46. display If the display does not contain the information needed you can run the command additional times with different parameter values specified Service ICOM 400 represents the first word in service and support for AS 400 monitoring and messaging ICOM 400 Requires no special hardware or communications equipment Is SAA CUA compliant Has multi level security Has integrated security features Can be integrated with IBM BRMS Can be integrated with IBM Job Scheduler or any scheduler Has a central site that can manage all messages With ICOM 400 you get 15 months FREE maintenance 90 Day money back guarantee No additional charges for upgrades with current maintenance program 24 hour support line PTFs received electronically Product Warranty and Support Product Support Worldwide ICOM 400 User Manual 21 Pinnacle support offers you a wide range of choices and access to experienced responsive technical support personnel ICOM 400 comes with cursor sensitive on line help text as well as comprehensive user documentation Displays are easy to understand and use When You Have A Question e Check the on line help text e Consult the ICOM 400 documentation and other printed information included with ICOM 400 e Review electronic options using Automated Customer Support ACS This is accessed by option 30 from the Main Menu and will allow you to Display answers to commonly asked questions using the Q amp A database S
47. entries are printed in abbreviated list format FULL The detail of each entry is printed in an expanded format User USER Specifies the name of the user profile for the log entries that you want to display or print ALL Include all user profiles in the display or report user name Specify the user profile whose log entries you want to include in the display or report Message identifier MSGID Specifies the message identifier for the log entries that you want to display or print ALL Include all message identifiers in the display or report message identifier Specify the message identifier whose log entries you want to include in the display or report Display Message Queue DSPMSGICM Display Message Queue DSPMSGICM Type choices press Enter Message Queue 4 7 2 ae a Mel de ye Ae Ss OSYSOPR Library Sr ade win A LIBL Time period for output Start time and date Beginning time Be ae tay ae Stare Beginning date E EGIN nnnnn End time and date Ending time 140 ENG UNG d b tes ee es Ae AS vee CURRENT END nnnnn Message ID ALL for more values Message type INFO INQ COMP NONE Exclude Message ID for more values Severity Output The Display Message Queue DSPMSGICM command allows you to display the messages within a message queue using ICOM 400 A summary form of the messages
48. entry to Qbatch This will cause the ZICOM400 subsystem to start after an IPL ADDAJE SBSD QBATCH Job ICOMDQM JOBD ICOM400 ICOMDOQOM Each time a message is generated a held message is released or a held queue is released or if a paging company is changed this subsystem and job is automatically started by ICOM 400 However if you are using the scheduling facilities provided in ICOM 400 it is advisable to implement this startup procedure To automatically start the ICOM 400 Monitors after an IPL Put a YES the for Autostart monitors parameter in your Change System Attributes screen see Chapter 9 System Controls Removing ICOM 400 To remove the ICOM 400 and or the customer support products from your AS 400 enter the following commands MBAINST MBAINST PRODUCT ACS ACTION REMOVE RMVINST NO a Enter MBAINST MBAINST PRODUCT ICM ACTION REMOVE RMVINST YES NOTE If you have Job Manager or any other Pinnacle product on you AS 400 you may choose not to remove the Automated Customer Support product from your system If this is the case skip the first command string NOTE No users can be using ICOM 400 while this command is executing ICOM 400 is capable of supporting a variety of asynchronous modems and is limited only by the requirements of the AS 400 However some types of modems require a more complex configuration than others and therefore require more initial setup time IBM 5853 Modem To config
49. escalation process ends You can use special values to end the message when it has gone through the entire group once or to repeat the message until it is responded to by one of the recipients in the table Tracking and Reporting ICOM 400 offers extensive tracking of the activity and history of ICOM 400 processing ICOM 400 will also total history by message ID from QHST Work with Activity Work with Activity is an important feature of ICOM 400 It allows you to work with activity that has occurred as a result of monitor initiated messages as well as those generated by the user You can keep track of activity generated by any monitor that you specify In the Work with Activity command display you can specify activity for certain monitors or all monitors all monitor types or only one type such as a message queue monitor or a configuration status monitor you can set date limits on the activity you want to work with or you can work with all available activity You may print this activity to a spool file or view it right there on the screen The Work with Activity display shows all the activity that you specified in the WRKATVICM command With this activity you can view individual messages and the message detail of those messages This display will show you the time and date the message was sent as well as the text of the message itself From this screen you can acknowledge a message if it has been escalated or you can remove messages
50. expired are messages that were sent as part of an escalation list but were not acknowledged before the time specified in the Delay prompt expired After all recipients in the escalation table are sent the message and none responds to the message all messages are assigned an EXPD status even if there is a REPEAT in the list that causes the recipients in the list to be messaged again NONE You want to include all messages that are not to escalate and have no associated escalation table Job name JOB 162 Specify the name of the job or jobs whose messages you want to report or display ALL You want to work with messages sent from all jobs CURRENT You want to work with messages sent from the current job job name Specifies the name of a specific job s messages you want to display or report generic job name Specifies that the job name is generic For example specifying BAC would cause all messages for jobs whose names begin with BAC to be included in the report or on the display User USER Specify the name of the user or users whose messages you want to report or display ALL You want to work with all messages sent from all users CURRENT You want to work with all messages sent from the current user user name Specifies the name of a specific user s messages you want to display or report generic user name Specifies that the user name is generic For example specifying AC would cause all messages for users whose names b
51. gees Time period for list Start time and date Beginning time Beginning date nnnnn End time and date Ending time Ending date 2 s sm s E END nnnnn The Work with Spooled Files ICM WRKSPLFICM command displays a list of spooled files available for distribution You may select a time range for the list of spooled files When you press Enter you are taken to the Work with Spooled Files using ICM display Work with Spooled Files using ICM 3 16 03 PS P83 Type options press Enter 2 Change 5 Display 7 Send 8 Send SNDSPLFICM Opt 132 File Job RKRCST RKRCST ESTATTACH ESTATTACH ESTATTACH ESTATTACH ESTATTACH ESTATTACH t Queue Date RIN 3 15 03 RIN 3 15 03 RIN 3 15 03 RIN 3 15 03 RIN 3 15 03 RIN 3 15 03 ZJOBLOG 3 15 03 RINT 3 15 03 ie n oO K O Gc xe E W ve We ee iC ESTATTACH PJOBLOG PUOPRTF ESTATTACH PADEV0008 PADEV0018 U EAA er e E HPpH pp pep Fl z D ogos T A R g T T wW ve O O O O 10 O O O T ak T T T T T T ITSRFRMO1 ITSRFRMO1 ae ak Q Q Q Q ITSRFRMO1 ITSRFRMO1 EVE 3 15 03 ASMEXIT ASMEXIT 3 15 03 3 15 03 QPJOBLOG RESET 3 15 03 QPUOPRTF QPADEV0018 3 15 03 QPJOBLOG QPADEVO0005 EVE I 3 15 03 ASMEXIT ASMEXIT Hew A The Work with Spooled Files using ICM display sh
52. have a network failure it also allows you to ping a server to make sure it is up and running You can specify the TCP IP address of your remote device as well as a specific port number to monitor Adding changing or displaying a remote device monitor To add change or display a remote device monitor enter a 1 on the first line under the Opt column on the Work with Monitors display You will also need to enter a name for your new monitor under the Monitor column and RMTDEV under Type To change an existing monitor enter a 2 beside the monitor you want to change or enter a 2 in the first line under the Opt column along with the name and monitor type To display an existing monitor enter a 5 beside the monitor you want to display or enter a 5 in the first line under the Opt column along with the name and monitor type When you press Enter you are taken to the Add Remote Device Monitor display the Change Remote Device Monitor display or the Display Remote Device Monitor according to which option you have chosen The displays are identical Change Remote Device Monitor Monitor 3 a Sie ear e Be GP ae ees SAMPLE Type changes press TCP IP address s 3 2 404 Bose 8 205 219 23 2 Port number s s s a 8s eS 2s 4 23 PING 1 65535 Schedule Gos onl amp i ae Saws SAMPLE Name ALLDAYS F4 Inactivity interval 1 5 Minutes 1 999 AGO ke aen eth Be oe ne ee Stas SSTEST Name F4 for list Number of occurre
53. have been defined for that recipient PAGER You want to send the message to the pagers that have been defined for that recipient PHONE You want to dial the telephone numbers that have been defined for that recipient FAX You want to send the message to the fax numbers that have been defined for that recipient SPLF You want to send the message to the output queues that have been defined for that recipient NETMSG You want to send the message to a message queue on a remote system that has been defined for this recipient ICOM 400 User Manual 153 Send Message using ICOM 400 Send Mail using ICOM 400 SNDMAILICM Type choices press Enter Name g s Ss 6 Bom 8 BSL os SELE for more values Message File type to send The Send Mail using ICOM 400 SNDMAILICM command is used to send a email message to a single recipient a group of recipients or multiple groups of recipients You can schedule the SNDMAILICM command through a job scheduler if you want the message to be sent at a particular time or as a result of a job running A typical use of the SNDMAILICM within a job scheduler would be to send a message indicating the successful or unsuccessful completion of a job or series of jobs Name NAME Specifies the name of the recipient or group to which you want to send the message You can enter multiple values for this parameter If you are on an entry display and you need
54. in a subsystem CPU capacity You can filter for important messages and exclude messages that you do not want to monitor ICOM 400 can skip message queue entries if a match is found and can monitor for more than just message type and ID it can look for a string of data like a line name controller program code number or any other string ICOM 400 gives you the flexibility to start and stop monitors for the whole system or for individual queues Message filters can be copied from one monitor to another to simplify set up Actions ICOM 400 allows you to respond to messages with pre determined Actions Actions can include items such as e Remote command issuance e Default message replies e Forwarding of messages e Activation of jobs or commands with or without passed parameters e Canceling jobs e Sending customized network messages and e Resetting failed communication lines ICOM 400 will execute up to 999 different commands in response to each message and allows you to customize message text and reply options for non technical staff So if you have a two step response to a message ICOM 400 can execute it for you Schedules ICOM 400 has the most sophisticated scheduling options available Users can define their own monitors and schedules which alert them to important business meetings or any other time management issues they specify Schedules can also be assigned to monitors and recipients Delivery ICOM 400 is the industry s
55. included end time Specify the ending time for the specified ending date that indicates which log entries are to be included Element 4 Ending date One of the following is used to specify the ending date on which or before which the log entries must have been made Any log entries made after the specified date are not included in the display or report CURRENT Log entries whose date is on or before the current date are included in the display or report END The log entries to the end of the log information are included in the display or report end date Specify the ending date The date must be specified in the job date format number of days Specify a number to represent the number of days before the current date that you want to use for the search An example would be 10 If today s date were 3 22 03 date format is mm dd yy the End date for the ICOM 400 log would be 3 12 03 Severity SEV ICOM 400 User Manual 139 Specify the message severity level that you want to include in the report display For example a severity level of 30 would include all messages that are severity level 30 and above The severity level can be specified from 0 to 99 Output OUTPUT Use the following values to specify whether log messages are to be shown on the ICM log display or be printed Displays the ICOM 400 log PRINT Prints the ICOM 400 log Detail DETAIL Specifies the format used for the printed output BASIC The
56. it is being called This field will contain MSG if it is the first time being called or RSP if it is the second Refer to the Pass reply parameter to find out more about when the program is called once or twice Message The exit program generates a message to be played and updates this field with the text This field can be blank in the second call Program value This field is used by the exit program to help know what to do in case it has multiple functions This field can be almost anything The value found in the menu item is basically the starting point and can be changed by the exit program in order to do something different the next time it is called Changing the value by the exit program does not actually change the value in the menu item The PARTDEMOC sample program is a good example Call 1 Step MSG Pass reply is YES Program value in PART amp ORD Program value out PART amp ORD Message out Enter the part number followed by the pound sign Call 2 Step RSP Phone response 123 Program value in PART amp ORD Program value out ACCOUNT Message out There are 19 available for part number 1 2 3 U joint Return code 1 repeat the process Call 3 Step MSG ICOM 400 User Manual 211 m m Program value in ACCOUNT Program value out ACCOUNT Message out To order the part enter your account number followed by the pound sign Call 4 Step RSP Phone response 9876 Program value in ACCOUNT Program value out PART
57. labeled Windows 98 CD ROM and then click OK and then click OK Insert the Windows 98 CD ROM into your CD ROM drive and confirm by clicking OK All necessary files will be automatically installed on your PC A Building driver information database panel briefly appears showing the progress of the procedure Once the database is ready the System Setting Change dialog box opens asking you To finish setting up your new hardware you must restart your computer Do you want to restart your computer now Click Yes to reboot your PC Q To finish setting up your new hardware you must restart your computer Do you want to restart your computer now When Windows 98 is charged after restarting your PC the PhoneRider Board Wizard opens PhoneRider board Wizard MediaPhonics PhoneRider Board Wizard The MediaPhonics PhoneRider Board Wizard appears when Windows opens after restarting the PC MS Welcome to the MediaPhonics PhoneRider Board Wizard On the Welcome panel click Next i i All PhoneRider board drivers have been successfully installed This Wizard will help you to configure your PhoneRider quickly and easily To begin the setup click Next Bah Cancel ICOM 400 User Manual 189 The second panel offers you the possibility to automatically register through MediaPhonics Web page amp Online Registration MS Click Next Take 2 MINUTES to register Registering will allow you to access our Intern
58. lines Execute up to 999 commands for each event Systems Management Monitor configuration status including controllers lines amp devices Monitor remote devices via TCP IP connections Monitor arrival of network files Monitor program failures Monitor program errors Monitor hardware errors Monitors It s Smart Job queues Job run time Message queues QHST Output queues Object amp library size CPU capacity Remote devices Network files Spooled files Statistics Tracks actions over time Logs messages sent amp errors Logs message activity Logs communications data Lists total and prints messages by recipient delivery types groups amp date Total history by message ID from QHST It was easy to install and was working within fifteen minutes of installation There s no maintenance to it You just let COM 400 do its thing You don t have to worry about it We love it Gene Ewert Colbalt Boats It s Consistent It s Guaranteed It s the Right Choice Integration Central site can manage all messages Integrated multi level security Integrated with IBM s BRMS 400 amp Advanced Job Scheduler or any scheduler SAA CUA compliant Service 30 day FREE TRIAL 15 months FREE maintenance 90 day MONEY BACK guarantee No additional charges for upgrades while under maintenance 24 hour support line Receive PTFs electronically PINNACLE Inc Pinnacle is a leading edge provi
59. location name as te Ay Se Allow reply e ty sp ee Pe Sek Ae Sp NO NO YES Pre message information amp SYSID amp QJOB amp DATE amp TIME Post message information To add a network message delivery entry follow the steps below 1 Specify the message queue and library on the remote system to which you want the messages sent LIBL indicates that the library is a member of you library list 2 Specify the remote location name of the system to which you are sending the message queue messages You may either specify the system name or the network identifier and location name This last value is specified in the nnnnnnnn cccccccc format where nnnnnnnn is the network identifier and cccccccc is the location name 3 Specify if you want to allow replies to a message sent to this message queue All other information is optional This delivery type allows you to communicate with a remote system on your network It is important that you obtain the correct remote location name of the system to which you are sending a network message ICOM 400 must be installed on the remote system in order to send a message Changing a Recipient To change a recipient enter a 2 beside the recipient you want to change on the Work with Recipients display You are taken to the Change Recipient display Refer to Adding a Recipient for more information on the Change Recipient display fields ICOM 400 User Manual 63 Copying
60. m m List type Indicates the list type for this message list You can specify a recipient RCP ora group GRP type Recipient Group Specify the recipient or group associated with this message list You can specify ALL for all recipients USER for the recipient associated with the user code for this menu or a specific recipient or group To bring up a list of existing recipients groups press F4 Unanswered messages only Indicates if you want to play only those messages that have not been answered Messages to be listed first Indicate the order in which you want to list messages LAST indicates that you want to list messages in descending order by date and time FIRST indicates that you want to list messages in ascending order by date and time Include date in message Specify if you want to include the message date when the message is played Include time in message Specify if you want to include the message time when the message is played Option 3 Work with IP Entries See Chapter 6 Work with Recipients Option 9 Frequently Asked Questions about Inbound Voice Can I set up the inbound voice so that it will skip the user code entry and start playing the menu Answer Yes First go to the ICMVOICE menu and create a user code with the appropriate menu assigned to it Second access the Work with IP Entries display and locate the entry that defines the PC receiving the calls Take option 2 on the entry and chang
61. mete 0220 022F Wj nput Output Range 0388 0388 Input Output Range 0100 010F Wii bi P g d Setting based on Basic configuration 0000 Change Setting Use automatic setting a a When the Configure Analog Devices SoundComm Conflicting device list panel appears check for conflicts on resources and if you find any resolve them Then click OK Resolving conflicts To resolve any conflicts here or on the following panels select the next Basic configuration nnnn entry from the drop down menu for the Setting based on option until no conflicts exist Do the same on the following two panels Resources rsl Analog Devices MPU 401 Plug and Play Resource settings Resource type Setting Meee 0330 0331 i Interrupt Request 07 Setting based on Basic configuration 0000 7 Change Setting J Use automatic seting Conflicting device list No conflicts Resources l 2 Analog Devices Gameport Plug and Play Resource settings Resource type Setting Meee 0200 0207 Setting based on Basic configuration 0000 x Change Setting M Use automatic setings Conflicting device list ICOM 400 User Manual 203 When this panel appears select the Driver from disk A MediaPhonics PhoneRider Card 1 2 Telephony Accelerator provided by hardware manufacturer option and then Say click OK Select which driver you want to install for your new hardware Windows Hii de
62. monitor you must add the QHST entries Enter a 2 beside the monitor you want to change and press Enter You are taken to Change QHST Monitor display 104 Change QHST Monitor Monitor s e aoe Gee GY de os Sa Grok amp SAMPL Inactivity interval 60 Seconds 1 999 PORES oe pede oo Gm de Wel tes ae eum Bh oe Monitor QHST Position to Type options press Enter 1 Add 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Remove 5 Display 7 Change compare data Opt Seq Msg ID MsgType Sev Job name Schedule Action S Fre Fa H Ke 010 ALL REPLY A ALI NONE 020 ALL 70 A SAMPLE SAMP 030 ALL A SAMPLE SAMP 040 CPFO907 A SAMPLE SAMPLE 050 CPF1816 A SAMPLE SAMPLE x N eal Z oO t F F HF F OF 122A S EA ww x H t E E HF F OF Zz zZ 2 m HK Zz ify Zz J Zz Z HW Z 060 CPF1817 A SAMPLE SAME 070 ALL PM AL NO 080 ALL E AL NON z lt H Zz A o za O OOOO fl F d J Z From this display you can add change copy remove or display a message queue entry as well as change the compare data for an entry Enter 1 and a sequence number for the message ID you want to add Press Enter and you are taken to the Add Message Queue Monitor Entry display Add QHST Queue Monitor Monitor na Be Ms ud at a eA a SPs e SAMPLE
63. name for your new monitor under the Monitor column and CFGSTS under Type To change an existing monitor enter a 2 beside the monitor you want to change or enter a 2 in the first line under the Opt column along with the name and monitor type To display an existing monitor enter a 5 beside the monitor you want to display or enter a 5 in the first line under the Opt column along with the name and monitor type When you press Enter you are taken to the Add Config Status Monitor display the Change Config Status Monitor display or the Display Config Status monitor according to which option you have chosen The displays are identical Add Config Status Monitor MOnDEOL 2 ch Above a tk wr Se tA A Sh 8 TEST Type choices press Enter Configuration description e TVPG sd sahai y uss 2S ee a te ge eae ASIEN N CTL DEV SEQEUS gt Kos Sets ADE ese Zoe eet Ao ere ORLA ak ber 1 15 F4 for list Test So Met UST ter Bee eS git 2S hey aL Ter He Le XTS ISNOT Schedule dee Sen EI ee RI a ee SS ALLDAYS e ALLDAYS F4 Inactivity interval s s sos s s e i 15 inutes 1 999 AGETOM aed Apis a Moca Ge en D Be Ge ee a e F4 for list Number of occurrences 10 ber 1 99 ESE i eet She eS Mat Vb ae Src st amp NONE Some important fields for this display include the following ICOM 400 User Manual 93 Configuration description The description name of the line controller or devic
64. of all the drivers in a specific location so you can select the driver you want Note This option is normally selected by default lt Back Cancel ICOM 400 User Manual 187 Add New Hardware Wizara The third panel allows you to select the location of the PhoneRider drivers Select the Specify a location check box only Specify the path C MPIZDRV and then click Next Path should be C MPI2DRV a lt Back Newt coca Add New Hardware Wizard The fourth panel informs you that Windows has found the driver and displays its name and location Click Next Path should be C MPIZDRV MPDspw98 inf Copying Files A small Copying files panel appears showing that files are being copied onto your hard drive 188 Add New Hardware Wizard The Wizard informs you then that Windows has installed the software required for the PhoneRider Accelerator gt PhoneRider Accelerator for Windows 98 Windows has finished installing the software that your new Press the Finish button hardware device requires Despite of the label Finish on the button the installation procedure will continue Reboot when prompted Two New Hardware Found panels will inform you that the PhoneRider COM Port and Analog Devices AD 1815 Sound Controller were detected Then the Insert Disk panel pops up asking you Please insert the disk labeled Windows 98 CD ROM Q Please insert the disk
65. on the first line under the Opt column on the Work with Monitors display You will need to enter a name for your new monitor under the Monitor column and SBS under Type To change an existing monitor enter a 2 beside the monitor you want to change or enter a 2 in the first line under the Opt column along with the monitor name and type To display an existing monitor enter a 5 beside the monitor you want to display or enter a 5 in the first line under the Opt column along with the monitor name and type When you press Enter you are taken to the Add Subsystem Monitor display the Change Subsystem Monitor display or the Display Subsystem Monitor according to which option you have chosen The displays are identical Add Subsystem Monitor Monitor Ges Googe 1h owe ce BR GS SAMPLE Type choices press Enter Subsystem Library Job limit Test ICOM 400 User Manual 109 Seh du l ce ra nan SO Era Ge ow ear ALLDAYS Name ALLDAYS F4 Inactivity interval V5 Minutes 1 999 AGEUOMY eS lt 9 tgs BORE A ai Hee SS Ge a Name F4 for list Number of occurrences 10 Number 1 99 Text ge ty oe gh A ee we ae AE Ah wt wd aL An is NONE Some important fields for these displays include Subsystem The subsystem you want to monitor for active jobs Q Library The library that contains the subsystem Q Job limit The upper limit of jobs from 1 to 999 that can be placed on the specif
66. pager e mail etc Enter the recipient name JULIA If this delivery method is not needed leave blank and press Enter to continue Output queue Library 34 This display asks you to provide an output queue and library for the recipient you are adding This allows you to send a spooled file to a specific output queue If you do not want the recipient to receive spooled files simply leave this field blank You can now add additional recipients and delivery methods When you are finished simply leave the Recipient field blank and press Enter Quick Start Wizard display 23 A recipient is a person group of persons or a device to whom you want to deliver a pager message AS 400 message e mail message ring a telephone or fax Recipients can have multiple delivery methods i e pager e mail etc Enter the recipient name JULIA A remote system message queue and library name are needed below if you would like to send a message to a remote system If this delivery method is not needed then leave blank and press Enter to continue Message queue Library we E Remote location name This display asks you to provide a remote message queue and library for the recipient you are adding This allows you to send a message to a specific message queue on a remote system If you do not want the recipient to receive remote messages simply leave this field blank You can now add additional recipie
67. play for this option PGM indicates that you wish to execute a program to run when this menu option is selected If you specify PGM in the Message field you must enter a program name and library in the Program to process and Library fields If PGM is not used you can also enter plain text in the message field Program to process Indicate the program and library that you want to execute when PGM is specified in the Message field Specify NONE if you do not want to execute a program or the name of the program you want to run Program value Specifies a value that will be passed to the program This value is used by the program to know what to process next Refer to Appendix E for more information NONE indicates that there are no program values to pass to the program you have selected to run Pass reply Specifies if you want to call the specified program twice Once in order to request the user to enter a number such as salesperson number and then a second time in order to pass the number that the user entered to your program NO indicates that you do not want ICOM 400 User Manual 183 to pass a reply to your program YES indicates that you do want to pass a reply to your program For more information on INFO menu item type refer to Appendix E Menu MENU The MENU menu item type allows you to play a secondary menu You can specify the option number a text description of the menu and the secondary menu associ
68. recipient you want to utilize the telephone notification Typically this is a seven digit number However it may be a 1 followed by the area code then the seven digit number If this delivery method is not needed leave blank and press Enter to continue Telephone number This display asks you to provide a telephone number for the recipient you are adding ICOM 400 will ring a telephone as a notification If you do not want the recipient to receive telephone notifications simply leave this field blank Press Enter Quick Start Wizard display 21 A recipient is a person group of persons or a device to whom you want to deliver a pager message AS 400 message e mail message ring a telephone or fax Recipients can have multiple delivery methods ise pager e mail etc Enter the recipient name JULIA If this delivery method is not needed leave blank and press Enter to continue Message queue Library This display asks you to provide a message queue and library for the recipient you are adding This allows you to send a message to a specific message queue If you do not want the recipient to receive message queue messages simply leave this field blank Quick Start Wizard display 22 A recipient is a person group of persons or a device to whom you want to deliver a pager message AS 400 message e mail message ring a telephone or fax Recipients can have multiple delivery methods i e
69. run the command additional times with different parameter values specified For any message that you want to see additional information press Help or F1 and you are taken to the Additional ICM Log Information display where you can review the entire message plus any additional information that is available 20 Display QHST Log Entry Display QHST Log Entry 3 23 03 17 08 35 Position to message Type options 5 Display Message Opt ID CPA0702 CPA4067 CPCA08C EPCLI125 CPC1134 CPC1236 CPC1602 EPE21 91 CPC2601 CPC2605 CPC2606 press bh N e m POoOrFRRNUNE S Message xxxxxx x received by procedure C D I R Save file ARAKERE KR IMT xKKKKKKK K already contains data KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK File system mounted Job KOK RK RK OR KK OK OK OK OK kK was ended by user KKKKKK Shared pool changed Job submitted for job schedule entry Subsystem description x in library Ch Object KKKKKKKKKK in KKKKKKKKKK type KKKKKKKK deleted Line description eexxs Created Vary on completed for device xx Vary off completed for device xxx The Display QHST Log Entry display is a result of processing the Display QHST using ICM DSPQHSTICM command Based on parameters requested in the command the display lists text messages associated with processing For example if you specified 30 all messages with a severity of 30 or higher would be selected for the
70. should contact your paging company to determine the maximum number of pages that they can handle in a single transmission If you O O OO 72 have set the maximum queue depth at 100 and specified a maximum pages per connect of 10 for the page company ICOM 400 will break the 100 pages into 10 groups of 10 The default value is 9999 pages QO Number of retries The number of times that ICOM 400 will re dial the pager company ICOM 400 will continue re dialing until a connection is made or the number of retries is exceeded This value can range from 1 to 9 retries The default is 3 retries QO Limit one page per message Sometimes pager messages are longer than the maximum message length If NO is specified multiple pages will be sent If YES is specified only one page will be sent QO Sending system The system in the network that sends messages for this company Messages can be entered from any terminal on your network The messages are routed to the sending system by ICOM 400 LCL specifies that messages are sent through the modem on the originating system Modem rate The line speed that you want to use for pager equipment for this company These include 300 bps 600 bps 1200 bps 2400 bps 9600 bps Most paging companies use 2400 baud or less Q Parity The type of parity that you want to use for pager equipment EVEN specifies that the line is configured with even parity ODD specifies that the line is configured with odd p
71. status table None Acknowledged by Sia ch tee So REDLY iy wate 8 GP 2D amp lt a a ae bt NONE Message Sierra Pacific Power Company EFT file Some important fields on the Display Information display include the following Q Entry status The status of the message history entry Valid statuses include Sent The message was successfully sent Pending The message is queued to be sent A message that is pending is normally waiting for a pager queue depth or time requirement to be completed Error There was an error when sending the message Held The message has been held Scheduled The message has been scheduled for transmission at a later time Ready The message is ready for transmission and is awaiting communication resources to become available a Error message ID The error message identifier This will be a completion message ID if the message was successfully sent Q Escalation status The escalation status of the message Valid statuses include Escalating The message has been sent but now acknowledged and the escalation time specified in the Delay prompt in the escalation table has not been exceeded Ackd The message has been acknowledged and the escalation process has ended Escalated The message has been escalated It was sent as part of an escalation table but was not acknowledged before the time specified in the Delay prompt expired The escalation pr
72. the first line under the Opt column along with the name and monitor type When you press Enter you are taken to the Add CPU Monitor display the Change CPU Monitor display or the Display CPU monitor according to which option you have chosen The displays are identical 94 Add CPU Monitor Monitor Type choices press JOD 8 tal as Sayles we RAM A Ge ala Seo Be Name generic ANY SUBSYSTEM e se sns osoan Ee we e Name ANY CPUS LIMES Sp Fosi ae g Bg A eb e Number 1 90 Based on system CPUS Number 0 99 Schedule ms s0 4 wy de he Dh ee Re Ge Name ALLDAYS F4 Inactivity intervad woe 2 adm amp 4 Minute 1 999 AGULOMN s at i WM A a a Se eR ee Name F4 for list Text Some important fields for these displays include Job The job or jobs that you want to monitor for exceeding CPU percentage capacity ANY indicates that you want to monitor any job for exceeding the capacity SYSTEM indicates that you want to monitor the entire system for exceeding the specified capacity You can also specify the name of a specific job or a generic job name OQ CPU limit The processing capacity percentage of the CPU for the job s specified in the Job field This percentage can range from 1 to 90 If this limit is reached the monitor will initiate the Action you have specified This value is also used when SYSTEM is specified in the Job field This value is checked before the percentage value in th
73. the selected monitor s defined to ICOM 400 and allows you to add change copy display hold or release and remove monitors Monitor entries include the name of the monitor the type of monitor the name of the schedule you want the monitor to follow the last time the monitor was activated and a text description of the monitor You can set up an unlimited number of monitors with varying specifications The appropriate monitor must be active to monitor and perform Actions defined to ICOM 400 You have several options available from this display You can add 1 a new monitor change 2 an existing monitor copy 3 a monitor s characteristics to a new monitor remove 4 a monitor or display the characteristics of a monitor You can hold or release 6 a monitor that is running or held or you can display the activity 7 associated with a certain monitor Also if the monitor is currently inactive you can make it check immediately for a condition 8 Once it checks it will go back to being inactive Some important fields on this display include the following QO Wakeup The next time and date that the monitor will wake up to check for conditions that are specified for the monitor HELD indicates that the monitor is not active and needs to be released WAIT indicates that the monitor is waiting on the main monitor of its type to be active before it can wakeup ICOM 400 will wait until the monitor is activated to calculate the next wake
74. the sequence number of the recipient and clear the sequence number Press Enter Your recipient is deleted and the remaining recipients are resequenced in increments of 10 Copying a Recipient Group To copy a recipient group enter a 3 beside the group you want to copy and press Enter You are taken to the Copy Recipient Group display Enter a name for the new group in the New Name field Press Enter to add the new group to the list of existing groups Removing a Recipient Group To delete a recipient group enter a 4 beside the group s you want to delete and press Enter You are taken to the Confirm Delete of Recipient Groups display To delete your selected group s press Enter or press F12 to return to the Work with Recipient Groups display to change your selections Displaying a Recipient Group To display a recipient group enter a 5 beside the group you want to display and press Enter You are taken to the Display Recipient Group display where the recipients and their associated sequence numbers are displayed Sending a Message to a Recipient Group To send a message to a recipient group enter a 7 beside the group and press Enter You are taken to the Send Message using ICOM 400 SNDMSGICM command display The name of the group is displayed in the Name parameter and GRP is specified in the Send type parameter See Chapter 3 for more information on sending a message ICOM 400 User Manual 67 Edit Group Authority To edit th
75. up time and date DTAQWAIT indicates that the monitor is waiting on an entry ina data queue This applies to a spooled file monitor only Note This applies to a spooled file monitor when there is no schedule attached to the monitor i e it has a schedule of ALLDAYS but there is a schedule attached to an Action within a spooled file monitor Note Each time a spooled file in the output queue reaches RDY status an entry is sent to the data queue The spooled file monitor will only monitor spooled files that hit the output queue in ready RDY status The monitor will not register files that are in a held HLD status If you want to be notified about a certain spooled file hold the file and then release it The monitor will then notify you if that spooled file reaches the output queue Q Act Whether or not the monitor is currently active ICOM 400 User Manual 91 If you need more information on any of the fields on this display please refer to the online help Before we go into the individual monitors there are a few fields that must be defined These fields are applicable to each one of the monitors so instead of going over each field several times we will discuss it once here The following fields are used when setting up and changing all monitors associated with ICOM 400 These include QO Schedule The name of the schedule that you would like to assign to the monitor ALLDAYS indicates that you would like the monitor to ope
76. values You may end all monitor types or only a specify type You can specify as many types as you want Monitors must be currently running to be ended ICOM 400 User Manual 111 Option 4 Work with monitor types The Work with Monitor Types display allows you to specify monitors of a specific type with which you want to work From this display you can work with monitors of a specific type start and end monitors or work with the activity of a specific monitor type Work with Monitor Types Type options press Enter 6 Work with monitors 9 Work with activity Monitor Type CFGSTS CPU JOB JOBO MSGQ NETF OBJSIZ OUTO OQHST RMTDI SPLF SBS USRDFN Opt Active zZ glee Aa ee A A A AA A A A A 7 Start monitor type End monitor type Text Configuration Description Status CPU Percent Used Job Job Queue Message Queue Network file Object size Output Queue QHST file Remote Device Spooled File Subsystem User Defined Option 5 Work with monitor subsystem The Work with Monitor Subsystem option takes you to the Work with Active Job display 11 00 46 CPU 0 Type options 2 Change press 3 Hold Opt Subsystem Job User ZICOM400 ICMCMSGO ICOMDQM ICOMDOQM3 ICOMDOQM4 ICOMDOQM5 ICOMRPY1 QSYSOPR QSYS PGM PGM PGM PGM PGM PGM PGM Elapsed time Enter 4 End 8 Work with spooled files Work with Active Job
77. you are taken to the Add Job Queue Monitor display the Change Job Queue Monitor display or the Display Job Queue monitor according to which option you have chosen The displays are identical 96 Add Job Queue Monitor MONTEOR so ae us Oe og ee So eh ae ee ee TEST Type choices press Enter Job Queue oo se eet eo A et a Ae e TAD RAGY Se see en Se we ett ad A e a e LIBE Job LIMELE Ge a ee oe er we a eS ber 1 99 se hedule a e areta E AY e MR OR e ALLDAYS F4 Inactivity interval Minutes 1 999 Action Oe wt er Baas e F4 for list r of occurrences ber 1 99 Some important fields for these displays include Job queue The job queue that want to monitor for batch jobs Q Library The library that contains the job queue Job limit The upper limit of the number of jobs from 1 to 999 that can be placed on the specified job queue When this number is reached the first time ICOM 400 will initiate the specified Action The Action will be initiated again when the number of occurrences has been met The number of occurrences count is then reset to zero and the cycle is repeated Message Queue MSGQ A message queue monitor allows you to monitor for the presence of messages in a specific message queue Messages are sent to the message queue via a job you run or a scheduled job run by a job scheduler If the message meets the job specifications of the sequence nu
78. you may press F4 Prompt after you type 7 on the command line This will prompt the SNDMSGICM command If the message has been escalated you can display the escalation pattern by typing an 8 beside the message You can acknowledge a message by typing a 9 beside the message The message is either acknowledged or a message is displayed indicating that the message is not eligible for acknowledgement Option 5 allows you to display specific information about a message You can view on what date a message was entered and sent as well as the time it was entered and sent You can view the recipient and or recipient group of the message the delivery type the entry status error message ID and where the message was sent from i e the job that sent the message user and number of the job You can also view the escalation status who acknowledged the message if it has an escalation status of Ackd the text of the message and if applicable the file sent with the message ICOM 400 User Manual 49 Display Information Dat ntered sent 3 15 03 3 15 03 Tim ntered sent 10 48 26 10 48 26 Recipient Recipient group NONE NONE Delivery type I EMAIL Delivery information lance pbsnow com Entry Status 4 sma e te a a wo BOB SNE Error message ID ICM3046 Sent from JOD S i Ge SS a Se ee ey ae SH OPRADEV OOT USC See esi SP car ee ee De 8 LANCE NUMbEr ho a fe cas te Bt Gee a ee 3 021241 Escalation
79. your reply at the very beginning of the body of the e mail and you must also place lt lt and gt gt around your reply For instance if you want to reply to an inquiry message with a C you must place lt lt C gt gt at the beginning of the message Replies form a pager must also contain the lt lt and gt gt All other information for this delivery method is optional PHONE PHONE ICOM 400 User Manual 59 The PHONE delivery method sends telephone notifications It will ring the phone number that you specify for the recipient Once you pick up it will issue a set of tones so that you will know that it is your AS 400 that is messaging you or if you have the voice capability it will speak the message Add Recipient Delivery Delivery type 3 PHONE Type choices press Enter Sequence Number 001 999 Available schedule Name ALLDAYS F4 On Call schedule wigna cee ve we E Name NONE ALLDAYS F4 Phone number bus ao wua Nis Peer ae se IP entry for voice messaging Name ICMDFT ANY F4 Security code de eth E Allow 2 way communication NO YES Pre message information Post message information To add a phone delivery entry with tones 1 Enter the phone number that you want to dial All other information for this method is optional NOTE Within the Pre message information field a special value of NOTONE can also be specified to disable t
80. 0 Installation COM 400 will automatically install for a user with ALLOBJ authority such as QSECOFR You will need the following items for a successful installation ICOM 400 Requirements Q An IBM AS 400 running one of the following versions of OS 400 u u Page Manager ICOM 400 OS 400 V3 RO V3 R7 V3 RO V3 R7 V3 Ri V4 R5 CISC 16 MB DASD RISC 21 MB DASD E mail Requirements QO QO A TCP IP connection Your ISP s mail host server address and port number The E mail addresses of all the recipients Paging Requirements m Q A free V 24 communications port NOTE We suggest that you have a dedicated communications line this is preferred not required An asynchronous modem The modem speed will be determined by your paging company 2400 Baud is standard Most synchronous modems can be set to asynchronous mode If you plan to share a modem for both synchronous and asynchronous modes you will be required to reset the modem between uses NOTE See modem configuration at the end of this chapter for further explanation Digital or alphanumeric pagers and paging service from a local provider If you have more than one paging service you will need information on each of them If you do not have a paging service you can choose from several in your local area Consult the yellow pages or call one of these national services PageNet 1 800 724 3638 MobilComm 1 800 879 7585 A
81. 00 command see Chapter 10 Once you have selected parameters for QHST that you want to display you are taken to the Display QHST Log Entry display which shows all the messages in QHST based on the parameters you selected Display QHST Log 2 14 00 10 33 00 Position to message ID Type options Enter 5 Display press Message po TID PCA08C PC1134 PC1236 PC1602 PC2191 PC2605 PC2607 PC2609 PC3701 PC3704 PC3708 GRAEF OOF OO QO On You may display a message by entering a 5 beside the message ID you want to display and pressing NON OWORFRRERENUN SBS Count Message KAKKKKKKKKKKKAAX File system mounted Shared pool x changed Job submitted for job schedule entry x Subsystem description in library cha Object KKKKKKKKKK in KKKKKKKKKK type KKKKKKKK deleted Vary on completed for device xKxKKK Vary on completed for line x xx xkxKx Vary on completed for controller x x x x 1549556828 objects saved from library x x x x 1549556828 objects saved from library x x x x No objects saved from library All objects excl enter The Display Detail screen displays the details of the message 2 14 00 92 5519 2 14 00 Display Detail Position to 2 14 00 STRMSF completed successfully Bottom Press 118 Enter to continue F3 Exit F8 Add to monitor F12 Cancel F17 Top F18 Bottom To add
82. 128 Function authorities 124 SECURITY 126 WRKHST 128 H Hayes Compatible modem 41 History Remove 79 History information 47 History Information 19 35 42 79 80 82 83 84 HLDMONICM 135 142 HLDMSGQICM 135 143 Hold Message Queue Monitor 143 Hold Monitor using ICOM 400 142 I IBM 5853 Modem 38 IBM 7852 modem 40 IBM 7855 10 Model Asynchronous operation 40 Synchronous operation 39 IBM 7855 10 Modem 39 ICOM 400 e mail address 120 123 133 156 216 ICOM 400 Main Menu 41 ICOM 400 Voice 25 45 171 172 ICOM 400 User Manual 219 Inactivity interval 11 91 94 95 96 97 101 102 103 104 105 109 119 121 installation 23 Installation CD ROM 24 E mail Requirements 23 Faxing requirements 23 Internet download 24 Paging requirements 23 Tape 24 Interactive message queue 119 124 introduction message 174 IP entries 55 76 77 IP entry 59 60 77 78 L Line description information 36 Line description resource name 27 Line wrap action 120 123 Log entries retention days 121 M Mail host port 26 Mail host server address 26 Maintenance 169 Message queue monitor Add entry 97 Modem configuration 36 38 Asynchonous modems 36 Hayes Compatible modem 41 IBM 5853 Modem 36 38 IBM 7852 Modem 40 IBM 7855 10 modem 36 IBM 7855 10 Modem 39 modem instructions 36 122 modems ModemBlaster 171 174 PhoneRider 171 172 18
83. 5 186 187 192 193 194 195 199 204 205 Monitor Message Queue 143 Monitor types See Monitors Monitors Configuration status CFGSTS 10 51 52 88 89 90 92 110 142 144 CPU CPU 51 52 88 89 93 110 142 144 CPU monitor CPU 93 Job JOB 10 20 51 88 94 101 143 145 Job Monitor JOB 94 Job queue JOBQ 51 88 95 143 145 Job Queue JOBQ 95 Message queue MSGQ 11 51 62 96 97 142 143 144 145 Message Queue MSGQ 96 Network file NETF 51 88 100 143 145 Network File NETF 100 Object size OBJSIZ 51 88 101 143 145 Object Size OBJSIZ 101 Output queue OUTQ 51 88 102 143 145 Output Queue OUTQ 102 QHST QHST 51 88 103 143 145 Remote device RMTDEV 51 88 105 143 145 Remote Device RMTDEV 105 220 Spooled file SPLF 51 Spooled File SPLF 105 Subsystem SBS 108 User defined USRDFN 51 88 109 143 145 User Defined USRDFN 109 MONMSGQICM 135 142 143 N Notify recipients not oncall 121 Number of occurrences 93 96 102 103 105 P Pager Company Adding 70 Changing 72 Copying 72 Displaying 72 Removing 72 POP3 host server address 120 123 Pre defined Message Adding 75 Changing 76 77 Copying 76 78 Displaying 76 78 Removing 76 78 Sending 76 Pre defined messages 75 Product Warranty 169 PTF Retrieval 167 Q Queue depth
84. 5 beside the message ID whose length you want to display and press Enter On the Select Message Details to Display screen place a 2 in the space provided Press Enter to go to the Display Field Data screen Under the Length column is the length of the message data variable QO Test Whether you want ICOM 400 to monitor for message data that is equal to the compare data or unequal to the compare data EQ indicates that the compare data must equal the specified message data NE indicates that the compare data must not equal the specified message data Compare data The data that you want ICOM 400 to use to compare with message data in the text of a message identifier NOTE To duplicate an entry press F16 on an existing entry For example You want to know when an important job you are running has finished processing So you set up a message queue monitor entry to monitor for a certain message ID for instance CPFnnnn Job amp 1 amp 2 ended successfully Since you do not want to know when every job that is processing ends you must specify which job or message data within the message text of a certain message ID you want to monitor Beside the monitor entry enter a 7 to go to the Change Compare Data display Specify a sequence number for your first compare data entry Under STR enter a 1 as the starting position You will need to enter the length of the message data under Len You must specify whether you want your compare data to b
85. 56 216 Compare data Changing 99 D Delivery method EMAIL 12 14 19 20 45 46 47 48 49 50 53 56 57 58 112 132 150 151 FAX 14 19 20 45 47 48 56 57 60 150 151 MSGQ 10 14 45 47 50 56 57 60 88 90 143 145 151 NETMSG 15 19 45 48 50 56 57 62 151 PAGER 14 19 45 46 48 50 56 57 151 180 PHONE 14 44 45 48 56 57 58 59 75 151 SPLE 10 15 44 45 48 50 56 57 61 88 90 105 132 133 143 145 151 Delivery type 12 46 47 49 57 58 59 60 61 62 112 113 132 Display ICM Log Information 81 Display ICOM 400 Log Entries 136 Display Log 80 Display Message Queue 138 Display QHST 21 79 84 85 86 104 124 Displaying Log Detail 86 DSPLOGICM 20 80 81 135 136 DSPMSGICM 138 DSPQHSTICM 21 84 85 86 E Edit function authority 125 126 127 128 Edit Group Authority 67 E mail Communications Entries 83 End ICOM 400 subsystem 134 End Message Queue Monitor 142 End monitor 110 ENDMSGOQICM 135 142 Entry status 47 49 79 80 147 148 Error e mail address 26 Escalation status 19 47 49 50 79 80 147 148 158 160 Escalation table 14 18 20 45 46 49 50 56 64 73 74 113 160 162 Escalation Table Adding 73 Changing 74 Copying 74 Displaying 74 Removing 74 F Fax Communications Entries 84 Force action 97 98 104 Force depth 129 130 function authorities 42 119 125 126
86. AMPLE2 menu In the PARTDEMOC program you can see that it first generates the message to be played Enter the part number followed by the pound sign Once that message is played and the person keys in the part number then pound the program is called again with the part number The program then calls the look up program to find out how many are in stock and then generates another message to be played There are 19 available for part number 1 2 3 U joint This process is repeated until the user hangs up Next is the list of parameters that are needed by the exit program and an explanation of their use They must be used in this order and with this field length ID Char 10 Pass reply Char 4 Step Char 10 Message Char 1000 Program value Char 10 Phone Response Char 100 Return code Char 1 ID This is the Identifier found within the definition of the user code that was entered by the person on the phone This ID could help the exit program to know who is initiating the call Pass reply YES means that the exit program will be called twice Once to ask the person on the phone for a number such as part salesperson or a selection Then a second time that will have the phone response NO means that the exit program will be called once For instance this may be used to retrieve the current sales for the week or play the current CPU utilization QO Step This field lets the exit program know whether it is the first or second time that
87. Adding an IP Entry To add an IP entry enter a 1 on the first line under the Opt column Press Enter to go to Add IP Entry display Type choices press Enter ENGEY sa wa IP address POLE oka else ik a ey GS ar an en Eo OA e we Number 1 65535 Telephone prefix Characters Default inbound user code F F4 for list Text The Add IP Entry display is used to add an IP entry for the PC that will send the voice message Some important fields include the following QO IP address The IP address of the PC you will use for voice messaging The format for an IP address is 000 000 000 000 o NOTE To find out the IP address of a machine if using a Windows operating system go to your Start button gt Run and then type command if running Win 9x or cmd if running Win NT or 2000 At the prompt and type Route print There should be four columns of numbers on the screen The IP address of the machine is the top number on the column labeled Interface Port The port of the PC on which the voice software is running This can be a number between 1 and 65535 The default value is port 49000 Default inbound user code Specify the default user code that ICOM 400 will use for the Inbound Voice feature NONE indicates that you do not have a default user code To bring up a list of existing user codes press F4 Q Telephone prefix A telephone prefix is a number or symbol that needs to be placed in fron
88. Carct_ The second panel offers you the possibility to ax Orine Registration P E register through MediaPhonics Web page EEY ick Next Ha Take 2 MINUTES to register Registering will allow you to access our Internet download page At your wish we will notify you by E Mail of new releases Click the button below to register on line using your Internet browser Thank youl Register Now lt Back E Cancel ICOM 400 User Manual 207 The Telephony Drivers panel opens Telephony Dri 7 BY elephony Drivers Click Next Please configure your Phonerider telephony drivers You can specify which services are used by your PhoneRider line Configure The Audio diagnostic panel appears Press the Test the audio system button even though you will not hear any audio MediaPhonics PhoneRider Board Wizard Q Audio diagnostic This test enables you to verify whether your PhoneRider can play sounds on the speakers To start the test click the button below lt Back Hert Cancel The Diagnostic Status window opens Click Stop if Playing sound on the speakers Press Stop to end he the diagnostic The Wizard asks whether you have heard the sound Always Did you hear the sound on the speakers Click Yes You will return to the Audio Diagnostic panel Click Next 208 MediaPhonics PhoneRider Board Wizard RS Line and speakerphone diagnostic This test allows
89. EE EERE EEE EEE EE 56 Option 2 Work with Recipient GrOUPS cece EE EEE EEE REE EEE EEE 65 Option 3 Work with Schedules 2 rN IU EEE I EEE EE EERE EEE EE 68 Option 4 Work with Pager COMPANIES 1 0 ccc EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE 71 Option 5 Work with Escalation Tables cccccecce etn EEE REE EEE 74 Option 6 Work with Pre Defined MeSSAGES cece eee e cent eee eee ene ene teen e eee enna es 75 Option 9 Work with IP Entri S EEE EE EERE IEEE EEE EEE EE 77 CHAPTER 7 HISTORY INFORMATION cccccccccscecccccesceseeeseeeeeeeeceeneeaeeaeeaseaseaseaseasensensense 80 Option 1 Remove History 22s feet vein enere cela wedi e RIELE EA LAANE Peay cana coca EE dea a eae ea oes 80 Option 2 Display Logue iiitr an de A AAEE ddd caw oaks E A E EEE devine oe 81 Option 3 REMOVE LOG ENFES renna erenn cede cecaveieedanevbeeweee dd eta walcevece ven eeded file ENN eesti 83 Options 4 and 6 Display Resource Communication Entries 1 and 2 cccccceeceeeeeeeeeeees 83 Options 5 and 7 Print Resource Communications Entries 1 and 2 assesseer 84 Options 10 Display E mail Communications ENtri S cece eee eee eee eee nae ne eee ees 84 Option 11 Print E mail Communications Entri S ccccceceeee eee eee eee eee eee eet en nee ne nents 84 Option 12 Display Fax Communications Entries cc cece ee EEE EEE EEE EEE 85 Option 13 Print Fax Communications Entri S ccccecceeee cece eee eee eee eee e
90. EMAIL ne Sent Sier Pacifi 3 15 03 EMAIL e Error Sier Pacifi 15 03 EMAIL ne Error Sier Pacifi 15703 EMAIL ne Error Sier Pacifi 15 03 EMAIL e Error Sier Pacifi 15 03 EMAIL ne Sent Sier Pacifi A H ice D Z Ze Z D FF HF 0 N Z222222K 2HE GDOOCCOHO Zz Ee REY O O11 WO XO D 424244222424 zZ E E AA a d D 22434222424 0000000 0 The Work with History display shows all messages that you requested as a result of processing the Work with History using ICM WRKHSTICM command The display can contain all messages regardless of status or can be conditioned to only include selected messages a date range of messages and so on The time and date of the entry along with its current status and contents are shown In addition delivery type recipients and escalation status are displayed From this display you have many options If a message is in Ready or Pending status Option 3 allows you to Hold a message Type 4 by the messages that you want to remove You will be asked to confirm the removal of your selected messages Option 5 allows you to display the information about messages you select If a message is Held you can release it by typing a 6 by it If a message is in Sent status typing a 7 beside the message will resend it NOTE If you wish to change anything about the message before re sending
91. F py m F py The Work with Voice Menus displays allow you to work with the inbound voice menus that have been defined to ICOM 400 A voice menu is a menu with various options that is played when a user calls ICOM 400 From this display you have many options You can add Option 1 voice menus change Option 2 voice menus that you have already defined copy Option 3 voice menus remove Option 4 voice menus and display Option 5 voice menus The display lists the menu name and a text description of the menu Adding a Voice Menu To add a voice menu enter a 1 on the first line of the Opt column along with the name of the voice menu you want to add Press Enter to go to the Add Voice Menu display ICOM 400 User Manual 181 Add Voice Menu MBAHOV Mer ee Me od ai Bi Oe a te ee Teo el ae eS JULIA Auto select single option NO Text Type options press Enter 1 Add 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Remove 5 Display Menu Opt Opt Item type Text The Add Voice Menu display is used to add a menu and related information about that menu A voice menu is a menu that is associated with an Inbound Voice user code Once a user calls up ICOM 400 and enters their user code a voice menu will be played To add a voice menu follow the steps below 1 Specify if you want to allow a single option to be automatically selected That is if you have only one option on the menu you can specify to autom
92. F 10 3 60 Fax information The fax number sender and recipient to which your spooled file will be sent The recipient name will appear on the cover letter See above E mail address for more information on retrieving a fax number Fax header Whether or not you want to send the fax header along with your fax Attach The name of the spooled file attachment Program to retrieve send info The program that ICOM 400 will use to retrieve the send information Send information The parameters that you want to use to find the send information i e e mail addresses for the spooled file This includes the line number within the spooled file the starting position the length and the search text TEXT indicates that you will search text to identify the send information AFTER indicates that the starting position will be the first character after the located search text Option 6 Work with ICOM 400 e mail The Work with Email display shows all e mail messages that you requested as a result of processing the Work with ICOM 400 Email WRKMAILICM command The e mail messages are messages sent to the ICOM 400 e mail address specified on the in the Change System Attributes display These can be reply messages or returned messages that are a result of an error The display can contain all messages regardless of sender or can be conditioned to only include selected messages a date range of messages and soon The time and date of the entry along w
93. ICOMAA00 The Ultimate AS 400 Messaging Solution Version 3 1 User and Administration Guide We pride ourselves in producing good stuff If you have any questions problems or suggestions regarding this product please contact us at 2 gt PINNACLE 810 S Cincinnati Suite 200 100 S Baumann Tulsa OK 74119 Edmond OK 73034 877 369 6922 800 311 0757 918 587 1536 fax 405 359 7490 fax www pbsnow com info pbsnow com Copyright Pinnacle Business Systems INC 2000 Last Updated 08 12 2003 ICOM 400 User Manual 1 Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS corteso i araa OT AAA OGEI AAAA I ATTE aalaeonrd de hina gate TR I E 2 CHAPTER 1 PRODUCT HIGHLIGHTS AND TECHNICAL OVERVIEW sssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 6 7X 10 ols Mole yuu LOO 7 10 0 E E E ET ETE E E E S EST 6 Providing Cost Effective amp Time Savings Benefits sss ssssrsssssrrrrrrsrrrrrunurrrrnnnnrrrrnnnnerrnnnnnnnennnn 6 A TECHNICAL OVERVIEW OF ICOM 400 ccccccccceeccccceeeeueucueeeeeeecuueeesusuuaueeeesucuuaueeeesugaueeneauaunegs 8 SYSTEMS MANAGEMENE a a aa E a E S DEAA SENEI EE SEELE R 8 MOMO S ci van iis saree EA ENANOS EENES EREI EATE deeds tates vied wah cella uy ETERA AEEA 8 ACTIONS rars ar a ie cbwls setae kow ove dda tee ow see AA A AAA EAA AAA AA aAA a 8 eene e E E AA A A A ATT 9 Deliver yoge irae a a LEE elvan a ee eee dee dy feds want E TE wee alae E EEA EENE ds ee NEE E 9 Send Message using ICOM 400 irre munini ma iunea oa a aa EN
94. IP Entry ICOM 400 User Manual 79 Chapter 7 History Information istory information is another important function within ICOM 400 You must be able to keep track of what messages get sent when and to whom You also need to keep track of any communication errors that might occur as a result of ICOM 400 processing From the ICOM 400 Main Menu select Option 5 History Information and press Enter You are taken to the History Information menu where you have several choices ICMHIST History Information Select one of the following Remove history Display log Remove log entries Display resource 1 communication entries Print resource 1 communication entries Display resource 2 communication entries Print resource 2 communication entries isplay e mail communication entries Print e mail communication entries isplay fax communication entries Print fax communication entries Display QHST Option 1 Remove History Entering Option 1 on a command line takes you to the Remove ICOM 400 History command display Remove ICOM 400 History RMVHSTICM Type choices press Enter COMPANY weya FE oe ea en wl Sa ae es Ade iL ALL Recipient y lt ie hee oat eae Se A L ALL NONE R cipient Group So pe aba aS aay 1 ALL From date oe er aa te do LO Si oe oe E CURREN BEGIN nnnnn Torda rS Ga ace 3 ab a at eet ie ER CURRENT nnnnn Entry Status Ss at ed Sek ty Se es iL iL SENT PEND E
95. If there are no problems press Enter to proceed to the next display Quick Start Wizard display 14 ICOM 400 typically does not communicate directly with a pager or a digital phone that receives pages but rather with a paging company or service W lectronically transmit the recipient ID and message to the paging company or service who in turn transmits the message to the specified recipient ID Many of the communication configuration settings are specified by the paging company or service ICOM 400 has many paging companies and their respective configurations stored for your convenience Pager company 4 29 wi we 4 eee 8 NONE Name F4 for list This display explains that ICOM 400 does not typically communicate directly with a pager but uses a pager company You are asked to provide a pager company Type the name of the pager company and press Enter If you do not know the name of the pager company you will use place the cursor on the Pager company field and press F4 A list of several pager companies will appear If the pager company you are using is on the list simply place a 1 by the company and press Enter All the settings are pre configured so that no extra configuration is necessary If your pager company is not on the list place a 1 beside Add new company and press Enter You will be taken to the Add Pager Company display where you will be prompted to provide certain information about your pager company
96. Message ID CPA0N702 SEVERITY a e e a OY Job TRKCMNT User STEVE Number 021515 Date sent 3 16 03 Time Sent e ow ra 4 4 eo RZD 4 Message l CEE9901 received by procedure TRKCIRCY C D I R Cause ws aaper a E ILE Control language CL procedure TRKCIRCY in module TRKCIRCY in program TRKCIRCY in library TRAC400 detected an error at statement number 0000019900 Message text for CEE9901 is Application error CPF1015 unmonitored by TRKXSRV at statement 0000000001 instruction X 0000 Use F10 if available or the Display Job Log DSPJOBLOG command to see the ICOM 400 User Manual 87 messages in the job log for a more complete description of what caused the error If you still are unable to solve the problem please contact your technical support person The Additional Log Detail display gives the complete message that you requested with the Help or F1 key as well as additional message text For more information on the fields of this display see the Additional ICOM 400 Log Information display 88 Chapter 8 System Monitors esides messaging the system monitors are among the most important features of ICOM 400 Their versatility allows you to monitor many functions of your AS 400 giving you more control over your system as well as the peace of mind that your system is being monitored efficiently 24 hours a day seven days a week 365
97. Message queue library name amp MSGID Message ID amp SEV Severity amp JOB Job name amp USER User profile associated with job amp JOBNBR 6 Job number ICOM 400 User Manual 115 amp PGM 10 Program amp MSGTYPE 1 Message type amp MSGFILE 1 Message file name amp MSGFLIB 1 Message file library name amp MSGKEY Message key amp MSGDTA 1000 Message data amp TYPECODE Message type number amp SPLF 10 Spooled file name amp SPLFNUM Spooled file number amp SBSJOBS Number of jobs running under a subsystem Option 8 Send program message Option 8 takes you to the Send Program Message SNDPGMMSG command display Send Program Message SNDPGMMSG Type choices press Enter Message identifier CPFO907 Message file QCPFMSG DA DEAL YS sf 6 Stee ae a eS LIBL LIBL CURLIB Message data field values NONE Send to non pgm message queu A SYSOPR Name TOPGMQ SYSOPR Library Name LIBL CURLIB for more values Message type INFO INQ ROS COMP The Send Program Message SNDPGMMSG command sends a message to a message queue This command can be used to test message queue monitoring For more information see the help text or your IBM manual Option 12 Add monitor entries based on message queue Option 12 allows you to display message entries based on a message queue and add them as message queue monitor entries After selecti
98. NTESE S S ie gh a e fea es BYMSGQ LBSMSGQ MYMSGQ The Monitor Message Queue MONMSGQICM allows you to monitor a message queue while your system is in a restricted state NOTE If you issue this command before the system is in a restricted ICOM 400 User Manual 145 state and you have monitors running in ICOM 400 you may receive two messages in response to the same message from a message queue Message queue MSGQ Specifies the message queue that you want to monitor message queue name The name of the message queue you want to monitor Library LIB Specifies the library which contains the message queue you want to monitor LIBL The message queue is contained in a member of your library list library name Specify the name of the library which contains the message queue Monitor MON Specifies the monitor you want to use to monitor the message queue monitor name Specifies the name of the monitor you want to use to monitor the message queue Release Monitor using ICOM 400 RLSMONICM Release monitor using ICOM 400 RLSMONICM Type choices press Enter MNIE lt 2 40 ce acu ek a A we Se ea iL iL BYMSGQ BYOUTQ Monitor types ce ee ee iL ily CEGSTSs CPUS ie The Release Monitor using ICM RLSMONICM allows you to release a monitor that has previously been held Monitor MON Specifies the monitor which you would like to release ALL You would like to release all monitor
99. O V1 amp C1 amp D2 amp Q0 S37 6 S46 0 amp WO Hayes Optima AT EO QO V1 amp C1 amp D2 amp S1 amp Q0 amp WO 100 Hayes compatible all other asynchronous modems AT EO QO V1 amp C1 amp D2 amp S1 amp QO amp WO NOTE AT attention command must be in upper case Other commands may be in upper or lower case Space are optional between commands ICOM 400 Main Menu ICM ICOM 400 Main Menu Select one of the following Send a message Work with history Work with activity Recipient information History information System monitors System controls Quick start Wizard Remote customer support Bottom Selection or command gt Options Option 1 Send a message SNDMSGICM Select this option to send messages using ICOM 400 You are taken to the Send Message using ICM command where you can enter the message and its associated parameters Option 2 Work with history WRKHSTICM Select this option to work with history that has been processed or is waiting to be processed You are taken to the Work with History using ICM command where you can specify the parameters that you want to work with Option 3 Work with activity WRKATVICM Select this option to remove display and acknowledge messages and other activity within ICOM 400 Use this option to view details of each activity Option 4 Recipient information go ICMRCP Select this option to Work with recipient information When you press e
100. OM 400 activity entry date in the file is used as the ending date in the date range date Specifies the date in system format with or without date separators that is 2 23 03 or 22303 that you want to use as the ending date of the date range 148 Remove ICOM 400 History RMVHSTICM Remove ICOM 400 History RMVHSTICM Type choices press Enter Company sr ke Io tk wh Veh oe eg Gt 4 OS iL ALL RECPPTENT ss cas ser ne OP ces AA ae He iL ALL NONE Recipient Group iL ALL From date a AS Take Be Soo He oa 2 SY CURRENT BEGIN nnnnn T JaLe in wir us Sa oe as a ae wa Se GSS CURRENT nnnnn Entry Status y a e os ew ee aod iL iL SENT PEND ERROR Escalation status iL iL ESCING AC The Remove ICOM 400 History RMVHSTICM command allows you to clear the ICOM 400 history based on parameters that you specify Company CMP Specifies the name of the company or all companies for which you want to remove history entries ALL You want to remove history entries for all companies that meet the other specified criteria company name Specify the name of the company for which you want to remove history entries Recipient RCP Specifies the name of the recipient or all recipients for which you want to remove history entries ALL You want to remove history entries for all recipients that meet the other s
101. PQHSTICM command display ICOM 400 User Manual 85 Display QHST using ICOM 400 DSPQHSTICM Type choices press Enter Time period for QHST output Start time and date Beginning time Beginning date End time and date Ending time Ending date Message ID Exclude Message ID for more values for more values Severity Output The Display QHST using ICOM 400 DSPQHSTICM command allows you to display the QHST log using ICOM 400 A summary form of the QHST log is displayed or printed The DSPQHSTICM command allows you to display or print all or part of the log Some m m m important fields on the command display include the following Time period for QHST output The period of time for which QHST entries are selected for the display or report You must specify a beginning time and date as well as an ending time and date Message identifier The message identifier for the QHST log entries that you want to display or print Exclude message ID The message ID that you want to exclude from QHST information NONE specifies that you do not want to exclude any Ids Severity The message severity level that you want to include in the display or report When you press Enter you are taken to the Display QHST Log Entry display Display QHST Log Entry Position to message Type options press 5 Display Opt Message CPA0702 xxxxx x
102. RROR Bscalation status iL iL ESCING ACKD The Remove ICOM 400 History command display allows you to clear the ICOM 400 history based on parameters you specify You can remove all history or only specific history that you specify Some important fields include QO Company The name of the pager company or companies for which you want to remove history entries ALL specifies that you want to remove history entries for all companies that meet other specified criteria Recipient The name of the recipient or recipients for which you want to remove history entries ALL specifies that you want to remove entries for all recipients 80 Recipient group The name of the recipient group or groups for which you want to remove history entries From and To dates The date range for which you want to remove history entries CURRENT specifies the current date For From date BEGIN indicates to remove history from the beginning date in the log nnnnn specifies the number of days from the current date for which you want to remove history entries An example would be 10 in the From date parameter If today s date were 3 12 03 the From date would be 3 2 03 Entry status The status of the history entries that you want to remove These statuses include SENT PEND ERROR HELD SCHED READY Escalation status The escalation status of the history entr
103. Resource Name for the asynchronous line description provided by ICOM 400 upon installation If you cannot provide a name place your cursor on the field and press F4 for a list of pre defined names Once you have selected a name press Enter Quick Start Wizard display 11 ICOM 400 automatically creates an asynchronous line description named ICOM400 This line description is used only by ICOM 400 and needs no configuration Should it be deleted it will automatically be re created when the next pager message is sent by ICOM 400 Line description resource name CMNO1 Depending upon your phone system it may be necessary to use a telephon prefix An example would be to dial a 9 to access an outside line or possibly a code used for tracking or billing purposes Commas can be used when a pause is required before dialing the telephone number Each comma will cause a one second delay Telephone prefix The next display asks you to provide a telephone pre fix for the telephone line you will be using with ICOM 400 A pre fix is something that needs to be placed in front of the telephone number that you will dial with your AS 400 modem For example in order to get an outside line to use the modem many times a 9 or something similar needs to be placed in front of the telephone number If this is the case specify the character along with a comma for a pause Each comma equals a one second delay before a telephone numb
104. T amp T 1 800 724 7784 The name contact name computer modem phone number computer password if any modem rate and settings for each paging company you will be using The pager id usually the pager number for each recipient Faxing Requirements u u u Operating system requirements OS 400 v3r7 or higher Software standard class 2 or 2 0 asynchronous modem A free V 24 communications port NOTE We suggest that you have a dedicated communications line this is preferred not required ICOM 400 User Manual 23 ICOM 400 Installation First Installation CD Ne a Load CD into the CD ROM drive Enter the following command LODRUN DEV OPT The CD ROM product installation menu is displayed To install ICOM 400 please enter a 1 beside ICOM 400 The product information will automatically be installed Use the command GO ICM to access the ICOM 400 Main Menu First Installation Tape 1 Load tape in the appropriate drive 2 At the command line type RSTLIB SAVLIB MBAINST DEV device name 3 Execute the install command MBAINST MBAINST PRODUCT ICM ACTION INSTALL DEV device name 4 Use the command GO ICM to access the ICOM 400 Main Menu Upgrade 1 Back up your current ICOM 400 system library ICOM400 or Page Manager system library PAGEMGR 2 Follow steps for the proper media format above 3 NOTE If you are upgrading to a new system you will need to restore the old product library on th
105. TA aN EEANN Aa a EA Ea aE AAO aaa 10 WoOrK WIth MONITORS co sis insaccsticaas N A EA A TOA EE E 10 Message Quete Monitor nerconeprieare e t a A EA R RO OE aetna 11 Work WIth ACtIO NS ieii iui eiaeiiai eini iE E eaa AAAA AANA CA ANAA KEKA EAEEREN CE ETETA TUAE AAAA 12 Add ACHO cst sta cela E E ea a ra alt TERANE 12 Change CommandiLiStiisarorena neria n A uae a A Sika E ENA E Eia wambds 13 Work With Schedules veiwsiveciesi ina deiecein eitedioay E ERA EA A EA EANET E AA i 13 Automatic Delivery of MESSAGES wii cieiitect eben enced Aa E AEE a a a AOA A AA i 14 Work With REGiPiOnts asri koneissa a aE E EEA eho een idigennePoatenderepnecbeew teks ees 14 Create Recipient GrOUps zi aiiai rira o ap V AAE E E NE OEP Rea vee ee 16 Add Pager Company aana a a Hack PA A A A A E A AA A 16 Work with Escalation Tables eiri a aea aa eA AAE aa EA Ea EENE aE E aS TENEN 18 Tracking and Reporting roesrioiiei arinaa aiina ANAE EAEN AOT AAEE A ment calcd ENE EA AAEN AA AAEE EAA AAAA 18 Work with Activity ear aaan e a A ats A a ea ee NG 18 NGCWOPrKING r EE TOATA E a N A N N 19 Work With History Men i iriceriripisuisiiiir ciriciri est cane EENAA TENERA EELEE REAR 19 WOE RK WIC A m LESKO a svar A E E A E Send Castes catealona Varin eae 19 Display Escalation Infotmatio ni crierai siini iien Eaa da ANARA EANET EAE 19 Display ICM Log Inforimationincsacacrtiwel talon anaes aetna tenia entanet 20 Dis play OST OG Ey E EA E er dman nee anon letuadnaNpaararaus 21 SEMVIC Cis E A tu
106. USEE a Fo ts ata te Siena ate Hs Mave I Name NUMBEP ty os ME At as ee ee a gt hs ee a 000000 999999 Spooled file number Number ONLY LAST Selection text Message Delivery type EMAIL FAX Some important parameters for this command include the following QO Spooled file The name of the spooled file that you want to send as an attachment to an e mail address You may choose to send the entire spooled file to the address or selections from the spooled file to different addresses Job name The name of the job that created the spooled file User The name of the user from which the spooled file originated Oo ICOM 400 User Manual 133 134 Number The system assigned job number of the spooled file Spooled file number The unique number of the spooled file ONLY indicates that only one spooled file in the job has the specified file name therefore the number of the spooled file is not necessary LAST indicates that if there is more than one spooled file with the specified file name the one with the highest number is the file that is sent Selection text The text contained within a page of the spooled file that you want to select to send to an e mail address For example you can specify SLTTXT Account 01234 and ICOM400 will select out the pages that contains Account 01234 to send to the e mail address you have specified NONE indicates that the enti
107. Wizard This wizard helps you install a device driver for a hardware device Click Next button To continue click Next lt Back Cancel 194 o The next panel tells you it is looking for the driver Found New Hardware Wizard to run this new device Install Hardware Device Drivers A device driver is a sof hat enables a hardware devi k with F 2 ee A A Select the radio button Search a suitable driver for my device recommended This wizard will complete the installation for this device a Telephony Accelerator Then click on the Next button 4 device driver is a software program that makes a hardware device work Windows needs driver files for your new device To locate driver files and complete the i i i r R Note This option is normally selected by default What do you want the wizard to do Search for a suitable driver for my device recommended Display a list of the known drivers for this device so that can choose a specific driver cows _ Found New Hardware Wizard The fourth panel allows you to select the location Locate Driver Files i i Where do you want Windows to search for driver files D z the e n i er d i rs Select the Specify a ocation check box only Search for driver files for the following hardware device o Veils EEE Then click Next button The wizard searches for suitable drivers in its driver database on your computer and in any of the following opti
108. Y in the space provided If not type an N to skip this step Press Enter 26 Quick Start Wizard display 2 ICOM 400 will send messages to an e mail address To accomplish this you must define your SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol server s TCP IP address to ICOM 400 If your AS 400 is in a network that is connected to the Internet you will receive the best performance by specifying your ISP s Internet Service Provider mail server address Should your AS 400 be protected by a firewall your mail administrator will be able to provide the appropiate TCP IP address and port number SMTP host server address smtp webzone net POP3 Host server address pop3 webzone net ICOM 400 e mail address icom pbsnow com Account name icom PaSSwWord 4 4 4 4 Mok a 4 icom400 For example SMTP host server address mail pbsnow com POP3 host server address pop3 pbsnow com ICOM 400 e mail address support pbsnow com If you choose to send e mail messages the next display will appear You are asked to provide five things Mail host server address i e mail pbsnow com Mail host port i e 25 Error e mail address i e support pbsnow com Account name Account password fete o Please refer to the example given at the bottom of the screen Press Enter when you are finished entering the information Quick Start Wizard display 3 ICOM 400 Quick Start Wizard will take you through the steps necessary to de
109. YTYP PGM PGM ICOMTOOLS PGMEXIT SNDINF 10 3 60 Note If your return delivery type is FAX and you want a recipient name to be put on the header cover sheet to show who the fax is going to then you must return a value in the second parameter starting at the 21st position and can be up to 40 characters in length For example this value could be a name or fax number If this value is blank when using PGM for the delivery type and using FAX for the return from your program then the TO recipient on your cover sheet will be blank as well E mail address The e mail address of the recipient to whom you want to send the spooled file There are three ways to specify the e mail address es 1 E mail address Specify the e mail address to which you want to send the spooled file The following is an example of what you would enter on a command line gt SNDSPLFICM SPLF QPINVOICE JOB SPLNBR LAST MSG Attached is your invoice EMAIL johndoe domain com ATTACH Invoice To send a partial spooled file enter the selection text gt SNDSPLFICM SPLF QPINVOICE JOB SPLNBR LAST SLTTXT Account 01234 MSG Attached is your invoice EMAIL johndoe domain com ATTACH Invoice 2 SPLF Specify the location of the send information i e e mail address found on each page of the spooled file All the pages with the same send information will be sent together Within the SNDINF parameter specify the line number starting pos
110. a E E E T E E dena uutnndindenas E E A E 21 Product Warranty And SUPPOrt eeccee ce DEEDES EEE EEE AAA E aiaa 21 Remote Customer SUP POrt ives 2s sicsccsageisa aaa ga eas paced AAEE og dae AEAEE TA A E REAREA se aataanstas 22 QUICK Start WiZardisesses cece oie aa een Ae TR a Osc eo ee ia eas 22 CHAPTER 2 ICOM 400 INSTALLATION cccccccccsncssesseseesceeseeeeeeeeeeeneeneeaeeaseaseaseasensensensense 23 ICOM 400 REQUIREMENTS ei cjcck iweav adore tel cantaawialad ota orel dai acacbi ian aaa aa balsa iaceaisioe Madea Wve A es 23 ICOM 400 INSTALLATION cccccecccceececccueeeeuscuueeeeecccueeeeeesaugeeeeesveueeueeeecugaueeeeauguueereesggunsernags 24 First Installation CD vac Sscisecadveneeiareiiteies AEAEE TANEET E NEEN EANN SAREAN eles Valea 24 First Installation TapE anisses ya vane oc wiv aula Gee Valea abate wk code a AAE Sa ENAA aaa iaaa 24 Upgrade ties eis eae at nik vada a EAE celeb aaldma ine A Ea D E a A aa aE a AE ADE near sdea a EANET 24 Internet Download Installation i rr UU IEE I EEE EERE EERE EEE EE 24 ICOM 400 Voice Installation sis cni ok savin cesta eae Beas Sea awe bale eee ae oad Velen ewes MG ae Clee 25 ICOM 400 QUICK START WIZARD cccccecec cece eee ne ee eens eee r eens ee SRELE dE EE Sas EE SHEE EGE EE EEKE EREA KARYEFETRERA 25 ADVANCED SETS UP prunte Ere nian Whee E NEEN TISE TA ERON EAGT REEE ANENE E NENE GETARAN 37 Modenr Configuration amaniis aaa a a A AAAA EE A Ohne E A E A a aaa 37 Line Description Informati
111. a Recipient To copy a recipient enter a 3 beside the recipient you want to copy on the Work with Recipients display You are taken to the Copy Recipient display Enter a name for your new recipient in the New Name field and press Enter Your new recipient is added to the list of existing recipients Removing a Recipient To remove a recipient enter a 4 beside the recipient s you want to remove You are taken to the Confirm Remove of Recipient display Pressing Enter removes the recipient s To change your selections press F12 to return to the Work with Recipients display Displaying a Recipient To display a recipient enter a 5 beside the recipient you want to display on the Work with Recipients display You are taken to the Display Recipient display Refer to Adding a Recipient for more information on the Display Recipient display fields Sending a Message to a Recipient To send a message to a recipient from the Work with Recipients display enter a 7 beside the recipient to which you want to send the message You are taken to the Send Message using ICOM 400 SNDMSGICM display The name of the selected recipient is displayed in the Name field Refer to Chapter 3 for more information on sending a message Edit Recipient Authority To edit the authority of a recipient enter a 9 beside the recipient whose authority you want to change You are taken to the Edit Recipient Authority display Edit Recipient Authority Recipient
112. a message to a monitor as a monitor entry press F8 You are taken to the Add Monitor Entry display The message ID of the message is automatically entered into the Message ID field Add Monitor Type choices press MOnNLCO a Medi fOr aed eek aoe GR GS Name F4 for list Monitor typen of tes edu tei oa MSGQ QHST SEQUENCE a ae ah e Se ee ber 1 999 SChHeEGULes aiu s BE e ee a eee HES e ALLDAYS Severity limit ber 00 99 JOD namnen rt at se ea a Bee th er LR Oe I e generic SCI Se Om we Ten ee en eye EE Bh Boe a ee OS e generic PrOGEOM e see BY eo ee Ay Se ee aes es e generic Message ID Bl eg eae See OR ees Seok e generic Message type D s w ae Oe SP Gr oe GS ALL ACELOR E nra ws wk SOP eR ee Ee HES e NONE F4 TIndglude EXeludey s ag gt g ast w wae os INC EXC Skip to sequence 1 1 999 END N Force action 4 4 g 5 84 a SP o NO Y Base on command response NO Y You must supply the monitor name in the Monitor field and an Action in the Action field Once you have entered all the pertinent information press Enter Your monitor entry is added to the monitor you specify and you are returned to the Display Details display Option 16 Work with address information Select this option to display Address Information entries that are used to determine the location of the email address within a spoo
113. achine Can I access my voice menu during an outbound call ICOM 400 User Manual 177 Answer Yes Before the message is played you are asked if you want to sign on by pressing 1 If 1 is pressed you will then be asked to enter your user code After signed on your voice menu is played This will not acknowledge the original outbound message 178 Appendix C Inbound ICOM 400 Voice While ICOM 400 Voice allows your AS 400 to call you with important messages ICOM 400 Inbound Voice allows you to call your AS 400 Using a PC as an interface you call your AS 400 and enter a user code if applicable A menu that corresponds to the user code will be played You can select an option from the menu to answer a previously unanswered message run a command access another menu as well as listen to previously played messages or message lists To use the Inbound Feature of ICOM 400 Voice enter go ICMVOICE on an AS 400 command line The following menu will be displayed ICMVOICE Voice Menu Select one of the following 1 Work with user codes 2 Work with voice menus 3 Work with IP entries Option 1 Work with User Codes Entering 1 on the command line takes you to the Work with User Codes display Work with User Codes POSTEPONM CO Aes oe AS se Starting characters Type options press Enter 1 Add 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Remove 5 Display Opt User code Text Sample user code NONE NONE Bruce s menu Lance s menu The
114. actly 2 digits using leading zeros if necessary e With a time separator specify a string of 5 digits where the time separator specified for your job is used to separate the hours minutes and seconds If you enter this command from the command line the string must be enclosed in apostrophes If a time separator other than the separator specified for your job is used this command will fail Element 2 Beginning date One of the following is used to specify the beginning date on or after which the log entries were made Any entries prior to the specified date are not included in the display or report CURRENT Log entries with a current date creation date and between the specified beginning and ending times if specified are included BEGIN Log entries from the beginning of the log entries are included begin date Specify the beginning date The date must be specified in the job date format number of days Specify a number to represent the number of days before the current date that you want to use for the search An example would be 10 If today s date were 3 12 03 date format is mm dd yy the Begin date for the ICOM 400 log would be 3 2 03 Element 3 Ending time One of the following is used to specify the ending time before which log entries are included Any items created after the specified time and date are not included in the log entries for the display or report AVAIL Any time that is available for the ending date is
115. age delivery y n You are now asked which delivery method you would like to utilize in testing ICOM 400 You will only be prompted for those methods set up for the recipient to which you are sending the test message After you have specified which delivery methods to use ICOM 400 will send the test message s and you are taken to the final Quick Start Wizard Display Quick Start Wizard display 27 Congratulations You have now completed the initial setup of ICOM 400 Any recipients that you may have set up can now be sent messages To check the status of the test messages select option 2 from the Main Menu or Enter command WRKHSTICM To assist in problem solving select option 5 History Information from the Main Menu to see the ICOM 400 log Press Enter to exit Quick Start Wizard Congratulations You have now completed the initial setup of ICOM 400 Any recipients that you may have set up can now be sent messages To check the status of the test messages if any were sent select option 2 from the Main Menu or Enter command WRKHSTICM To assist in problem solving select option 5 History Information from the Main Menu to see the ICOM 400 log Press Enter to exit Quick Start Wizard 36 ICOM 400 can be set up through the Quick Start Wizard Main Menu Option 20 However if after going through Quick Start Wizard you would like to set up some of the more advanced features of ICOM 400 or change any informati
116. age until it has responded to by one of the recipients in the group The Work with Escalation Tables display shows all escalation tables that have been defined to ICOM 400 From this display you have several options You can add a new escalation table Option 1 change an existing table Option 2 or copy a table Option 3 You can also remove an existing table Option 4 display the contents of a table Option 5 or work with recipients that contain a particular table Option 6 Adding an Escalation Table To add an escalation table enter a 1 on the first line under the Opt column along with the name of the new table Press Enter to go to the Create Escalation Table display Create Escalation Table Table name ECHSUP Text Type choices press Enter Seq Recipient Delay The Create Escalation Table display is used to create an escalation table and the characteristics of that table Some important fields for this display include the following 74 Q Recipient The name of the recipient whom you want to add to the table If you need to select a recipient from a list place the cursor on the Recipient field and press F4 Some special values for this field include e END An optional special value that may be placed at the logical end of the escalation entries The END special value can occur anywhere in the recipient list Only recipients prior to the END special value in the recipient list will receive mes
117. ages are to be included Element 4 Ending date One of the following is used to specify the ending date on which or before which the messages must have been made Any messages made after the specified date are not included in the display or report CURRENT Messages whose date is on or before the current date are included in the display or report END The messages to the end of the message queue information are included in the display or report end date Specify the ending date The date must be specified in the job date format number of days Specify a number to represent the number of days before the current date that you want to use for the search An example would be 10 If today s date were 3 22 03 date format is mm dd yy the End date for the ICOM 400 log would be 3 12 03 Message ID MSGID Specifies the message identifier for the messages that you want to display or print ALL Include all message identifiers in the display or report message identifier Specify the message identifier whose messages you want to include in the display or report Message type MSGTYPE Specify the message type that you want to include in the report display ALL Include all message types in the display or report INFO Include only informational messages 142 INQ Include only inquiry messages COMP Include only completion messages A completion message indicates the status of the work that is successfully performed
118. am name iL Name ALL NONE User data y cg ce aw Si Uk ee Ow ck oe os Name ALL NONE Address information SNDSPLF E Name NONE F4 for list Remove spooled file NO YES Text Some important files on this display include the following Spooled file The spooled file for which you are monitoring You can monitor for all spooled files in the output queue ALL or for a specific spooled file Program name The name of the program that generates the spooled file You can monitor for all program names ALL none NONE or for a specific program User data The user data associated with a spooled file ALL indicates that all spooled files are eligible for selection during the spooled file process regardless of the contents of the user data NONE indicates that the spooled file user data will be blank Q Address information SNDSPLF The name of the Address Information that will be used to determine the location of the email address within the spooled file This allows a spooled file to be split and sent to different email addresses An exit program can also be used to retrieve an email address based on information found in the spooled file For instance an account number may be on each page of the spooled file and passed to the exit program which in turn will pass back the email address for that account This field is not used in conjunction with the Actio
119. ameter and specify PHONE in the Delivery type parameter ICOM 400 will automatically dial the pager number that is assigned to the recipient you specify and send the numeric message in the Message parameter You can also use this delivery entry with an Action To do this you must set up a pre defined message with the numeric information that you want to send See Pre defined Messages for more 60 information on creating a pre defined message Then set up an Action with the pre defined message and PHONE as the delivery type You may associate this Action with a monitor When the condition for which the monitor is monitoring is met the Action will be initiated The Action will dial the pager number for the recipient you have specified and will send the information specified for the pre defined message The PHONE delivery method is used to send voice messages To add a phone delivery entry with voice 1 In order to send a voice message you must specify an IP entry in the IP entry for voice messaging field An IP entry is the IP address of a PC through which the voice message is sent The Allow 2 way communication field must be set to YES in order to respond to the voice message by pressing the appropriate number 2 You may also specify a security code for voice messaging A security code will prevent unauthorized persons from hearing a voice message without first entering the specified security code MESSAGE QUEUE MSGQ The MSGQ
120. amp ORD Message out Part ordered Return code 1 repeat the process By changing the value back to PART amp ORD the process can be repeated In the sample program you will find for Call 3 that if the account number has already been entered then the Program value is changed to ORDER and the person is asked to press 1 to order the part Phone response The numbers entered by the person on the phone This value will be passed into the exit program during the RSP step Return code 1 should be used to repeat the process Sample programs There are two sets of sample programs to aid in creating other exit programs to be used to gather information from a person on a phone or to give the person information such as sales figures or system information These sample programs are in the ICOMTOOLS ICOMTOOLS file The members begin with PARTDEMO and SAYSTATUS If the ICOMTOOLS library does not exist then restore it from savefile TOOLS in the ICOM400 library 1 212 Part demo Program to call PARTDEMOC from ICOMTOOLS library Pass reply should be set to YES Program values PART Checks availability of an auto part Use part number 123 234 345 8 or 9 PART amp ORD Checks availability of an auto part then allows ordering Use part number 123 234 345 8 or 9 TICKET Checks the status of vehicle being serviced Use ticket 8 or 9 Say status plays list of jobs number of jobs in subsystem etc The SAMPLE2 menu uses ICMCSTS w
121. an I set up ICOM 400 to page my PCS phone A Yes there are 2 ways to be able to send to a PCS phone using ICOM 400 1 Using TAP with the PAGER delivery type or 2 Setting up an EMAIL delivery type to email the pager company by way of the internet Both ways are required to have a pager company that complies to be able to send out pages to a PCS phone after receiving the information from ICOM 400 For more information on setting up PAGER and EMAIL delivery types see ICOM 400 manual Chapter 6 Recipients and Chapter 9 System controls to set up system values for sending messages 216 Technical Assistance Worksheet This worksheet should be filled out when you first receive ICOM 400 If you have a problem with the product this information will enable your customer support representative to help you more effieciently and quickly Version of ICOM 400 you are running Version of OS 400 operating system you are using ICOM 400 Sales Representative ICOM 400 Serial number Type of modem you are using The exact wording of any messages that appear on your screen along with the Message ID A description of what happened and what you were doing when the problem occurred A description of how you tried to solve the problem Be sure to have a printout of the joblog when the problem occurred ICOM 400 User Manual 217 ICOM 400 Set up Worksheet This information must be obtained from each pager company that supplies pagers fo
122. an output queue Allows you to monitor operations that you have defined ICOM 400 User Manual 89 ICOM 400 has the capability to monitor several functions on your system For example you can monitor the configuration status of your system including controllers lines and devices You can monitor remote devices on your network via a TCP IP connection You can ping your web server to see if it is up and running as well as ping certain ports to see if a specific application is responding You can monitor for the arrival of network files for program failures and errors as well as hardware errors You can monitor for jobs that exceed your CPU capacity as well as the total system CPU capacity You can also set up your own monitors to perform Actions that are not accounted for by existing monitors There are several different types of monitors To reach the System Monitors display enter a 6 on the command line of the ICOM 400 Main Menu You are taken to the System Monitors menu From this menu you have several options These include ICMMON System Monitors Select one of the following Work with monitors Start monitor End monitor Work with monitor types Work with monitor subsystem Work with schedules Work with actions d program message thers 25 3s 4 Des 6 We 8 Add monitor entries based on message queue Add monitor entries based on QHST Work with address information To go to the Work with Monitors displ
123. anager Customer Support Menu The ACS system is designed to allow you to quickly and easily download program temporary fixes from the AS Manager system to your system This will allow fixes to be requested quickly without any delays waiting for distribution media shipments Also support is provided to allow display station passthru for an AS Manager technical support person to sign on you machine to assist in problem solving or just to help with any questions you might have All access is instigated by you AS Manager will never have the authority or the phone number to access your system Whenever PTFs are downloaded accompanying documentaion will be printed giving complete instructions on how to install any fix ASM AS Manager Customer Support Select one of the following 1 Order PTF s from AS Manager 168 2 Sign on AS Manager to ask questions or send message 3 Configure communication for support Thanks for using electronic support Support 918 587 1500 Fax 918 587 1536 Selection or command Options Option 1 This option allows you to order PTFs for all AS Manager products Simply enter the PTF ID supplied by AS Manager technical support or the ICMSUMMARY The PTF will be transferred to your machine and will be accompanied by a report highlighting the PTF and giving instructions on how to load it Option 2 This option connects you to Pinnacle s AS Manager support system Option 3 This option allows you to config
124. arity NONE specifies that there is no parity configured for the line Q Data bits The number of data bits that you want to use for pager equipment for this company 7 or 8 Q Stop bits The number of data bits that you want to use for pager equipment for this company 1 or 2 Duplex Whether or not the pager equipment for this company supports full two way communication or half one way communication duplex Changing a Pager Company To change an existing pager company enter a 2 beside the company that you want to change on the Work with Pager Companies display Press enter to go to the Change Pager Company display See Adding a Pager Company for more information on the fields of this display Copying a Pager Company To copy a pager company enter a 3 beside the company that you want to copy on the Work with Pager Companies display Press Enter to go to the Copy Pager Company display Enter the name of the new company in the New name field and press Enter to add the pager company Removing a Pager Company To remove a pager company enter a 4 beside the company s that you want to remove on the Work with Pager Companies display Press Enter to go to the Confirm Remove of Pager Companies display Press Enter to remove the pager company s you have selected or press F12 to return to the Work with Pager Companies display to change your selections Displaying a Pager Company To display a pager company enter a 5 beside the company
125. as many recipients as you need Press Enter to proceed to the next display Quick Start Wizard display 17 A recipient is a person group of persons or a device to whom you want to deliver a pager message AS 400 message e mail message ring a telephone or fax Recipients can have multiple delivery methods i e pager e mail etc Enter the recipient name JULIA If this delivery method is not needed leave blank and press to continue E mail address This display asks you to provide an e mail address i e support pbsnow com for the recipient you are adding If you do not want the recipient to receive e mail messages or do not have an internet connection simply leave this field blank Press Enter 32 Quick Start Wizard display 18 A recipient is a person group of persons or a device to whom you want to deliver a pager message AS 400 message e mail message ring a telephone or fax Recipients can have multiple delivery methods i e pager e mail etc Enter the recipient name JULIA If this delivery method is not needed leave blank and press to continue Fax telephone number This display asks to provide a fax telephone number for your recipient This will be the fax number to which ICOM 400 notifications are sent If you do not wish to set up a fax delivery method for this recipient leave the field blank Quick Start Wizard display 19 A recipient is a person gr
126. ated with this menu u Item DVDS Fe Bed Oh Cote OS See ee eee Se Ghee ENU Type choices press Enter Option number Number 01 10 Menu aog RY ead Se Shem Mees dds eo 8 Name F4 for list Some important fields include QO Menu Specify the secondary menu you want to play for this option Press F4 to bring up a list of existing menus Message MSG The MSG menu item type allows you to replay a message You can specify the option number and the text associated with the menu Add Menu Item TYPE Ye sk ae ve So ar AP es Lah ah de a MSG Type choices press Enter Option numb r s 2 8 a be a 4S 8 1 Number 01 10 Menu item text 2 replay message Message List MSGL The MSGL menu item type allows you to replay a list of messages You can specify the option number and the text associated with the menu You can also specify the list type the recipient or group name whether to play only unanswered messages the message order and if you want to include the date and time of each message Add Menu Item TYPE as Spa bear a S a ph Ge agate hE MSGL Type choices press Enter Option number Number 01 10 Menu item text 184 List type RECipLent Gropp 5 4 Oe Ew ee I ER F4 List Unanswered messages onl Messages to be listed first Include date in messag Include time in messag Some important fields include
127. atically select that option without playing the menu first 2 Enter a description of the menu in the Text field 3 You need to add option s to your menu Enter a 1 on the first line of the Opt column a option number in the menu option field from 1 to 10 and the item type you want to add If you do not specify an item type ICOM 400 automatically defaults to MSGL Add Menu Item The Add Menu Item display is used to add a menu option for a voice menu There are several different item types These include CMD INFO MENU MSG and MSGL There are a few fields that are common to most menu items These include Q Option number Indicates the order that this menu item will be played in the menu This can be from 1 to 10 and there can be no duplicates Q Menu item text When playing the menu item the text description that ICOM 400 Inbound Voice will play Command CMD The CMD menu item type allows you to run a command by selecting this menu option type You can specify if you want to verify the command before it is run and the command code Add Menu Item Type 2 ho Hee oe aha es Bo ae a e CMD Type choices press Option number Number 01 10 Menu item text Verify selection Command 182 Some important fields include Q Verify selection Indicate whether you want to verify your selection YES specifies that you do want to verify your selection and the command will not be run until you d
128. ation about that pager company Pager companies are companies from which you rent or purchase pager equipment You can have an unlimited number of pager companies Some important fields on the Add Pager Company display include Pager company The name of the pager company that you are adding Computer phone number The phone number of the computer that ICOM 400 will dial to establish communications with the pager company You can enter characters required to dial the computer phone number such as a 9 for an outside line If a pause is required you can use the character Each comma will cause a one second delay Dashes in the phone number are acceptable NOTE You should not use dialing characters here if you are using two resources have 2 lines The dialing characters should be entered for each line in the Telephone prefix field in the Change System Attributes display See Chapter 9 QO 2 way communication type The type of two way communication that you want to use NONE specifies that you do not want to use two way communication BELLSOUTH indicates that you want to use Bellsouth s two way communication NOTE You must be signed up with Bellsouth in order to be able to use their two way communication service Q Mailbox user ID The mailbox user ID for your paging company This mailbox is used for reply messages that have been sent as a result of two way paging All reply messages sent to the pager company will be put in this
129. ay enter a 1 on the command line of the System Monitors menu and press Enter You are taken to the Work with Monitors command display Option 1 Work with monitors Work with ICOM 400 Monitors WRKMONICM Type choices press Enter Monitor Se PS ee wk Sas A a SP RAS iL ALL LBSCFG LBSMSGQO for more values Monitor type gt iL ALL CFGSTS CPU for more values OUEDUE K S bore aig oats Set a PRINT This command allows you to specify which monitors you want to include on the Work with Monitors display You can choose to list all monitors only specific monitors all monitor types or only specific monitor types You can specify more than one monitor name or monitor type by entering on the parameter you want to define Once you have decided which monitors you want to display press Enter to go to the Work with Monitors display 90 Work with Monitors Position to Type options press Enter 1 Add 2 Chang 3 Copy 4 Remov 5 Display 6 Hold Release 7 Work with activity 8 Check now Wake up Opt Monitor Type Schedule BYMSGQ MSGQ LDAYS BYOUTQ SPLF LDAYS ANCECFG CFGSTS PLE EL itor PAGEMGR line LBSCFG CFGSTS LDAYS 3 controllers mo LBSMSGQ MSGQ LDAYS EL E MYMSGQ MSGQ LDAYS EL itor QSYSOPR messa RRR SPLF LDAYS 3 text The Work with Monitors display shows
130. be a number from 1 to 65535 The default port number is 49000 Telephone prefix A telephone prefix is a number or symbol that needs to be placed in front of a telephone number that you will dial with your AS 400 modem For example you might have to dial a 9 or other number to get an outside line or enter a code that is to be used for tracking and billing purposes Commas can be used when a pause is required before dialing the number Each comma represents a one or two second delay Spooled Files The following defaults apply to spooled files Q Q Copies The number of copies of spooled files that you want to produce for a recipient This number can range from 1 to 99 Form type The form type to use for reports that you produce for a recipient STD indicates that you want to use the standard form used by your computer system to produce the spooled file Q Hold spooled file Whether spooled files are to be held when produced by ICOM 400 YES indicates that the spooled file is to be put in Held status on the output queue when produced by ICOM 400 Q Save spooled file Whether spooled files are to be saved on an output queue when produced by ICOM 400 Faxing 124 The following defaults apply to faxing Q Line resource name The name of the communications resource that is to be used when transmitting fax messages Number of retries The number of times you want to re dial the fax number This can range from 1 to 9 re
131. below 1 Specify the name of the person or group to whom you want the message to be sent If you do not know the name leave SELECT in the Name field Specifying ALL will send the message to all defined recipients Recipients are defined on the Work with Recipients display If you specify NONE the message will not be sent to a recipient Enter the message that you want to send Messages of up to 999 character in length can be entered NONE specifies that you do not want to send a message You may also enter a phone number in the Message field if you are using PHONE as the delivery type NOTE When you want to send a message using e mail a default subject will automatically be applied to the message If you wish to change the subject enter a new subject within the first 32 characters of the message in the Message field and then the body of the message An example would be Subject Meeting Sales meeting at 2pm where Subject Meeting is the new subject and Sales meeting at 2pm is the message Otherwise a default subject of ICOM 400 Notification will be applied NOTE If you want to insert a new line into your message body simply type amp NL and all text after amp NL will be moved to the next line ICOM 400 User Manual 45 3 If you want to attach a file to the message specify if you are want to send a spooled file SPLF or a text file TEXTFILE You will be prompted for more information based on the fil
132. c system attributes that can be used by recipients Then we will define individual recipient information If this is an upgrade of the software and you do not want to use Quick Start Wizard to make any changes to your existing setup or you would like to just exit now then press F3 Otherwise press enter to continue NOTE If you are upgrading ICOM 400 to a newer version you do not need to run Quick Start Wizard if you choose not too Running Quick Start Wizard will make changes to your existing setup The first display explains the purpose of Quick Start Wizard ICOM 400 Quick Start Wizard will take you through the steps necessary to deliver messages via e mail pager message queue or to ring a telephone The first step will be to set specific system attributes that can be used by recipients Then we will define individual recipient information If this is not your first time to run the Quick Start Wizard the following screen will be the first screen ICOM 400 Quick Start Wizard will take you through the steps necessary to Deliver messages via e mail pager message queue or to ring a telephone The first step will be to set specific system attributes that can be used by recipients Then we will define individual recipient information Would you like to send e mail messages y n Y ICOM 400 User Manual 25 You are asked to specify if you would like to send e mail messages If you would simply type a
133. ceeee eee eee ee teen eee e nena eae tates 151 Send using ICOM 400 SNDICM sirreeccistsecteee tearwereesieorteb vded dawnes oe tar bee d iaa u AEAN ERTED 151 Send Message USING ICOM 4O0 crnan cece cece nnn nee eee enna 154 Send Message using ICOM 400 wis Adverse aAa E EANA tac cute dev debtors AAA AAA A Aa 156 Send Spooled File SNDSPLFICM ccccccceescee sees sees sees nee ne eee eee e eee e ease eae eeseeee tant nant tant taeenanes 156 Work with Actions using ICOM 400 WRKACTICM ccccecceeeee eee erent nent nee eet ene t nee tneeee eae 156 Work with Pager Companies using ICOM 400 WRKCMPICM cccccecceeee eee eeae teat enee teen eee eaeennes 157 Work with Escalation Tables using ICOM 400 WRKESCICM cccccecceece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaeennes 157 Work with Recipient Groups using ICOM 400 WRKGRPICM ccccceeceeee eee eeeeeeeenee eee eaeeeaeennes 157 Work with ICOM 400 E mail WRKMAILICM cccccecce eee ene nee nA EEE EEE EE EEE EEE 158 Work with Pre defined Messages using ICOM 400 WRKMSGICM ccccceseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeenes 159 Work with Pages using ICOM 400 WRKPAGICM eceee eee e eee eee eee eee ete teeta etna teen eee tae 160 Work with Page Queues using ICOM 400 WRKPAGQICM cccecceeseeee tees eee e eee t eae enee eet eaeeeaeennes 164 Work with Recipients WRKRCPICM ssesssssssssersornorrenrssnrenrennsnnunnusnnasnasnusnussnenrosnersenrenrron 164 Work with Schedules using ICOM 400 WRKSCDICM
134. cified in the WRKATVICM command This display can contain all activity regardless of status or can be conditioned to only include selected activity a date range of activity and so on The time and date of the message its current status and contents are shown and any entry that you want more information about can be displayed using Option 5 Display or Option 8 Detail From this display you can remove activity 4 Remove display activity 5 Display view more detailed information about activity 8 Detail or acknowledge a message if it has been escalated 9 Acknowledge Some important fields include Type The type of monitor that generated the activity USRMSG indicates that the activity was initiated by the use of the SNDMSGICM command SNDSPLF indicates that the activity was initiated by the use of the SNDSPLFICM command Q Activity information Information about the activity such as originator of a user defined message or the message text Selecting Option 5 allows you to display the detail of a specific activity message Display Activity MOnN tOR ghoul A BS amp OR oes ee SA oS NONE Monitor type r e gf gei aoe See od 2 2 SNDSPLE Date n ad ee Oe De en S a Gee Go 98710703 TIME eo ue ee ye ee a See ag a a ne Ae ae ay Gy GLB os 23 Activity information I Spooled file QPJOBLOG sent by BRIAN knowledged recipient NONE knowledged by user NONE knowledge date
135. ck to see if the job has ran YES indicates that the monitor is to check to see if the job has run Maximum run time The maximum number of minutes that the job is allowed to run NOMAX lt indicates that the job will be allowed to run indefinitely Check if not active You want to be notified if the job is not active Job status You want to be notified if the job has any of the three statuses listed Oo oO O O OO Job Queue JOBQ The job queue monitor allows you to monitor the number of jobs that reside in your job queue With this monitor you can oversee the batch jobs that are waiting to be processed on your system You can specify the upper limit on the number of jobs that will be allowed on your job queue If this number is exceeded ICOM 400 will initiate the Action you have specified Adding Changing or Displaying a Job Queue Monitor To add change or display a job queue monitor enter a 1 on the first line under the Opt column on the Work with Monitors display You will also need to enter a name for your new monitor under the Monitor column and JOBQ under Type To change an existing monitor enter a 2 beside the monitor you want to change or enter a 2 in the first line under the Opt column along with the name and monitor type To display an existing monitor enter a 5 beside the monitor you want to display or enter a 5 in the first line under the Opt column along with the name and monitor type When you press Enter
136. cs PhoneRider Board Wizard On the Welcome panel click Next All PhoneRider board drivers have been successfully installed This Wizard will help you to configure your PhoneRider quickly and easily To begin the setup click Next MediaPhonics PhoneRider Board Wizard The second panel offers you the possibility to a Online Registration automatically register through MediaPhonics Web page Take 2 MINUTES to register Click Next Registering will allow you to access our Internet download page At your wish we will notify you by E Mail of new releases Click the button below to register on line using your Internet browser Thank you Register Now lt Back ICOM 400 User Manual 197 MediaPhonics PhoneRider Board Wizard Qe Audio diagnostic The Audio diagnostic panel appears Click Next This test enables you to verify whether your PhoneRider can play sounds on the speakers To start the test click the button below lt Back Hey Cancel MediaPhonics PhoneRider Board Wizard The Telep hony Drivers pa nel opens X Telephony Dri N elephony Drivers Click Next Ma Please configure your Phonerider telephony drivers You can specify which services are used by your PhoneRider line Configure lt Back Cancel The Line and Speakerphone Diagnostic is displayed Press the Test the line and speakerphone button Ss Line and speakerphone diagnostic oe This test allows y
137. d Displays the Work with Recipient Groups display PRINT Prints the Work with Recipient Groups report Work with ICOM 400 E mail WRKMAILICM Work with ICOM 400 Email WRKMAILICM Type choices press Enter Sender Erom Gate moaie a Pa Ss we as Date CURRE TOredate ws doed fa Ie TR he Se Me E Date CURRE Sequence option DATE SENDE Entries to be displayed first I FIRST LAST The Work with ICOM 400 Email WRKMAILICM command display allows you to display all the mail that ICOM 400 receives from the e mail address that is specified in the ICOM 400 e mail address field on the Change System Attributes display This may be returned mail due to an invalid e mail address mail that is received as a result of a reply by a user to an e mail or page sent by ICOM 400 When you press Enter you are taken to the Work with ICOM 400 Email display Sender SENDER Specifies the user ID of the person s who have sent an e mail message to the ICOM 400 e mail address NONE List the e mail messages from all senders on the Work with ICOM 400 Email display sender Specify the user ID of the sender whose e mail you want to list on the Work with ICOM 400 Email display From date FROMDATE Specifies the beginning date that you want to use when listing email The From date is the beginning of a date range of email BEGIN The earliest mail date on the file is the be
138. d The time is specified in 24 hour format and can be specified with or without a time separator Without a time separator specify a string of 4 digits hhmm where hh hours and mm minutes Hours and minutes must each be exactly 2 digits using leading zeros if necessary With a time separator specify a string of 5 digits where the time separator specified for your job is used to separate the hours minutes and seconds If you enter this command from the command line the string must be enclosed in apostrophes If atime separator other than the separator specified for your job is used this command will fail Beginning date One of the following is used to specify the beginning creation date on or after which the spooled file entries were made Any entries prior to the specified date are not included in the display CURRENT Entries with a current date creation date and between the specified beginning and ending times if specified are included BEGIN Entries from the beginning of the spooled file entries are included begin date Specify the beginning date The date must be specified in the job date format 166 number of days Specify a number to represent the number of days before the current date that you want to use for the search An example would be 10 If today s date were 3 12 03 date format is mm dd yy the Begin date for the ICOM 400 log would be 3 2 03 Ending time One of the following is used to specify the e
139. d to do is create a sequence in your setup to exclude all REPLY messages in the message type parameter e Check your message queue or QHST log against our Work with History screen and make sure that for every message in the message queue or QHST log that met your setup criteria there is only one notification record in our history file by date and time If the messages match up with the Work with History records and you are using a pager then check with your pager company It might be that they for some reason have sent the one page duplicate times This might also be true by sending pages using the SNDMSGICM command and not from a monitor For further information on how to set up exclusions See Chapter 8 System monitors For further information on how to Work with History See Chapter 4 How do I stop getting messages I don t want when using a message queue or QHST monitor A You can setup a sequence of exclusions inside your monitor setup that will exclude the messages you tell it to You can set it up by message id type program name job name user name and severity limit The message sequences that are exclusions are evaluated first in the list of sequences so it doesn t matter what sequence number you put on them For more information on setting up exclusions See ICOM 400 manual Chapter 8 System monitors How can I keep my users from executing certain functions in ICOM 400 A There is a feature in ICOM 400 called f
140. d to receive the message or only recipients that are on call to receive the message 12 Specify what action you want to take if the message must wrap around on the screen NOTE This applies only to fax and e mail messages If NOWRAP is specified the message text will be cut off if it is longer than 80 characters 13 Enter the appropriate information on delivery types if needed These include e mail addresses phone numbers message queues output queues pager numbers and fax numbers A delivery type is necessary if NONE is specified in the Recipient parameter on When you have finished entering all the pertinent information press Enter to send the message NOTE Entering SNDMSGICM on a command line and pressing Enter without prompting or leaving SELECT in the Recipient parameter will take you to the Select Recipients display Enter a 1 beside the recipient you want to receive the message Press enter to confirm the send of the message The message is sent and you are returned to the previous display The recipient defaults are used when sending the message To send a message with your own specifications either select Options 1 Send a message from the ICOM 400 Main Menu or enter SNDMSGICM on a command line and press F4 to prompt the command To send a voice message using ICOM 400 you must follow the steps below 1 From the PC where you are sending your voice message you must have the ICOM 400 Voice software ins
141. date to initiate an Action The following message types are possible INFO Informational message INQ Inquiry message COMP Completion message A completion message indicates that a task has been performed successfully DIAG Diagnostic message Diagnostic messages provide information about error detected NOTIFY Notification exception message A notification message describes a condition for which corrective action must be taken before the sending program can resume and receive the reply message from its message queue ESCAPE Escape message An error message describes an irrevocable error condition The sending program does not continue to run RQS Request message A request message allows request data received from device files to pass from this program to another program or procedure An immediate message must be sued to send the request e STATUS Status message A status message describes the status of work performed by the sending program e REPLY Reply message A reply message is a message that is a response to a received inquiry or notification message Include exclude Whether the message should be included INC or excluded EXC as a candidate to initiate an Action Skip to sequence Whether ICOM 400 should continue processing the next sequence in the list of message queue entries NEXT discontinue after the current sequence number END or skip to a specific sequence number Force action Used to
142. days a year With ICOM 400 you know that if anything were to go wrong with your system you would be notified immediately of the situation There are several different types of monitors Type CFGSTS CPU JOB JOBQ MSGQ NETF OBJSIZ OUTQ QHST RMTDEV SBS SPLF USRDFN Monitor name Configuration Status CPU Job Job Queue Message Queue Network File Object Size Output Queue QHST Remote Device Subsystem Spooled File User Defined Description Allows you to monitor the status of your lines devices and controllers Allows you to monitor for jobs that exceed CPU capacity as well as the system CPU capacity Allows you to monitor the length and existence of individual jobs as well as if a job is not active Allows you to monitor the number of jobs in your job queue Allows you to monitor for messages in a specific message queue Allows you to monitor for the presence of network files Allows you to monitor the size of a particular object Allows you to monitor the number of spooled files in an output queue Allows you to monitor the system history log to catch message that are not available in the message queue Allows you to monitor for the presence of remote devices to see if you have a network failure also allows you to ping a server to see if it is up and running Allows you to monitor the number of jobs running in a subsystem Allows you to monitor for spooled files within
143. delivery method sends a message to a message queue You must specify a message queue and library for the recipient Add Recipient Delivery Delivery type e s 6 6 eS wee bee ot MSGQ Type choices press Enter Sequence Number 001 999 Available schedule Name ALLDAYS F4 On call schedule E Name NONE ALLDAYS F4 Message Queues z a do 4 aw Ae ae y fe os Name GILD LAEV E lt 4 5 6 E o gt lt n gt 4G a a Name LIBL Pre message information Post message information To add a message queue delivery entry follow the steps below y Enter the message queue to which you want to send the recipient s messages 2 Enter the library that contains the message queue for the recipient LIBL specifies that the message queue library is a member of your library list All other information for this delivery entry is optional FAX FAX The FAX delivery method sends a message to a fax machine This is usually used when sending an attachment such as a spooled file or a text file Add Recipient Delivery Delivery type 3 FAX ICOM 400 User Manual 61 Type choices press SEQUENCE soa eere a We a a Ws RS Number 001 999 Available schedule Name ALLDAYS F4 On call schedule z s a e So ab ck sis F Name NONE ALLDAYS F4 Fax phone number Pre message information Post message information To add a fax delivery entry follow the
144. der of software for the IBM AS 400 Pinnacle products are focused primarily on AS 400 system management operations amp e business applications for both AS 400 amp Windows NT networks Formed in 1988 the firm developed a variety of software products that have become mainstay operating solutions for over 5 000 AS 400 users worldwide Designated as an official IBM Software Supplier in 1992 Pinnacle has adopted the IBM Malcolm Baldridge standards to maintain the highest level of quality throughout the software development process ICOM 400 User Manual 7 A Technical Overview of ICOM 400 Systems Management ICOM 400 helps you manage your system by monitoring its status and notifying you of any problems or potential problems ICOM 400 will monitor e Your configuration status including your controllers lines and devices e The presence of remote devices via TCP IP connections e The arrival of network files As well as common events like e Power failures e Program errors e Hardware errors And any of the other 24 000 messages that your AS 400 will post to QHST or a message queue Monitors ICOM 400 can also be configured to run other user specified monitors for items like Job queues number of jobs waiting etc Maximum job length maximum run time Job existence Object and library size Number of spooled files in an output queue Specified message queues QHST Remote devices Network files Spooled Files Jobs running
145. der the Opt column along with the name of the schedule you want to add Press Enter to go to the Add Schedule display Add Schedule Schedule name EEKDAYS Position to Text E E S ECN E Type options press Enter 1 Add 4 Remove Opt From Date To Date From Time To Time Inc E 0 00 0 00 No entries found The Add Schedule display is used to add the special values and dates that make up the schedule You can use a schedule to specifically include dates such as all the days of the year that you want to utilize for notification purposes or special values such as FRI Friday to specify days that you want ICOM 400 to utilize For example you could specify a schedule for all Mondays through Fridays by specifying MON TUE WED THU and FRI This schedule would allow the messages to be issued to the appropriate recipient each Monday through Friday You can also specify dates like 04 22 03 as dates to include in a schedule You can add an unlimited number of specific dates and times to make up a schedule From this display you may add Option 1 or remove Option 4 a schedule entry To add an individual schedule entry follow the steps below ICOM 400 User Manual 69 Enter a 1 in the first line under the Opt column Specify the beginning date of the date range for this schedule entry in the From date field Specify the ending date of the date range for this schedule entry in the To date field Specify t
146. designate a message queue monitor entry or entries that should be qualified for initiating an Action before the remaining entries The order in which ICOM 400 qualifies entries is by sequence number within entries with Force action YES then exclusion types and lastly inclusion types This field could be useful in the event that you are monitoring a message queue and have a message queue monitor entry which excludes all job completion messages However when your weekly payroll job WRKPAYRL completes you would like to begin your backups You could define a message queue monitor entry to monitor for the completion message for job WRKPAYRL with an associated Action that issues a command to begin backups By specifying Force Action YES the completion message for this specific job will initiate the Action and not be excluded as will the remaining job completion messages Another facet of this parameter is the ability to bypass the notification portion of the Action initiated Actions are processed as two parts the command sequence and the notification portion If during the command sequence portion of the action a message ICM7777 is passed pack to ICOM 400 the notification portion will be bypassed For example when the weekly payroll job WRKPAYRL completes the weekly backup should begin however you only wish to receive a pager message that WRKPAYRL completed if it is prior to 10 00 The Action would be defined to notify you with a pager messag
147. e ICOM 400 will take a few moments to vary on the line If there is a problem with varying on the line a display will come up with suggestions on how to fix it If there are no problems press Enter to proceed to the next display Quick Start Wizard display 9 ICOM 400 Quick Start Wizard will take you through the steps necessary to deliver messages via e mail pager message queue or to ring a telephone The first step will be to set specific system attributes that can be used by recipients Then we will define individual recipient information Would you like to send e mail messages y n Would you like to send fax messages y n Would you like to send pager messages y n The next display is the same as the first However this display asks if you would like to send pager messages If you would enter a Y in the space provided otherwise enter an N If you want to send pager messages you will be taken to the Line Resource display If you do not you will skip this step Press Enter ICOM 400 User Manual 29 Quick Start Wizard display 10 ICOM 400 automatically creates an asynchronous line description named ICOM400 This line description is used only by ICOM 400 and needs no configuration Should it be deleted it will automatically be re created when the next pager message is sent by ICOM 400 Line description resource name CMNO1 Name F4 for list This display asks you to specify a Line Description
148. e Within the command portion of the Action you would have a sequence that submits the backups and then a sequence that calls a program that retrieves the time and if it is greater than 10 00 sends a message ICM7777 In that ICOM 400 User Manual 99 event ICOM 400 will bypass the notification portion of the Action and no pager message will be sent Base on command response This field tells ICOM 400 to qualify the processing of the notification process of the specified Action upon the receipt of a message sent back to ICOM 400 as the result of processing the command portion of the specified Action Actions are processed in two portions the command sequence portion and the notification portion If during the command sequence portion a message ICM3333 is passed back to ICOM 400 the notification portion of the specified entry will be processed followed by the qualification of any remaining message queue monitor entries For example you may want to notify a recipient by sending a message to their message queue but only if the user is currently signed on This could be accomplished by defining an Action to notify a recipient with a message to their message queue and defining a command sequence that would call a program that determines if the recipient is signed on to the system If the recipient is signed on sending a ICM3333 message will cause the notification portion of the Action to be processed NO indicates that the notification p
149. e Based on system CPU field QO Based on system CPU The percentage of system CPU capacity that must be exceeded before the Action you have specified is initiated NOTE This field is only used when ANY or a specific or generic job name is specified in the Job field If SYSTEM is specified the value in the CPU limit field is used Job Monitor JOB A job monitor allows you to monitor the existence and length of individual jobs as well as monitor if a job is active or not and if a job has a certain status This can be a very important monitor within ICOM 400 Many times you have a job that is crucial to your business s functioning such as a payroll job or a job that fills customer orders What if the job was to end abnormally or worse not run at all With ICOM 400 you can set up a monitor to let you know when there is a problem with a job The job monitor can also check to see if the job has been running longer than it is scheduled to run This could indicate a problem with the proper functioning of the job Adding Changing or Displaying a Job Monitor To add change or display a job monitor enter a 1 on the first line under the Opt column on the Work with Monitors display You will also need to enter a name for your new monitor under the Monitor column and JOB under Type To change an existing monitor enter a 2 beside the monitor you want to change or enter a 2 in the first line under the Opt column along with the name a
150. e additional information place the cursor on the message and press Help or F1 to go to the Additional ICM Log Information display where you can review the entire message plus any additional information that is available Press F3 F12 or Enter to return to the Display Log ICM Information display Additional ICM Log Information Message ID ICM2196 Severity s cea s a 00 Job RMVATVICM User QPGMR Number 021336 Date sent o e a 3 16 03 Tame sent s e di e e s ao O01 S05 Program ee a We a a a e cd e TCMRRATVY ACG a a aa te UD ee MINE Message i 18 records were removed from the ICM activity file The Additional ICM Log Information display is a result of pressing Help or F1 when the cursor is positioned on a message on the Display ICM Log Information display The Additional ICM Log Information display gives the complete message that you requested with the Help or F1 key as well as additional message text To return to the Display ICM Log Information display press Enter F3 or F12 Some important fields on this display include the following Message ID The message ID that is associated with the text description Severity The severity level of the message Job The name of the job that produced the message User The user who submitted the job that produced the message Number The number of the job that produced the message Date and Time sent The date and time that the message was sent
151. e and monitor type When you press Enter you are taken to the Add Object Size Monitor display the Change Object Size Monitor display or the Display Object Size Monitor according to which option you have chosen The displays are identical Change Object Size Monitor MORDEOE co cg E oiie AS BY ata he SS Ge OS SAMPLE Type changes press Enter Object Shee tent Bt ee eee un Gye DATALIB Name generic ALL TAD ALY x em See ee BR ae tes Me a SS LIBL Name LIBL Object typenee s en eet hee ae Se a a LIB LIB FILE JRNRCV SLS LIMLE 2 sh ar Ye ai es BY west ek Sy Ys 1000 00000 Megabytes Schedule amp Ries Sok Seo Seb a a Se 8 SAMPLE Name ALLDAYS F4 Inactivity interval 60 Minutes 1 999 AGEVON qar Se ah aed ey SD asa Fonte SAMPLE Name F4 for list Number of occurrences 1 Number 1 99 Mex Oe Js shoal te ee oe bah ak AT Monitor size of DATALIB library Some important fields for this display include the following Object The name of the object that you wish to monitor You can monitor all objects in the library you have specified ALL a generic object name or a specific object Q Library The name of the library that contains the object s you want to monitor or LIBL when the object type is LIB Object type The type of object that you want to monitor You can monitor for a file FILE a library LIB or a journal receiver JRNRCV Q Size lim
152. e authority of a particular group enter 9 beside the group and press Enter You are taken to the Edit Group Authority display Edit Group Authority GROUP1 Type changes to current authorities press Group User Authority PUBLIC USE When the authority of a recipient group is checked ICOM 400 first checks the user profile If the user profile is not found ICOM 400 checks for a group profile If neither is found ICOM 400 checks PUBLIC To change the Group Authority column type the new authority over the current authority To add users to the list press the F6 key Add new users to get another display similar to this display where you can type the new users and the desired group authority To remove users from the list type blanks into the Group Authority column The system applies the authority changes ONLY after you have pressed the Enter key When you press the Enter key on a display after keying updates you are shown the list again with the updates applied If you press the Enter key again without typing on the display the system returns you to where you were when you requested the edit function Some important fields for the Edit Group Authority display include Q Group The name of the recipient group whose authority you want to edit QO User The user profile name of users who have specific authorities specified for the associated recipient group PUBLIC defines the authorities of all users who are n
153. e blanks in the Function authority field beside the user you want to remove The system applies the authority changes only after you have pressed the Enter key When you press Enter on a display making updates you are shown the list again with the updates applied If you press the Enter key again without typing on the display the system returns you to where you were when you requested the edit function Some important fields on this display include a User The user profile name of users who have specific authorities specified for this function PUBLIC indicates that all users are included or excluded from using this function o Function authority Whether this user or group of users can use the ICOM 400 function USE indicates that the user or group of users can utilize the specified ICOM 400 function EXCLUDE indicates that the user or group of users cannot utilize the function SECURITY The Function Authority SECURITY needs extra definition This authority allows you to turn on or off the security function of ICOM 400 If USE is specified under Function authority for user PUBLIC the ICOM 400 function authorities are turned on If EXCLUDE is specified the ICOM 400 function authorities are turned off You can turn on and off security for specific users by adding them to the display 128 The second type of Edit Function Authority display is displayed below Edit Function Authority BUnGCETON sati cy BoE gs ee ee a oe
154. e eee tenes ee nneeenaee nena 85 Option 20 Display QHST ainaani rae iiite e inina dai ened wetted evi nevis Gaus KOT E ITAA ETA PARANA EANN 85 CHAPTER 8 SYSTEM MONITORS sssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 89 Option 1 Work WIth MONItOSS ie eii enei NU IU IU IEE aA EERE EE EEE 90 INDIVIDUAL MONITORS cise deneni a a a E cers nasbeneed somadtene Aa a aE E EANA a 92 Configuration Status C CFGSTS to an a a A A DE a a On aE a RAARO 93 CPU MoN to CECPRU irae tii a a a a aa N EAA AN 94 Job Monitor JOB crerritari tapine eaat aA E a ETEA lath ADTA ATEEN dy teen E i aia 95 Job Queue JOBQ Fren aiina niai ieia aAa ers EE ORA AA EAEAN AEE AE N a 96 Message Queue MSGQ aiian a esas ovine EEEE a een aa aa e Aa MA AAA Aa a eae 97 Network File C NETF si 4accsteestseeiecdethaaeandies E E A E Ea OE AA ENE EEA REENER E AEREE 101 Object Size OBJ SIZ J iriiria EE E EENAA AAEN WEEE E E a 102 Output Queue TOUTO i Tin an Cart oa ey aa tinea chee N rt oe A a a A Re 103 QHST CHQHSIT neramina e aa O SE E ATETEA ERER EEA OARE EEEE N NE a 104 Remote Device RMTDEV viiruton cree swe ascii vena eadade EE ETA NERNET PAARA AEA KAAKAA eres aA ed 106 Sp oled File SPLR isr veel ke eae e A A eid Lada esata can Ratna eee Se eee 106 Subsystem CSSBS soak cs Gi scart EEE wesw ase ann kn A bus wide wih en teste D 109 User Defined USRDEN aciri aiiin taati aiaia EEEE EAA ATN ARANEA K cine arate teats 110 Option 2
155. e equal to the data in the message or unequal to the message data Here you want it to be equal Finally you need to specify the compare data for the message ID In this case the data should be the name of the job you are monitoring Displaying a message queue monitor To display a message queue monitor type a 5 beside the monitor you want to display and press Enter You are taken to the Display Message Queue Monitor display Here you may display monitor entries by entering a 5 beside an entry Network File NETF The Network file monitor allows you to monitor for the presence of network files A network file is a file either a physical file or a save file sent by one user to one or more other users Adding changing or displaying a network file monitor ICOM 400 User Manual 101 To add change or display a network file monitor enter a 1 on the first line under the Opt column on the Work with Monitors display You will also need to enter a name for your new monitor under the Monitor column and NETF under Type To change an existing monitor enter a 2 beside the monitor you want to change or enter a 2 in the first line under the Opt column along with the name and monitor type To display an existing monitor enter a 5 beside the monitor you want to display or enter a 5 in the first line under the Opt column along with the name and monitor type When you press Enter you are taken to the Add Network File Monitor display the Chan
156. e multiple delivery types such as pager e mail message queue telephone notification spooled file fax and network message Please refer to the Add Recipient portion of Chapter 6 of this manual for more information on setting up recipients Actions Actions are procedures or responses that result from monitor processing For example specific Actions are to be taken when certain messages are encountered including commands replies or forwarding to any recipient via a delivery type s Actions are defined on the Work with Actions display under the System monitors menu Monitor Configuration Configuration of the monitors is very flexible and highly dependent on your particular needs For an in depth explanation of the various monitors refer to Chapter 8 System Monitors For an effective set up you will need to know what you want to monitor for when you want the monitor to be active and what Action you want to be initiated in response to monitoring The default schedule for all monitors is ALLDAYS You may define a different schedule for a monitor if you want anything other than the default There are several different monitors included in ICOM 400 Monitoring options include CPU capacity message queues QHST job queues output queues job length job existence configuration status arrival of network files remote devices spooled files and a user defined monitor to monitor for any Action you specify and or one that is not accounted
157. e new system before proceeding with step 1 Internet Download Installation m Ww TOAN O 10 24 At the AS 400 command prompt type CRTLIB ICMTRIAL then CRTSAVF ICMTRIAL ICMPACK Go to the Pinnacle website at http www pbsnow com go to Products Go to ICOM 400 and click on Download your 30 day free trial at the bottom of the page You will be asked to register before download Follow the instructions for download After downloading open a DOS session on the PC and at the prompt type cd name of directory where you downloaded the file Then type FTP name of your AS 400 or its TCP IP address Type your AS 400 user profile and press enter Type your password and press Enter Type bin Type put ICMPACK SAV ICMTRIAL ICMPACK SAVF Type quit and press enter then exit and press enter Back at the AS 400 command prompt type RSTOBJ OBJ ALL SAVLIB ICMTRIAL DEV SAVF SAVF ICMTRIAL ICMPACK You should receive a message indicating that five objects were restored Note You may see a security message Don t be alarmed Note If you are currently running ICOM 400 you must ENDSBS ZICOM400 IMMED before proceeding to step 11 11 Type CALL ICMTRIAL ICMINST 12 Type Go ICM to reach ICOM 400 s Main Menu NOTE After installation is finished you will be directed to ICOM 400 s Quick Start Wizard feature If you do not wish to use the Quick Start wizard because you had a previous version of ICOM 400 wi
158. e that you want to monitor Configuration type The type of configuration of the description entered in the Configuration description field LIN indicates that the configuration is a communication line CTL indicates that the configuration is a controller DEV indicates that the configuration is a device Status The configuration status that you would like the configuration status monitor to check This value can range from 1 to 15 For a detailed listing of statuses please refer to the ICOM 400 online help or press F4 for a list NOTE You may specify up to three statuses for the configuration status monitor to monitor QO Test Whether the specified configuration is the specified configuration status that is specified in the Status field IS indicates that the line controller or device is currently in the status specified ISNOT indicates that the line controller or device is not currently in the status specified QO Number of occurrences The number of times the specified configuration can satisfy the conditions defined in the Status and Test parameters before it initiates the Action specified The first time the condition is met ICOM 400 will initiate the specified Action then again after the number of occurrences is met The number of occurrences count will then be reset and the cycle will begin again CPU Monitor CPU The CPU monitor allows you to monitor for jobs on your AS 400 that have exceeded the allotted CPU
159. e the Default user code to the one just created Now every time that PC receives a call it will automatically use the user code found in the IP entry This will immediately start playing the menu options Can I set up the inbound voice so that it will automatically start a menu option right from the beginning of the call Answer Yes You will need to create a menu that contains only one option and change the Auto select single option field to YES Follow the instructions on FAQ 1 using the menu just created Once this is completed all calls received by that PC will automatically use the user code found in the IP entry which will immediately access the menu which will immediately start the option within the menu What are the common reasons why an inbound call cannot be established Answer 1 The program on the PC is not active 2 The program on the PC has been disabled due to too many consecutive bad calls 3 TCP IP is down 4 The ZICOM400 subsystem is not ICOM 400 User Manual 185 186 active on the AS 400 5 The IP address of the AS 400 has not been specified within the Inbound information on the PC program Is there a way to access my files in order to provide the caller some information Answer Yes When defining the INFO menu type an exit program can be specified so that when called it could access your files and generate a message to be given to the caller For instance you could give the caller the status of an invoice o
160. e type that you choose to send Specify if you are sending the message to a recipient or group of recipients Specify a scheduled date and time to send the message CURRENT means that you want to send the message immediately 6 If you are sending a pager message specify if you want to place the message on a page queue 7 Specify how you want to send this message You can send it via e mail EMAIL message queue MSGQ pager PAGER telephone PHONE fax machine FAX spooled file SPLF or network message NETMSG Specifying RCP will send the message via the delivery methods defined for the specific recipient s you entered in the Name field NOTE Choosing specific delivery type s will override the delivery type pre defined for the recipient only if the delivery type you specify is defined for that recipient If the delivery type is not defined for that recipient you will receive an error message 8 Specify if you want to escalate the message RCP specifies that you want to use the escalation table defined for the recipient you have chosen For more information on escalation tables see Chapter 6 Work with Recipients 9 Specify if you want to check for a reply when sending an e mail or pager message This is only available if you have two way communications available 10 Specify if you want to use recipient pre post information for the recipient s 11 Specify if you want to want all recipients entered in the Name fiel
161. e used with the provided defaults 170 Appendix A Product Warranty and Support This section contains important warranty and product support information Please read it carefully Product Support Worldwide Pinnacle support offers you a wide range of choices and access to high quality responsive technical support ICOM 400 has been thoroughly tested and comes with on line help text as well as user documentation Displays are simple to understand and use When You Have A Question Check the on line help text Consult the ICOM 400 documentation and other printed information included with ICOM 400 Consult electronic options using AS Manager Customer Support ACS This is accessed by option 30 from the main menu This will allow you to Display answers to commonly asked questions using the Q amp A database Send a message to Technical Support Page a Technical Support person in emergency situations For more information on ACS consult Chapter 11 When calling AS Manager Support you should be at your computer and have documentation at hand Be prepared to give the following information The version of ICOM 400 that you are using The version of OS 400 you are using The exact wording of any messages that appear on your screen along with the message ID A printout of the joblog when the problem occurred A description of what happened and what you were doing when the problem occurred A description of how you tr
162. e would be 10 If today s date were 3 12 03 the From date would be 3 2 03 To date TODATE Specify the ending date that you want to use when clearing the ICOM 400 log The To date is the ending point in the ICOM 400 log that is cleared CURRENT The current date is used as the ending date of the date range date Specifies the date in system format with or without date separators that is 12 23 03 or 122303 that you want to be the ending date a range of dates nnnnn Specifies a number to represent the number of days before the current day that you want to clear An example would be 10 If today s date were 3 22 03 the To date would be 3 12 03 Send using ICOM 400 SNDICM ICOM 400 User Manual 151 Send using ICOM 400 SNDICM Type choices press Enter Recipient Herd Le ak BE eds for more values Messag Send message as EMAIL FAX for more values The Send using ICM SNDICM command is used to send a message to a single recipient or multiple recipients You can schedule the SNDICM command through a job scheduler if you want the message to be sent at a particular time or as a result of a job running A typical use of the SNDICM within a job scheduler would be to send a message indicating the successful or unsuccessful completion of a job or series of jobs Recipient RCP Specifies the name of the recipient to which you want to send the message You can enter mul
163. eated program to monitor or check a specific situation The Action can also include the notification of a recipient which can be conditioned upon ICM s recipient of an ICM3333 message from the user created program A user defined monitor may also be used in a simplistic job scheduler fashion By associating a schedule with the monitor that contains the same Start date time and End date time the monitor will only be activated and initiate an Action once Adding changing or displaying a user defined monitor To add change or display a user defined monitor enter a 1 on the first line under the Opt column on the Work with Monitors display You will also need to enter a name for your new monitor under the Monitor column and USRDFN under Type To change an existing monitor enter a 2 beside the monitor you want to change or enter a 2 in the first line under the Opt column along with the name and monitor type To display an existing monitor enter a 5 beside the monitor you want to display or enter a 5 in the first line under the Opt column along with the name and monitor type When you press Enter you are taken to the Add User Defined Monitor display the Change User Defined Monitor display or the Display User Defined Monitor according to which option you have chosen The displays are identical 110 Add User Defined Monitor MOnLtOL una oS a ly ae ee ae ee eS USER Type choices press Enter Schedule a en ae e a Name
164. ee Windows 98 NT 2000 Voice modem device provided by Pinnacle Business Systems Network connection with static IP address Access to analogue telephone line Access to CD ROM drive for installation Installation Instructions PC Windows 98 1 Install the voice modem device a If you are installing a ModemBlaster follow the instructions shipped with the modem b If you are installing a PhoneRider board follow the instructions on PhoneRider Installation under Windows 98 in Appendix D Plug in the analogue phone line into the Tel Line phone connection on the voice modem device Using the CD provided by Pinnacle Business Systems select Run from the Start menu and run X ICOM400 ICOMVoice SETUP EXE where X is the CD ROM drive Follow the prompts on the panels and finish setup by rebooting when prompted Note During the installation you may encounter the Version Conflict panel Select the Yes button each time it is shown The ICOM400 Voice panel appears when Windows opens after restarting the PC Select the appropriate device and desired voice As a quick test use a telephone to dial the number of the phone line connected to the voice modem device Windows NT aS Follow the instructions on PhoneRider Installation under Windows NT 4 0 in Appendix D Plug in the analogue phone line into the Tel Line phone connection on the PhoneRider board Using the CD provided by Pinnacle Business Systems select Run from the Start menu and run
165. egin with AC to be included in the report or on the display Message text MSGTXT This value searches within the messages for the text that you have specified ALL You want to work with all messages regardless of text generic message text Specify the generic text that you want to search for within a pager message Sequence option SEQOPT The order in which you want to display or report the pages you have selected DATE You want to display the selected pages in date order RCP You want to display the selected pages in recipient order GRP You want to display the selected pages in recipient group order Entries to be displayed first START Whether you want to display or report your selected pages in ascending or descending order based on the value in the Sequence option parameter LAST You want to display or report your pages in descending order FIRST You want to display or report your pages in ascending order Output OUTPUT ICOM 400 User Manual 163 Whether the pages are to be shown on the Work with Pages display or printed to a spooled file Displays the Work with Pages display PRINT Prints the Work with Pages report Work with Page Queues using ICOM 400 WRKPAGQICM The Work with Page Queues using ICM WRKPAGQICM command takes you to the Work with Page Queue ICM display Here you can work with the page queue for each company that you have entered in the Work with Pager Companies display You can dis
166. eith eee hs Men cee 5871578 Baus Tates pis a ae ee en Rae a Sat ae Oe 9600 2400 4800 7200 This display prompts you for a company name and return fax number and the baud rate for your modem The return fax number is the number that will be displayed as the number of the company sending the fax 28 Quick Start Wizard display 7 ICOM 400 requires that you set your modem to asynchronous mode Enter an option 1 next to the modem for setup instructions and other information Type options press Enter 1 Select Opt Manufacturer Model IBM 7852 This display requires that the modem that you will be using with ICOM 400 be set to asynchronous mode Select a modem from the list provided and follow the directions for setting your modem to asynchronous mode If your modem is not provided select Other and follow the instructions given Press Enter to proceed Quick Start Wizard display 8 ICOM 400 automatically creates an asynchronous line description named ICOM4005 This line description is used only by ICOM 400 and needs no configuration Should it be deleted it will automatically be re created when the next pager message is sent by ICOM 400 Line description resource name CMNO1 Do you want to test varying on the line y n This display asks you if you want to test varying on the line that you specified If you do place a Y in the space provided otherwise put an N If you choose to test the lin
167. end a message to Technical Support Page a Technical Support person in emergency situations Or call our Technical Support staff at 918 587 1500 Remote Customer Support Automated Customer Support ACS is designed to permit remote user access to the Pinnacle customer support AS 400 This product is offered at no charge to customers who are under a software maintenance license agreement ACS is automatically installed at ICOM 400 installation time It provides menu screens to assist you in defining ACS connectivity to the Pinnacle customer support machine and in ordering any necessary enhancements or corrections PTFs to Pinnacle software products ACS allows you to Order PTFs for any AS Manager product Send a message to technical support Page a technical support representative for emergencies Ask questions or search for answers on Q amp A database Quick Start Wizard ICOM 400 offers a comprehensive set up feature called Quick Start Wizard ICOM 400 Quick Start Wizard will take you through the steps necessary to deliver messages via e mail pager message queue or to ring a telephone With Quick Start Wizard you can configure your e mail server asynchronous modem line resource description and pager company You can add recipients and the delivery types for each recipient such as e mail pager message queue and telephone notification You can also send a message to test the various delivery types 22 Chanter 2 ICOM 40
168. er There may be times that the recipient is not prepared to respond to a voice message that contains a list of responses When this is the case just hang up without selecting any response The call will end and the message will be acknowledged This will stop the message from escalating if escalation was used Can I send a voice message without creating a recipient Answer Yes In the Voice section of the System Attributes you must specify the IP Entry and possibly a telephone prefix 9 On the Send Message SNDMSGICM command you would specify NONE as the Name Key in the message and hit enter Page down and enter the Phone number in the Phone number PHONE field Press Fi6 when ready to issue the message How can I find the message number of a message in order to replay it at a later time Answer There are several ways to find the message number For starters you can use a replacement variable QMSGNBR in the pre post text of a recipient This would cause the message number to be part of the outgoing message If the outgoing message is to a phone the message would contain Message number is 45 Also on phone messages the message number can be played at anytime during the body of the message by pressing the button The message number is also played during the 3 and 4 repetition of the introduction This would allow you to hear the message number in case you were not at home and the introduction is being recorded on your answering m
169. er is dialed Press Enter to proceed to the next display Quick Start Wizard display 12 ICOM 400 requires that you set your modem to asynchronous mode Enter an option 1 next to the modem for setup instructions and other information Type options press Enter 1 Select Opt Manufacturer Model Boca modem IBM 5853 IBM 7852 IBM 7855 Microcom 28000 US Robotics Sportster Other 30 This display requires that the modem that you will be using with ICOM 400 be set to asynchronous mode Select a modem from the list provided and follow the directions for setting your modem to asynchronous mode If your modem is not provided select Other and follow the instructions given Press Enter when finished Quick Start Wizard display 13 ICOM 400 automatically creates an asynchronous line description named ICOM400 This line description is used only by ICOM 400 and needs no configuration Should it be deleted it will automatically be re created when the next pager message is sent by ICOM 400 Line description resource name CMNO1 Do you want to test varying on the line y n This display asks you if you want to test varying on the line that you specified If you do place a Y in the space provided otherwise put an N If you choose to test the line ICOM 400 will take a few moments to vary on the line If there is a problem with varying on the line a display will come up with suggestions on how to fix it
170. er the message on the message queue Setting up the AS 400 First thing is to let ICOM 400 know about the PCs that will be used for voice messaging For each PC an IP entry is created in ICOM 400 The two major things you will need to know for this is the IP address of the PC and whether the phone line connected to the voice modem device is a direct line or linked to the PBX system Follow the next few steps to create one or more IP entries Access the ICOM 400 main menu by typing GO ICM on a command line From the ICOM 400 main menu take Option 4 Recipient Information menu From the Recipient Information menu take Option 9 Work with IP Entries Use Option 1 to add an IP entry This is where you will specify the IP address of the PC If the phone line connected to the voice modem device is not a direct line you may need to specify a telephone prefix such as 9 9comma for dialing out 5 Verify that the ICOM Voice program is active on the PC Use Option 7 on the newly added IP entry to test the connection to the PC You should get a Response received from IP message 6 After all the IP entries are added press F12 to return to the Recipient Information menu an GE Now ICOM 400 needs to know the phone number of the person to call recipient There are multiple delivery types a recipient can contain For instance a recipient can be defined with a pager an email address and a phone number for voice messaging Follow the next few steps
171. et The Diagnostic Status panel appears inviting you to pick up Diagnostic Status z the handset Waiting Please pick up your handset aS Press Stop to interrupt the diagnostic Immediately click Stop The Wizard asks if you have heard the dial tone or if you want to abort diagnostics Click Yes You will The diagnostic was aborted Answer YES if you don t want to run the diagnostic return to the Handset Diagnostic panel Answer NO if you picked up the handset and nothing happened Then click Next The Wizard informs you that the setup is finished Press the Finish button to leave the Wizard MS Congratulations The setup is finished All necessary information was successfully gathered The PhoneRider Board Wizard is now finished You will be able at any time to change the current settings using the Telephony icon on the Windows Control Panel Click Finish to leave the Wizard lt Back Cancel Continue with ICOM 400 Voice Installation 210 Appendix xit Program hererence The INFO type allows a user exit program to be in control of the dialogue between the AS 400 and the person on the phone Within the ICOMTOOLS source file found in the ICOMTOOLS library are two sample programs that will help you understand how this process works The source members start with PARTDEMO and SAYSTATUS The SAYSTATUS sample program is the equivalent to the ICMCSTS program that is used in the S
172. et download page At your wish we will notify you by E Mail of new releases Click the button below to register on line using your Internet browser Thank youl Register Now The Telephony Drivers panel opens N Telephony Drivers Click Next Please configure your Phonerider telephony drivers You can specify which services are used by your PhoneRider line Configure MediaPhonics PhoneRider Board Wizard Mai Audio diagnostic The Audio diagnostic panel appears Press the Test This test enables you to verify whether your PhoneRider can the audio system button even thou g h you may not hear play sounds on the speakers any au d io To start the test click the button below Diagnostic Status Playing sound on the speakers Press Stop to end ce oar The Diagnostic Status window opens Click Stop 190 D iagnostic Status The Wizard asks whether you have heard the sound Always Click Yes You will return to the Audio Diagnostic panel Click Next MediaPhonics PhoneRider Board Wizard Diagnostic Status b Diagnostic Status The Line and Speakerphone Diagnostic is displayed Press the Test the line and speakerphone button The Diagnostic Status window opens If the board is correctly configured you can hear the card click Click Stop to end the test The Wizard asks if it performed correctly Click Yes You will return to the Line and speakerphone Diagnostic panel C
173. eted s Bottom Display Detail uccessfully Press Enter to continue F8 Add Position to to monitor F12 Cancel F17 Top F18 Bottom To add a message to a monitor as a monitor entry press F8 You are taken to the Add Monitor Entry display The message ID of the message is automatically entered into the Message ID field Type choices press Monitor Monitor type Sequence Schedule Severity limit Job name User Program Message ID Message type Action Sog Include Exclude Add Monitor Name F4 for list MSGO QHST ber 1 999 e ALLDAYS ber 00 99 e generic e generic e generic e generic ALL e NONE F4 INC EXC ICOM 400 User Manual 117 Skip to sequence NEXT 1 999 END NEXT Force action ae E NO NO YES Base on command response NO NO YES You must supply the monitor name in the Monitor field and an Action in the Action field Once you have entered all the pertinant information press Enter Your monitor entry is added to the monitor your specify and you are returned to the Display Details display Option 13 Add monitor entries based on QHST Option 13 allows you to display message entries based on QHST and add them as QHST monitor entries After selecting Option 13 you are taken to the Display QHST using ICOM 400 DSPQHSTICM command display For more information on the Display QHST using ICOM 4
174. fined messages can also be used with the PHONE delivery method to send a phone number to a numeric pager You can specify the pager number in the Message field When you want to send a page to a recipient using the SNDMSGICM command you just have to enter the Message ID in the Message parameter or place a 7 beside the message ID you want to send on the Work with Pre defined Messages display See the PHONE delivery method for more information Pre defined messages can also be assigned to Actions You can set up a monitor to initialize a specific Action that sends your pre defined message whenever a specific condition that the monitor is monitoring is met You have several options on this display You can add a new pre defined message Option 1 change an existing message Option 2 or copy a message Option 3 You can also remove a message Option 4 display a message Option 5 or send the message to a selected recipient Option 7 Adding a Pre defined Message To add a pre defined message enter a 1 on the first line under the Opt column Press Enter to go to Add Pre defined Message display Add Pre defined Messag Type choices press Enter Message ID Text The Add Pre defined Message display is used to add a pre defined message identifier and text for the message Pre defined messages are messages that you want to use repetitively and that you do not want to re key each time you send the message
175. for by an existing monitor type Monitors are defined on the Work with Monitors display under the System Monitors menu Testing Test ICOM 400 s message and delivery setup by sending a message Type GO ICM at a command line to access ICOM 400 s Main Menu Select option 1 to Send a message or type SNDMSGICM on a command line Specify the message you want to send the name of the recipient and press Enter Then specify the delivery type and hit Enter to send the test message 5 For special sending options see Chapter 3 of this manual oe te NOTE If you experience any difficulties in sending or receiving messages perform the following steps 1 Recheck the modem settings 2 Recheck the e mail fax pager company or recipient information 3 Look in the resource communication entries file See chapter 11 on displaying resource communication entries Sign on to ACS Main Menu option 30 and check the Q amp A database Check the support forum at www icom400 com Contact your Technical Support Representative at Pinnacle 918 587 1500 om 38 Autostart All ICOM 400 activity is routed through and controlled by an autostart job called ICOMDQM which runs in the ZICOM400 subsystem This subsystem and job should be active at all times since paging escalation scheduling queuing and automatic history purging are performed by this job The following command is processed during a new install of ICOM 400 to add an autostart job
176. function is checked ICOM 400 first checks the user profile If the user profile is not found ICOM 400 checks for a group profile If neither is found ICOM 400 checks PUBLIC You can specify authority levels in one of two ways 1 Assign one of the predefined system values for the function authority level USE ALL CHANGE EXCLUDE 2 Assign user defined authority levels User defined authority levels are created by placing or removing X s from the columns Whichever technique you use the system determines the function authority values or specific authorities based on the information you have typed If you type both function authority values and specific authorities for a user the specific authorities are used To change the authority level of a user type over the appropriate columns in the user s rows Except for the Function authority column you give the user the named authority by typing an X in the ICOM 400 User Manual 129 column and remove the authority by typing a blank spacebar in the column To change the Function authority column type the new authority over the current authority To add users to the list press the F6 key Add new users to get another display similar to this one where you can type the new users and the desired authority levels To remove users from the list type blanks into all of the authorities columns including Function authority that are shown The system applies the authority
177. ge Network File Monitor display or the Display Network File monitor according to which option you have chosen The displays are identical Change Network File Monitor Monitor we cd ora ot Ue A ie ot Le SAMPLE Type changes press Enter Bae Goa ge he ey A eo ae ee a IMPORTANT generic ALL MEMBErs 25 eis es af Mal ces tes HS Soh eo ek a ALL generic ALL TO USSE IDY ah Ay lak inte sen Se oft Yak Tako ALL AL From user ID USeGr AID wits Baie wee El ak SS iL ALL AdGAreSS lt 6 ee ha deo HO a a a iL e ALL Network file type iL LL DTA SRC SAVF SChnedudie a a8 os sn ae owe Se Se a iE e ALLDAYS F4 Inactivity Interval vo lt i lt 4 ai ep abl ab inutes 1 999 ACELOR dae i ee tel ac wey sta all ate BOA bow iE e F4 for list REXEN aai wa Les sen hota MA 8 oh td itor for IMPORTANT network file Some important fields on this display include the following File The name of the network file for which you are monitoring You can monitor for all files ALL a generic file name or specific file Member The name of a member in the network file that you want to monitor You can monitor all members in the file ALL a generic member name or a specific member To user ID The name of the user ID to whom the network file is being sent You can specify any user on the local system that is to receive a network file ALL o
178. get the email feature to function correctly e TCP IP running on your AS 400 e Your AS 400 has to be able to connect to an ISP or internal mail server Try pinging or telneting to the IP address or name to see if you get a good verification e If you have an internal mail server you need to make sure it can receive mail from your AS 400 e A working email address The fastest way to see what is going on with email is to take the option to display or print email communications To do this go to the ICOM 400 main menu GO ICM take an option 5 Display history information take option 10 to display email communications or select option 11 to print communications For further instructions In the ICOM 400 manual See Chapter 6 for setting up an EMAIL delivery type for a recipient and Chapter 9 for setting up your system attributes for email How do I know what version of ICOM 400 I m running A Run this command to display a data area DSPDTAARA ICOM400 ICMPRM The first 2 digits of the 4 character data area tells you what version number you are for the ICOM 400 release i e 1210 means that you are on version 1 2 What types of modems work with ICOM 400 A First and foremost you must know that for paging you have to use a modem that is set to asynchronous There are many different types of modems that will work with ICOM 400 For paging we recommend these IBM models 5853 7855 or 7852 which can all be set to asynchronous
179. ginning date of a date range 158 CURRENT The current date is the beginning date of a date range date Enter the date in job format with or without date separators that is 12 23 03 or 122303 that you want to be the beginning date of a date range nnnnn Specify a number to represent the number of days before the current day that you want to use for the search An example would be 10 If today s date were 3 12 03 the From date for the mail would be 3 2 03 To date TODATE Specifies the ending date that you want to use when displaying e mail The To date is the ending limit of a date range of mail END The latest date in the ICOM 400 file is used as the ending date in the date range CURRENT The current date is the ending date of the date range date Specifies the date in job format with or without date separators that is 12 23 03 or 122303 that you want to be the ending date of a date range nnnnn Specifies a number to represent the number of days before the current day that you want to use for the search An example would be 10 If today s date were 3 22 03 the To date for the mail would be 3 12 03 Sequence option SEQOPT Specifies the order in which you want to display or report the entries that you have selected DATE You want to display the selected entries in date order SENDER You want to display the selected entries in sender order Entries to be displayed first START Specifies whether you want
180. gt FWRKACT Text Sh oe trp GQ ce Mw Aloe ow 2 Work with actions Type changes to current authorities press Enter Function Change User Authority Add Update Remove Display Copy Authority PUBLIC CHANGE X X X X This display allows the security officer not only to determine who has the authority to use certain functions but also how much authority that user has From this display the security officer can allow the user to Add Update Remove Display Copy or Change Authority on the particular ICOM 400 function For example a user may be able to display and update information on a certain display but not add or remove information The types of authorities that use this type of display are WRKACT Allows user to work with actions WRKCMP Allows user to work with pager companies WRKESC Allows user to work with escalation tables WRKGRP Allows user to work with recipient groups WRKMAIL Allows user to work with e mail WRKMON Allows user to work with monitors WRKMSG Allows user to work with pre defined messages WRKRCP_ Allows user to work with recipients WRKSCH Allows user to work with schedules The Edit Function Authority display shows a list of current users authorized to a function and the authority levels that each user has been assigned You can add users to the list remove users from the list and change the authority level of users When the authority of a
181. guish between controllers Some important fields on this display include Seq The sequence in which you would like ICOM 400 to consider the compare data for each message This number can range from 1 to 999 Q And Or Whether ICOM 400 should consider this compare data sequence in combination with other sequences AND or as an alternative to other sequences OR 100 Q Starting position The position of the message data part of the message that you would like for ICOM 400 to begin comparing data NOTE This is the starting position of the message data not the message text For example if you had a message Object amp 1 in amp 2 type amp 3 deleted you would specify position 1 for the object name amp 1 This field works in conjunction with the Length field If the length of amp 1 is 10 characters and you wanted to compare amp 2 you would specify 11 as the starting position for amp 2 Q Length The length of characters in the message that you would like for ICOM 400 to use for comparing data NOTE If you do not know the length of the message data you can find it by entering WRKMSGD on a command line Press F4 to prompt the command Enter the name of the message identifier in the space provided or FIRST if you want to display multiple identifiers In Message file enter the name of the message file i e ICMMSGF in library ICOM400 for ICOM 400 Press Enter to go to the Work with Message Descriptions display Place a
182. he maximum queue time specified in the Maximum paging queue time field is reached ICOM 400 will transmit the pagers regardless of the specified paging queue time The queue depth specified can be from 1 to 999 e The maximum number of time in seconds before messages that are in the queue for this company are transmitted If the maximum number of seconds is reached before the maximum number of pages specified in the Maximum paging queue depth field is reached ICOM 400 will transmit the pages regardless of the specified paging queue depth The maximum time specified can be from 0 send immediately to 3600 seconds e The maximum number of page messages that can be included in a transmission to the pager company You should contact your paging company to determine the maximum number of pages that they can handle in a single transmission If you have set the maximum queue depth at 100 and specified maximum pages per connection of 10 for the pager company ICOM 400 will break the 100 pages into 10 groups of 10 e The number of times that ICOM 400 will re dial the pager company ICOM 400 will continue re dialing until a connection is made or the number of retries is exceeded Specify a number from 1 to 9 retries e Which system in the network sends messages for this company Messages can be entered from any terminal on your network The messages are routed to the sending system by ICOM 400 You will also need to specify e The line speed that
183. he Diagnostic Status panel appears inviting you to pick up the handset Waiting Please pick up your handset es Press Stop to interrupt the diagnostic Immediately click Stop The Wizard asks if you have heard the dial tone or if you want to abort diagnostics Click Yes You will return to The diagnostic was aborted Answer YES if you don t want to run the diagnostic the Handset Diagnostic panel Answer NO if you picked up the handset and nothing happened Then click Next ICOM 400 User Manual 199 MediaPhonics PhoneRider Board Wizard ga Congratulations All necessary information was successfully gathered The PhoneRider Board Wizard is now finished The Wizard informs you that the setup is finished Press the Finish button to leave the Wizard You will be able at any time to change the current settings The setup IS finished using the Telephony icon on the Windows Control Panel Click Finish to leave the Wizard Completing the Found New This panel should still exist Hardware Wizard O PhoneRider ISA 1 2 Accelerator Press the Finish button Reboot when prompted Windows has finished installing the software for this device To close this wizard click Finish Continue with ICOM 400 Voice Installation 200 PhoneRider Installation under Windows NT 4 0 Load the latest drivers for the PhoneRider board using the CD provided by Pinnacle Business Systems Select Run from the Sta
184. he beginning time of the time range for this schedule entry in the From time field If the From time is greater than the To time then the To time specified is assumed to be the next day Specify the ending time of the time range for this schedule entry in the To time field Specify whether the date entry should be excluded or included in the list of schedule entries INC specifies that the schedule should be included in the list of schedules EXC specifies that the schedules should be excluded from the list of schedules If there are no schedule entries with INC it is assumed that all days are included except specific exceptions pee inc a a To remove an individual schedule follow the steps below 1 Enter a 4 beside the schedule entry s you want to remove 2 Press Enter to go to the Confirm Remove of Schedule Entries display 3 To remove the entry s press Enter or F12 to return to the previous display to change your selections Changing a Schedule To change an existing schedule enter a 2 beside the schedule on the Work with Schedules display Press Enter to go to the Change Schedule display For more information on adding and removing schedule entries see Adding a Schedule Note You cannot change a schedule entry so you must delete the entry within the schedule and add another schedule with your changes Copying a Schedule To copy an existing schedule enter a 3 beside the schedule on the Work with Sc
185. he function authority to display an entry If this authority is not granted Display should be blank Copy Specify an X under the Copy column to specify the function authority to copy an entry If this authority is not granted Copy should be blank Change authority Specify an X under the Change authority column to specify the function authority to change the authority for an entry If this authority is not granted Change authority should be blank O O 0 O ODO ODO Edit Function Authority WRKHST The Edit Function Authority display for WRKHST differs from the other Edit Function Authority displays Special care should be taken to review each of the available security functions As in all functional authority displays you can add users to the list remove users from the list and change the authority level of users Some important fields on this display include the following List all Specify an X in the List All field to specify authority to list all messages regardless of who the recipient or sender of the message may be If this authority is not granted the List All field should be blank Q Display all Specify an X in the Display All field to specify authority to display all messages regardless of who the recipient or sender of the message may be If this authority is not granted the Display all field should be blank QO Dsp Lst sender Specify an X in the Dsp Lst sender field to specify the authority
186. he monitor to send an e mail message to your home computer in the event of a line failure You can then respond quickly without having to worry about valuable information or time A controller is a device that controls the operation of input output devices i e workstations and attunes the operation of the devices with the operation of the entire system For example you can set up a monitor to notify you if an ASCII controller that manages your modems has gone down If this controller goes down you will not be able to send pages with ICOM 400 You can direct the monitor to initiate an Action that will send a message through another means of communication i e e mail message queue etc A device can be any piece of equipment that is used with your AS 400 Devices can be workstations printers diskette units tape units or remote systems There are several ways in which you might want to monitor a device For example you might want to monitor a tape unit for a failure when you are backing up your system If the monitor detects that the tape device has failed during your back up you can initiate an Action to back up to another device re try the backup or to simply send a message notifying you of the failure Adding changing or displaying a configuration status monitor To add change or display a configuration status monitor enter a 1 on the first line under the Opt column on the Work with Monitors display You will also need to enter a
187. he name of the new table in the New Name field and press Enter to copy the table Removing an Escalation Table To remove an escalation table enter a 4 beside the table s that you want remove and press Enter You are taken to the Confirm Remove of Escalation Tables display Press Enter to remove the table s or F12 to return to the Work with Escalation Tables display to change your selections Displaying an Escalation Table To display the contents of an escalation table enter a 5 beside the table that you want to display and press Enter You are taken to the Display Escalation Table display For more information on this display s fields see Adding an Escalation Table Option 6 Work with Pre Defined Messages To go to the Work with Pre Defined Messages display enter 6 on the command line of the Recipient Information menu ICOM 400 User Manual 75 Work with Pre defined Messages POSMEDON CO Ge a GE Ads a Starting characters Type options press Enter 1 Add 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Remove 5 Display 7 Send messag Opt Message ID Text SALESMEET Don t forget sales meeting at 2pm today The Work with Pre defined Messages display shows all message Ids that have been defined to ICOM 400 Pre defined messages are messages that you want to use repetitively and do no want to re key each time you want to send the message Each message is assigned a message ID to facilitate use of the pre defined message Pre de
188. he tones that are associated with a PHONE delivery type i e When ringing a telephone and receiving tones from the modem This will make it possible to use the PHONE type to send a pager message to a numeric pager and bypass the pager company setup NOTE When sending a page to a numeric pager you may wish to use the PHONE delivery entry to send your message It will ring your pager directly rather than dialing the pager company to send your message This is also helpful when your pager company does not support TAP To set up this delivery entry to send a numeric message i e a phone number to a numeric pager follow the steps below 1 Specify the number of the numeric pager in the Phone number field Place a few commas in the Pre message information field to pause This is usually necessary when sending a message to a numeric pager 3 You can also enter a number to send to the pager in the Pre message information field This number will be sent every time you page this recipient 4 In the Post message information field specify NOTONE to turn off the tones that would normally be sent when ringing a telephone If you do not specify NOTONE your pager will receive a series of 1s and 3s 5 If necessary you may also wish to put in the Post message information field to hang up the call This delivery entry can be used to send a message using the SNDMSGICM command Enter a phone number or other numeric message in the Message par
189. hedules display Press Enter to go to the Copy Schedule display Enter the name of the new schedule in the New Name field Press Enter to copy the schedule and add it to the list of existing schedules Removing a Schedule To remove an existing schedule enter a 4 beside the schedule s on the Work with Schedules display Press Enter to go the Confirm Remove of Schedules display Press Enter to remove the schedule s or press F12 to return to the Work with Schedules display to change your selections Displaying a Schedule To display an existing schedule enter a 5 beside the schedule on the Work with Schedules display Press Enter to go the Display Schedule display For more information on the fields displayed see Adding a Schedule 70 Option 4 Work with Pager Companies To go to the Work with Pager Companies display enter Option 4 on the command line of the Recipient Information menu Work with Pager Companies POSICION tO 22 Ske yox Starting characters Type options press Enter 1 Add 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Remove 5 Display 6 Work with recipients Opt Company LLSOUTH sLSOUTH2 KDOG ry F le company N K B BE BI S S SE SE TE AA wo Hf The Work with Pager Companies display shows all pager companies that have been defined to ICOM 400 Pager companies supply pagers that you use and want to define to ICOM 400 From this display you have several options Yo
190. her than having to send each member of the group an individual message To activate a recipient group first e Specify the name of the recipient group that you want to create Recipient Groups are logical groupings of people to which you may want to send the same message You can have an unlimited number of recipient groups e The description of the recipient group e The sequence numbers of the entries The lowest number indicates the entry that is to be processed first and the highest number indicates the entry is to be processed last and e The names of the recipients for the group NOTE Before pager notification can begin company information must be defined Use the Work with Pager Companies to define these parameters Add Pager Company Add Pager Company Type choices press E Pager company Contact name Address line 1 Address line 2 Computer phone number 2 way communication type l ELLSOUTH Mailbox user ID Mailbox password Pager company password Characters Maximum message length ber 1 999 Maximum paging queue depth ber 1 999 Maximum paging queue time ber 0 3600 Maximum pages per connection ber a 1 Number of retries E Bact ass ber S Limit one page per messag Doe a e NO YE Sending system e LCL 16 Add Pager Company Type choices press Enter Modem rater 2 gids ase a ll Uap HS a i
191. hich is equivalent to the SAYSTATUS source found in ICOMTOOLS This source is provided for you to change or add to depending on your needs Program to call SAYSTATUSC from ICOMTOOLS library Program values LISTJOBS Lists jobs in subsystem QINTER or QBATCH Pass reply should be set to YES SBSJOBCNT Gives the number of active jobs in subsystem QINTER or QBATCH Pass reply should be set to YES JOBCOUNT Gives the number of jobs in a job queue Pass reply should be set to YES SPLFCOUNT Gives the number of spooled files in output queue QPRINT or PRTO1 Pass reply should be set to YES CPUPERCENT Gives the of CPU utilization Pass reply should be set to NO Frequently Asked Questions This section lists questions frequently posed to Pinnacle s technical support staff regarding ICOM 400 If you have a question please read through this FAQ before calling our technical support You may find the answer you are looking for Can ICOM 400 be integrated into a job scheduler A Yes you can specifically send a pager message if a job has ended normally or abnormally from IBM s job scheduler IJS or Pinnacle s Job Manager products You can also run ICOM 400 commands inside any job scheduling product Example Using the Change Pager Command using Job Scheduler An example paging command is shown below The command is the Send Message using ICM SNDMSGICM command used with ICOM 400 Change Pager Command using JS CHGPGRJS T
192. ied job queue When this number is reached the first time ICOM 400 will initiate the specified Action The Action will be initiated again when the number of occurrences has been met The number of occurrences count is then reset to zero and the cycle is repeated QO Test The logical operator that will be used to test the number of jobs under a specified subsystem Possible values include EQ You want to know if the number of jobs under the specified subsystem name is equal to the number that is specified in the Job Limit parameter GE You want to know if the number of jobs under the specified subsystem name is equal to or greater than the number that is specified in the Job Limit parameter GT You want to know if the number of jobs under the specified subsystem name is greater than the number that is specified in the Job Limit parameter LE You want to know if the number of jobs under the specified subsystem name is equal to or less than the number that is specified in the Job Limit parameter LT You want to know if the number of jobs under the specified subsystem name less than the number that is specified in the Job Limit parameter User Defined USRDFN The user defined monitor allows you to monitor operations that you define A user defined monitor is very flexible It s main function is to initiate an Action at a specific time or interval The Action initiated can be defined to issue a command that will call a user cr
193. ied to solve the problem OOOCOODO There is a worksheet on the following page that allows you to fill in these values for quick reference Product Warranty and Maintenance Pinnacle warrants that ICOM 400 software will be free of defects for 90 days after software installation Product technical phone support and replacement materials will be provided during this time at no charge Annual maintenance agreements may be purchased by licensed users as shown on the AS Manager license agreement and current price schedule for ongoing ICOM 400 support after the initial 90 day free warranty period Payment of this fee entitles you to continuing technical support product enhancements problem corrections and new releases of ICOM 400 ICOM 400 User Manual 171 Even though Pinnacle has thoroughly tested the ICOM 400 software and documentation and reviewed their contents Pinnacle and its distributors make no warranties either express or implied with respect to ICOM 400 software and documentation their merchantability or their fitness for any particular purpose The ICOM 400 software and documentation are distributed solely on an as is basis The entire risk as to their quality and performance is with the customer Pinnacle and its distributors will not be liable for direct indirect incidental or consequential damages resulting from any defect in the ICOM 400 software or manual 172 Appendix B IC0M 400 Voice PC Requirements oh e
194. ient group Specify the name of the recipient group to which the messages were sent Q From date and To date You can specify a date range of history to display You can specify either specific dates or a certain number of days BEGIN specifies the earliest activity date in the history file and END specifies the latest date in the history file Q Entry status You may specify the status of the entries that you would like to display Examples of statuses include SENT PEND ERROR HELD SCHED and READY a Escalation status Specifies the escalation status of the messages that you want to include in the display or report These include ESCING ACKD ESCD EXPD or NONE Q Delivery type Specify the delivery type for the activity that you want to display or report These include messages sent by e mail EMAIL message queue MSGQ pager 48 PAGER phone PHONE fax FAX spooled file SPLF or network message NETMSG When you have defined your specifications press Enter to go to the Work with History display Work with History 3 15 03 17 21 41 tion to Date options press Enter Hold 4 Remove 5 Display 6 Release Resend messag Display escalation 9 Acknowledge Entry E Delivery Escalation Entry Date i Type Recipient Status Status Message 3 10 03 EMAIL ELLSOUTH None Sent testing 2 way 3 11 03 EMAIL EVEN None Sent testing 3 11 03 EMAIL ne Sent hello 3 11 03 EMAIL e Sent test did you 3 15 03
195. ient groups history POP email monitors pre defined messages page queue recipients schedules KACT KATV KCMP ES W W W W W W FP TO AR A PIT ES SS AS IO Ob x PN EA WENN YE AE EN I NALIA NNN AW CT 126 The Work with Function Authorities display shows a list of the function authorities available in ICOM 400 For each function you choose you are taken to the Edit Function Authority display where you can assign the function authority to the user or group of users you specify Enter a 2 beside the function authority you want to change There are two basic different displays for editing function authorities The first display allows you to specify a user and whether they have the authority to use the function The second allows you not only to specify whether the user has the authority to use the function but also how much authority the user has within the function such as whether they can add update remove and so on information related to that function The first type of function authority is displayed below Edit Function Authority Function name CHGSYSDFT Text 2 Change system attributes Type changes to current authorities press Enter Function User Authority PUBLIC USE This Edit Function Authority display allows the security office to determine whether users have the authority to perform certain activities on ICOM 400 and to add
196. ient you want the Action to affect the reply that you want the Action to issue a command to execute or a delivery type Actions are set up on the Work with Actions display To select from an existing list of Actions place your cursor on the Action field and press F4 to bring up the list Place a 1 beside the Action you want to select and press Enter If you want to work with Actions press F9 from this pop up display There are also some fields that are associated with all the Display Monitor displays These include Next wake up date The date of the monitor s next wake up Next wake up time The time of the monitor s next wake up Last wake up date The date of the monitor s previous wake up Last wake up time The time of the monitor s previous wake up Current number of occurrences The current number of times that ICOM 400 has consecutively monitored the condition specified for the monitor Below is a listing of all current ICOM 400 monitors OOOOUO 92 Configuration Status CFGSTS The configuration status monitor allows you to monitor a specific line controller or device on your AS 400 A line is a physical path in data transmission For example you would want to monitor a line if you want to know if the line you are using goes down while transmitting data If the status of the line matches the status of the monitor the monitor will initiate the Action you have specified in the Action field You may have set up t
197. ies you want to remove These statuses include ESCING ACKD ESCD EXPD NONE Press Enter to remove the history that you have specified You are returned to the History Information menu Option 2 Display Log To display the ICOM 400 history log enter a 2 on the command line of the History Information menu Press Enter to go to the Display Log for ICOM 400 DSPLOGICM command display Display Log for ICOM 400 DSPLOGICM Type choices press Enter Type Start time and date Beginning time Beginning date End time and date Ending time Ending date Severity Output Time period for log output MSG MNT RI EGIN nnnnn END nnnnn The Display Log for ICOM 400 DSPLOGICM command allows you to display the ICOM 400 history log The ICOM 400 history log is a display by date and time of messages that ICOM 400 has created as a result of processing The DSPLOGICM command allows you to display or print all or part of the log Some important fields on the DSGPLOGICM command display include the following Q Type The type of entry for which you want to review log entries ALL selects all log entries for display MSG selects only message log entries for display MNT selects only maintenance log entries for display REPLY selects only reply log entries for display ICOM 400 User Manual 81 Q Time period for log output The period of time for which
198. ility to escalate messages for the recipient USE allows read access of messages sent to a recipient EXCLUDE excludes the recipient from all associated functions related to the messages USER DEF is displayed by the system when the specific recipient authorities do not map to any of the pre defined recipient authorities QO Send message Specify an X in the Send Message field to specify the authority to send a message to the recipient If this authority is not granted the Send Message field should be blank Q List messages Specify an X in the List Messages field to specify the authority to list messages sent to the recipient If this is authority is not granted the List Messages field should be blank QO Display message Specify an X in the Display Message field to specify the authority to display messages sent to the recipient If this authority is not granted the Display Message field should be blank Escalate Specify an X in the Escalate field to specify the authority to use an escalation table when sending a message to the recipient Option 2 Work with Recipient Groups From the ICOM 400 Recipient menu entering Option 2 on the command line takes you to the Work with Recipient Groups display ICOM 400 User Manual 65 Work with Recipient Groups POSTETON COs s p xs Starting characters Type options press Enter 1 Creat 2 Chang 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display 7 Send messag 9 Edit authority
199. ime Date Time No pages currently in queue The Work with Page Queues display shows all queues that have one or more pages pending for a particular paging company Each paging company is implicitly defined as a page queue and the Force Depth and Force Time values are specified within the corresponding paging company You can work with a page queue hold or release a page queue or send messages in a page queue immediately The queue depth the current number of pages in the queue the force depth the maximum number of pages this queue can hold the queue time the maximum number of seconds remaining before these pages will be sent and the force time the maximum amount of time that can elapse before a transmission as well as the next scheduled time and date of the queue s pages is displayed Some important fields on this display include the following Q Company status The status of the company page queue Held specifies that the company pager company queue is in hold status Pending pages for this company will not be sent until the company is released Sending specifies that pages in the queue are currently in the process of being transmitted to the pager company Released The page queue has been released from a held condition and is now available to transmit pages to the pager company Queue depth The number of pager messages that are currently in the company queue Messages are transmitted from the company page queue automatically
200. is display see Adding a Pre defined Message Sending a Pre defined Message To send a pre defined message enter a 7 beside the message you want to send on the Work with Pre defined Messages display Press Enter to go to the Send Message using ICOM 400 SNDMSGICM command display Note that your pre defined message text is entered into the Text field For more information on sending a message refer to Chapter 3 Option 9 Work with IP Entries Enter Option 9 on the command line takes you to the Work with IP entries display Work with IP Entries POSTELVOM COH an e e a Starting characters Type options press Enter 1 Add 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Remove 5 Display 7 Test connection Opt Entry Text BRIAN Brian s PC HEATH NONE JULIAF NONE ANCE Lance s PC ICOM 400 User Manual 77 An IP entry is the IP address of the PC through which the voice message will be sent ICOM 400 will send a text message to the IP address specified In turn the PC will take the message recognize the text and using a PHONE delivery type call the phone number specified and play the message over the phone The recipient then has the option of responding to the message by pressing a button on their phone From the Work with IP entries display you can add Option 1 change Option 2 copy Option 3 remove Option 4 and display Option 5 IP entries as well as test your connection to the IP address of the IP entry
201. is displayed or printed The DSPMSGICM command allows you to display or print all or part of the queue The parameters for this display include the following Message queue MSGQ Specifies the message queue you want to display and the library which contains the message queue message queue Specify the name of the message queue you want to display LIBL The library is a member of your library list CURLIB You want to use the current library library name Specify the name of the library of your message queue Time period for log output PERIOD Specifies the period of time for which the messages are selected for the display or report This parameter contains two lists of two elements each Element 1 Beginning time One of the following is used to specify the beginning creation time at which or after messages are included Any messages created before the specified time and date are not included in the display or report AVAIL Any time that is available for the beginning date is included begin time Specify the beginning time for the specified beginning date that indicates messages are to be included The time is specified in 24 hour format and can be specified with or without a time separator Without a time separator specify a string of 4 digits hhmm where hh hours and mm minutes Hours and minutes must each be exactly 2 digits using leading zeros if necessary e With atime separator specify a string of 5 digits whe
202. it The upper limit of the size of the object The size is specified in megabytes Output Queue OUTQ The output queue monitor allows you to monitor the number of spooled files in a particular output queue If the number of spooled files reaches the Spooled file limit the Action specified for the monitor is initiated Adding changing or displaying an output queue monitor To add change or display an output queue monitor enter a 1 on the first line under the Opt column on the Work with Monitors display You will also need to enter a name for your new monitor under the Monitor column and OUTQ under Type To change an existing monitor enter a 2 beside the monitor you want to change or enter a 2 in the first line under the Opt column along with the name and monitor type To display an existing monitor enter a 5 beside the monitor you want to display or enter a 5 in the first line under the Opt column along with the name and monitor type When you press Enter you are taken to the Add Output Queue Monitor display the Change Output Queue Monitor display or the Display Output Queue Monitor according to which option you have chosen The displays are identical ICOM 400 User Manual 103 Change Output Queue Monitor MONLCOE ssi eee GP Se Oe Se Gane ae 8 SAMPLE Type changes press Enter Output ques os Al aue a a a ee AS OPRINT Name DIDDLEY see cn g a ae le AE te eh te es LIBL Name LIBL Spooled file limit
203. ith the message sender subject and message text are shown Option 5 displays the message detail 17215 Type 4 Opt Work with Email 3 16 03 23 options press Enter Remove 5 Display Receiv Receiv Date Time Sender Subject Message 3 10 03 8 31 04 QGATE mbabky pinnsys UNDELIVERABLE M NOTABLE TO BELIVE 3 10 03 8 31 05 SkyUser lt skyuser m Email Acknowled Thank you f 3 10 03 8 31 07 SkyUser lt skyuser m Email Acknowled Thank you f ICOM 400 User Manual 135 3 10 03 8 31 09 SkyUser lt skyuser m Email Acknowled Thank you f 3 10 03 10 56 58 brianyounger bellsou re lt lt 000000480 lt lt COOL gt 3 11 03 15 36 32 Brian Younger lt brian Re test you know it A From this display you can remove a e mail message Option 4 or display a message Option 5 Some important fields on this display include the following Receive date The date that this message was received by the e mail address Receive time The time that this message was received by the e mail address Sender The name or e mail address of the sender of the message Subject The subject of the e mail message Message The message text of the e mail message DODO Entering a 5 beside a message allows you to display more in depth information about the message Display Information Date received 3 10 03 Time tecei ed w un mearder es a GY EO COS 104 Handle ID Page ID
204. ition and length The following is the command as it would be issued from a command line gt SNDSPLFICM SPLF QPINVOICE JOB SPLNBR LAST MSG Attached is your invoice EMAIL SPLF ATTACH Invoice SNDINF 3 10 30 m O OOO In case the line number may not be the same on each page specify search text that can be used to locate the address In the SNDINF parameter specify TEXT as the line number AFTER as the starting position the length and the text to search for such as To gt SNDSPLFICM SPLF QPINVOICE JOB SPLNBR LAST MSG Attached is your invoice EMAIL SPLF ATTACH Invoice SNDINF TEXT AFTER 30 To 3 PGM Specify the program to be called that will return the e mail address es The SNDINF parameter will be used to locate the key information that the program will need to find the e mail address The program must receive two parameters the first being character with a length of 10 and the second being character with a length of 60 The first parameter is not currently used but will eventually be the delivery type for the spooled file The second parameter contains the key information found in the spooled file but will also return the e mail address The second parameter should return blanks if no e mail is needed Please refer to the following example gt SNDSPLFICM SPLF QPINVOICE JOB SPLNBR LAST MSG Attached is your invoice EMAIL PGM ATTACH Invoice PGM ICOMTOOLS EMAILEXIT SNDIN
205. izard The Wizard informs you that the setup is finished Press the Finish button to leave the Wizard The setup is finished Continue with ICOM 400 Voice Installation ICOM 400 User Manual 193 PhoneRider Installation under Windows 2000 Load the latest drivers for the PhoneRider board using the CD provided by Pinnacle Business Systems Select Run from the Start menu and run X ICOM400 ICOMVoice Win2000 FWN5E0501003 exe where X is the CD ROM drive or browse the CD ROM drive to find the program in the mentioned folder MediaPhonics Intelligent Firmware Updater 3 x This will create a folder with the latest drivers A There is currently no firmware installed on your computer Follow the prompts until asked if you want to Do you want to install the version FWNSE 05 01 003 now install the version even though there is no firmware installed Click No and continue with instructions below Shut down and turn off the computer Install the PhoneRider board Turn the PC on When Windows 2000 starts the plug and play driver finds the new hardware Found New Hardware The first panel informs you that the plug and play has Sa Telephony Accelerator Found New Hardware Sag Please wait Just wait for the next panel The Found New Hardware Wizard appears informing you it will search for new drivers for MediaPhonics PhoneRider Card v1 2 Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware
206. lay Available On Call Opt Seq Delivery Schedule Schedule Delivery information The Add Recipient display is used to add a recipient identifier and related information about that recipient Recipients are people or locations to whom you have assigned delivery types and numbers so that they can receive messages To add a recipient follow the steps below 1 If you want the recipient to be associated with an escalation table enter the name of the table in the Escalation table field NONE specifies that there is no escalation table associated with the recipient Press F4 to select from a list of existing escalation tables From the Select Table display you may work with escalation tables by pressing F9 NOTE In order for your new recipient to be included on the escalation table you must add him her to the table See Escalation Tables for instructions on adding a recipient to an escalation table If necessary enter a description of the recipient in the Text field You need to add delivery type s for your recipient Enter a 1 on the first line of the Opt column a sequence number for the delivery type from 1 to 99 and the delivery type you want to add If you do not specify a delivery type ICOM 400 automatically defaults to PAGER WN ICOM 400 User Manual 57 Add Recipient Delivery Entry The Add Recipient Delivery Entry is used to add a delivery entry for a recipient There are several different delivery types These include
207. lays the Work with Recipients display PRINT Prints the Work with Recipients report Work with Schedules using ICOM 400 WRKSCDICM This command allows you to work with all Schedules defined in ICOM 400 This command takes you directly to the Work with Schedules display There are no parameters to enter or display This display is reached by typing WRKSCDICM on the command line and pressing F4 Work with Spooled Files WRKSPLFICM Work with Spooled Files WRKSPLFICM Type choices press Enter Spooled File Name iL ALL JOD s wi athe ALE TE we ie Ue ae iL ALL USEE A i cag tad elo ala ee Tel ele eho ho A CURRENT ALL OU PUT OUCUES ie a ue Teras Get eee Gok 1 ALL Library LIBL Time period for list Start time and date Beginning time re oe Beginning date 1 T EGIN nnnnn End time and date Ending time Ending date 1 cece m ws ee ENT END nnnnn The Work with Spooled Files ICM WRKSPLFICM command displays a list of spooled files available for distribution You may select a time range for the list of spooled files Spooled file name LIBFLE Specifies the name of the spooled file that you want to list ALL You want to list all spooled files spooled file name Specify the name of the spooled file that you want to list Job JOB Specifies the name of the job that produced the spooled file ALL You want to use
208. leading monitoring and messaging system to deliver your notifications via several methods e mail pagers telephones faxes spooled files workstations and network messages Some of the ICOM 400 delivery features include Can be used as standalone paging system Supports alphanumeric and numeric pagers Supports multiple paging companies simultaneously Supports digital and analog phones Multi user multi line interface for dispatching Customized delivery delays Divide long messages into shorter ones for paging Escalation of pages until acknowledgement is received Select recipient based on On call list 10 Restrict pages to a certain timeframe for each user 11 Nicknames for recipients 12 Create short names for pre defined messages or saved messages 13 Retry sending the message if pager company is busy 14 Restricts which pagers a user can send pages to 15 Able to select multiple people to page based on different criteria 16 Able to send first or second level message text 17 Can bundle pages and send several at once 18 Will send all pages for one company in one call 19 A timer on batch so pages don t wait too long 20 Supports secondary outbound line if first is busy 21 Supports multiple outbound phone lines simultaneously 22 Send a message from an interactive Command Line or Menu 23 Send a message from a Batch program 24 Send a message based on a message in a message queue 25 Send a message to a Group Dist
209. led file This allows a spooled file to be split and sent to different email addresses An exit program can also be used to retrieve an email address based on information found in the spooled file For instance an account number may be on each page of the spooled file and passed to the exit program which in turn will pass back the email address for that account This field is not used in conjunction with the Action list The SNDSPLFICM command is used if this field is specified Address Information is used in spooled file monitor entries Add Address Information Type choices press Enter Address information name Name Address location in spooled file Line number 1 256 TEXT Starting position 1 256 AFTER GEnNGehy a ar ai Ne We em ok A a 1 60 Search text Program to retriev ee te NONE Name NONE BORA Y nes 2 e eo ke Ber Be tren ae e Ate Name LIBI Attachment name ATTACH Name Attachment type PDF TXT PDF FEX AA A seth ah ver ee ee Se cdc ete ade Se etd NONE ICOM 400 User Manual 119 120 Chapter 9 System Controls his chapter is important to the proper functioning of ICOM 400 The Change System Attributes display allows you to define and change the system defaults for ICOM 400 Changing a default on this display can affect the entire system Work with Function Authorities allows you to define and change security for ICOM 400 Function authori
210. les using ICOM 400 WRKESCICM Work with Escalation Tables WRKESCICM Type choices press Enter Output The Work with Escalation Tables WRKESCICM command allows you to work with all or escalation lists that you have set up by taking you to the Work with Escalation Tables display From there you can add remove change copy or display escalation information Output can be a display or printed report You may reach this screen by typing WRKESCICM on the command line and pressing F4 Output OUTPUT Use the following values to specify whether escalation tables are to be shown on the Work with Escalation Tables display or printed Displays the Work with Escalation Tables display PRINT Prints the Work with Escalation Tables report Work with Recipient Groups using ICOM 400 WRKGRPICM ICOM 400 User Manual 157 Work with Recipient Groups WRKGRPICM Type choices press Enter Output The Work with Recipient Groups WRKGRPICM command allows you to work with all or selected recipient groups by taking you to the Work with Recipient Groups display From there you can add remove change copy or display recipient group information Output can be a display or printed report You may reach this screen by typing WRKGRPICM on the command line and pressing F4 Output OUTPUT Use the following values to specify whether recipient groups are to be shown on the Work with Recipient Groups display or printe
211. leted then you would need to repeat the process all over again 214 For further instructions on how to set up the 7852 and other modems See ICOM 400 manual Chapter 2 Modem Configurations Is there any way to page my numeric pager directly instead of using TAP A Yes we have a recipient delivery type of PHONE that can be used to dial a phone number to send tones It can also be used to dial your numeric pager directly from your modem and send a numbered message with no tones We do recommend however that you use alphanumeric pagers to get text messages instead of numbers to be able to get the full effect of ICOM 400 For further information on message delivery types See Chapter 6 of ICOM 400 manual Recipients How do I stop duplicate messages from paging me A If you are using a message queue or QHST monitor ICOM 400 is designed to check for new messages in the message queue or QHST log at the intervals you specify After it has check for new messages and taken appropriate actions through ICOM 400 the message will not be used again So basically you will get only one action taken per new message If there are duplicate messages then it could be one of two things e Reply messages If you get notified for an inquiry message and then someone replies to the message you might get 2 notifications for one message because the same message has 2 different message types One is an INQ and the other is an REPLY What you will nee
212. lick Next ICOM 400 User Manual 191 MediaPhonics PhoneRider Board Wizard EII The Microphone setup panel appears It allows you to M finely adjust the microphone gain Depending on the microphone you have you may need to adjust the gain Click Next Speak as you usually do on the phone Gain VU meter Tr Auto calibration 14 0 dB and use the slider to adjust the gain so that the red area of the YU meter will not be lit too often You can also use the Auto calibration button to have the gain adjusted automatically MediaPhonics PhoneRider Board Wizard Ss Handset diagnostic This test allows you to verify whether your PhoneRider can open the line using your telephone set The Handset diagnostic panel opens Press the Test the Handset button To start the test click the button below then pick up your handset lt Back Hert Cancel The Diagnostic Status panel appears inviting you to pick up Waiting Please pick up your handset the handset aS Press Stop to interrupt the diagnostic Immediately click Stop The Wizard asks if you have heard the dial tone or if you want to abort diagnostics Click Yes You will R The diagnostic was aborted return to the Handset Diagnostic panel ai Answer YES if you don t want to run the diagnostic Answer NO if you picked up the handset and nothing happened Then click Next No 192 MediaPhonics PhoneRider Board W
213. liver messages via e mail pager message queue or to ring a telephone The first step will be to set specific system attributes that can be used by recipients Then we will define individual recipient information Would you like to send e mail messages y n Would you like to send fax messages y n This display is the same as the first but asks if you would like to send fax messages If you would enter a Y in the space provided otherwise enter an N If you choose to send fax messages you will be taken to the Line Resource display If not you will skip this step Press Enter Quick Start Wizard display 4 ICOM 400 User Manual 27 ICOM 400 automatically creates an asynchronous line description named ICOM4005 This line description is used only by ICOM 400 and needs no configuration Should it be deleted it will automatically be re created when the next fax is sent by ICOM 400 Line description resource name CMNO1 Name F4 for list The fourth display asks you to specify a Line Description Resource Name for the asynchronous line description provided by ICOM 400 upon installation If you cannot provide a name place your cursor on the field and press F4 for a list of pre defined names Once you have selected a name press Enter Quick Start Wizard display 5 ICOM 400 automatically creates an asynchronous line description named ICOM4005 This line description is used only by ICOM 400 and needs no configurati
214. livery types set up If they do not you will receive anerror In the Selected recipients you enter ONCALL because you want only those recipients who are on call at the time the message is sent to receive it Once you have made any other specifications that you deem necessary you press Enter to send the message ICOM 400 User Manual 47 Chapter 4 Work with History istory Information is an important aspect of ICOM 400 functioning It is imperative to be able to determine what messages ICOM 400 has sent what messages have been acknowledged or what messages still need to be acknowledged If you sent a message and your user has not received it you are able to go into the history information and determine the cause of the delay To reach the Work with History display choose Option 2 Work with History from the ICOM 400 Main Menu You are taken to the Work with History command display where you can restrict what history information you display Work with ICOM 400 History WRKHSTICM Type choices press Enter COMPANY car 295 dh oe ee SA ey ed we iL Name generic ALL RECIPTENT ei fa ea ok ae ee a ed iL Name generic ALL NONE Recipient Group iL Name generic ALL BrOm Gate 2 se Ae ae Re Se oe ME BE Date CURRENT BEGIN nnnnn To dater av as Sc tal te ten Ate ee Se E Date CURRENT END nnnnn BAtry Statuss ao Alte ob Pe we Gee iL ALL SENT PEND ERROR
215. ll then all recipients will be affected if the Notify recipients not oncall field in the system attributes is YES 2 If the Send type field contains the GRP special value and the Recipient Group field contains ALL only the on call recipients in each group will be affected by the Action If there are no recipients on call in a group then all recipients within the group will be affected if the Notify recipients not oncall field in the system attributes is YES 3 If the Send type field contains the GRP special value and the Recipient Group field contains a group name and there is no on call recipient then all recipients in the group will be affected by the Action If there is a recipient on call in the group then only that recipient will be affected if the Notify recipients not oncall field in the system attributes is YES Message detail The level of message detail that you want to send for the specified Action JOBINF indicates that you want to send job information NONE indicates that you do not want to send message detail SECLVL indicates that you want to send second level text PREDEF indicates that you want to send a pre defined message for this Action The pre defined message ID must be specified in the Pre defined message field QO Pre defined message If PREDEF was specified in the Message detail field then a pre defined message ID must be specified here Otherwise specify NONE for this field Press F4 to bring u
216. mailbox If you are not using BellSouth s paging service this field will be left blank Mailbox password The password for the mailbox user ID Pager company password The password required for the pager company if any The password can be up to 10 characters in length Maximum message length The maximum message length for this pager company The message length specified can be from 1 to 999 characters The default value is 240 characters Maximum paging queue depth The maximum number of message that can enter the queue before the messages are transmitted for this company If the maximum number of messages is reached before the maximum queue time specified in the Maximum paging queue time field is reached ICOM 400 will transmit the pages regardless of the specified paging queue times The queue depth can be from 1 to 999 messages The default value is 1 message Maximum paging queue time The maximum time in seconds before messages that are in the queue for this company are transmitted If the maximum number of seconds is reached before the maximum number of pages specified in the Maximum paging queue depth field is reached ICOM 400 will transmit the pages regardless of the specified paging queue depth The maximum time specified can be from 0 send immediately to 3600 seconds The default value is 0 QO Maximum pages per connection The maximum number of page messages that can be included in a transmission to the pager company You
217. mber then the message level text specified for that sequence number is sent the specified recipient s or group of recipients You may add an unlimited number of message IDs to the monitor Adding a message queue monitor To add a message queue monitor enter a 1 on the first line under the Opt column on the Work with Monitors display You will also need to enter a name for your new monitor under the Monitor column and MSGQ under Type When you press Enter you are taken to the Add Message Queue Monitor display On this display you will need to enter the name of the message queue and library Add Message Queue Monitor MOM EO r oS es ve E beef e tea oe wae aes MSGQ Type choices press Message Queues M cc en EP es Geo ae Ey D Name TPDEATY co cd ee oe e es Name LIBL Inactivity interval Seconds 1 999 Text ICOM 400 User Manual 97 Changing a message queue monitor Once you have added a message queue monitor you must add the message queue entries Enter a 2 beside the monitor you want to change and press Enter You are taken to Change Message Queue Monitor display Change Message Queue Monitor MONLEOR Sse um Sin ar deca a ag A BYMSGQ Message QUEUE k So sido a oY ate ae BYMSGQ Name LEBParYy by Vie beck ado ee Gas tas a TR SE BYLIB Name LIBL Inactivity interval seee se a a a 15 Seconds 1 999 TSXG Lah sg Ne hic om Somes Oe ees NONE Position to Type options pres
218. mer support go ASM Select this option to perform tasks related to remote customer support ICOM 400 User Manual 43 For example you can 44 OOUOOC Order PTFs for any Pinnacle product Send a message to technical support Page a technical support representative Ask questions or search for answers on the Pinnacle Q amp A database Configure communications for support Chapter 3 Sending a Message Using ICOM 400 he Send Message using ICM SNDMSGICM command display is used to send a message to a single recipient a group of recipients multiple groups of recipients or just those recipients that are on call You can schedule the SNDMSGICM command through a job scheduler if you want the message to be sent at a particular time or as a result of a job running A typical use of the SNDMSGICM command within a job scheduler would be to send a message indicating the successful or unsuccessful completion of a job or series of jobs To reach the Send Message using ICM command display you may either type gt SNDMSGICM on a command line or from the ICOM 400 Main Menu select Option 1 Send a Message Name Message Send Message using ICOM 400 SNDMSGICM Type choices press Enter for more values File type to send Send type Schedule date Schedule time Place on page queue To send a message using ICOM 400 you must follow the steps
219. message activity is not present to cause retry of unsent messages Specifying this value guarantees that unsent message are retried at intervals not exceeding this number of minutes Autostart monitors Whether you want to automatically start monitors after you have reset ICOM 400 If you specify YES the monitors will automatically start after the subsystem ZICOM400 has started Send message in restricted state Whether to allow messages to be sent when the system is in a restricted state NOTE E mail message cannot be sent when the system is in a restricted state Notify recipients not oncall Specifies to notify recipients that are not oncall This is enabled when you send a message to recipients who are oncall and there are no recipients designated ONCALL Paging The following specifies the defaults used for paging with ICOM 400 Resource 1 and 2 Resources 1 and 2 are used to specify multiple lines that can be used for paging You do not have to have two resources to use ICOM 400 Q Primary shared resource name The primary communication resource that is to be used for transmitting messages for this resource The primary shared communication resource is always used unless it is busy The primary resource name is not edited You can have a primary shared resource for either of two resources Secondary shared resource name The secondary shared communication resource that is to be used when the primary communication shared reso
220. messages that are currently scheduled for transmission in the display or report READY You only want to include messages that are ready to be sent but have not yet been transmitted Normally messages that are ready to be sent but have not been sent are waiting for resources to complete the paging process Escalation status ESCSTS Specifies the escalation status of the messages that you want to include in the message activity display or report ALL You want to include all messages in the display or report regardless of escalation status ESCING You only want to include messages that are escalating Messages that are escalating are messages that have been sent but not acknowledged and whose escalation time specified in the Delay prompt in the escalation table has not been exceeded When the next recipient in an escalation list is sent the message i e the escalation time is exceeded and the message to this recipient is not acknowledged the status for the message changes from ESCING to ESCD ACKD You only want to include messages that have been acknowledged by a recipient in an escalation table in the report or display ESCD You want to include all messages that have been escalated Messages that are escalated are messages that were sent as part of an escalation list but were not acknowledged before the time specified in the Delay prompt expired EXPD You want to include all messages that have been expired Messages that are
221. n X in the column and remove the authority by typing a blank spacebar in the column To change the Recipient Authority column type the new authority over the current authority To add users to the list press the F6 key Add new users to get another display similar to this display where you can type the new users and the desired authority levels To remove users from the list type blanks into all of the authorities columns including the Recipient Authority column that are shown The system applies the authority changes ONLY after you have pressed the Enter key When you press the Enter key on a display after keying updates you are shown the list again with the updates applied If you press the Enter key again without typing on the display the system returns you to where you were when you requested the edit function Some important fields for the Edit Recipient Authority display include Q Recipient The name of the recipient whose authority for associated functions you want to edit Q User The user profile name of users who have specific authorities specified for the associated functions for this recipient PUBLIC defines the authorities of all users who are not specifically named To add new users press F6 Q Recipient authority The authority that a user has to functions associated with a recipient ALL allows all associated functions for a recipient CHANGE allows read access of the messages sent to a recipient and the ab
222. n list The SNDSPLFICM command is used if this field is specified QO Remove spooled file Whether the original spooled file for the spooled file entry should be removed after any action is completed Once you have entered the spooled file entry you can work with the Actions that will be initiated by the spooled file monitor Type 2 beside an entry and press Enter You are taken to the Work with Spooled File Actions display Work with Spooled File Actions Momator 3 cdir dee as id Va ve ad a oer BE BYOUTQ Spooled file 2 ALL Program manes s sre eme ey SR GA RS ALL User datas a 8 0 e 4 we Bowe 8 ALL Address information SNDSPLF NONE Name NONE F4 for list Remove spooled file NO NO YES Text Sin cs ee SE OR Se ey ke Ree Se Se NONE Position to Type options press Enter 1 Add 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Remove 5 Display Opt Action Schedule SPLFACTION ALLDAYS From this display you can add change copy display or remove spooled file actions To add a spooled file action type a 1 in the first line of the Opt column and press Enter You are taken to the Add Spooled File Action display 108 Add Spooled File Action Monitor 4 3 satas amp oe boars S BYOUTQ spooled Bale of ay Go weedy ee oe oR A ALL Program name siges eg A eh ke we wee Be E ALL USEP datas s lt 3 Gh Reo sede GE Ry ete e ALL Type choices press Enter ACELON
223. nces T Number 1 99 TEX s Ge Shae BORIC E YS e a eo es Monitor remote PC Some important fields for this display include the following TCP IP address The TCP IP address of the remote device you want to monitor Port number The number of the port on the device on which your application is running ICOM 400 will check the port to make sure your application is running PING indicates that you want to make sure that the entire device is communicating on the network Spooled File SPLF The spooled file monitor allows you to monitor for specific spooled file information within an output queue It should not confused with the output queue monitor which monitors for the number of spooled files in the queue The spooled file monitor monitors for the existence of specific spooled files in the queue Adding a spooled file monitor To add a spooled file monitor enter a 1 on the first line under the Opt column on the Work with Monitors display You will also need to enter a name for your new monitor under the Monitor column and SPLF under Type 106 When you press Enter you are taken to the Add Spooled File Monitor display On this display you must enter the output queue and library that you want to monitor Add Spooled File Monitor MOnDtOr E lt 3 a Siow Oe ae eS lt 8 GL See i SPLF Type choices press Enter OUEDUL QUEUE ssi e a oe As foodie 8 Name Tilia YS so Ree Ge Gee A RG es we ae
224. nd line of the History Information menu Display Physical Fi le Member BILES oS te 8 Be a Be ICMASDL5 Library TCOM400 Member I ICMASDL5 Record Con Find sete Thins eee vers ares Hales Listy che Pipes eS geal ete terete trol r a nTa Column Tapa EcA 0000 Converting Cover Page to T4IMAGE EcA 0000 Converted cover page EcA 0000 File converted EcA 0000 1 pages converted without error EcA 0000 Opening device PMPGMDV5 EcA 0000 lt ATZ EcA 0000 gt 0K EcA 0000 lt AT FCLASS EcA 0000 gt 0 1 2 EcA 0000 Class 2 Fax Modem detected OK EcA 0000 gt 0K EcA 0000 lt AT amp K3 EcA 0000 gt 0K EcA 0000 lt AT FCLASS 2 EcA 0000 gt 0K Pie This menu option executes the Display Physical File Member DSPPFM command to display all the ICOM 400 instructions associated with the last fax message sent using ICOM 400 This file is used to identify problems if any with a particular message The Display Physical File Member display presents information in a selected file member and allows you to look at the data Option 13 Print Fax Communications Entries To print the fax communication entries enter 13 on the command line of the History Information men u The entries are printed to a spooled file Option 20 Display QHST To display the QHST message log enter 20 on the command line of the History Information menu You are taken to the Display QHST using ICOM 400 DS
225. nd monitor type To display an existing monitor enter a 5 beside the monitor you want to display or enter a 5 in the first line under the Opt column along with the name and monitor type ICOM 400 User Manual 95 When you press Enter you are taken to the Add Job Monitor display the Change Job Monitor display or the Display Job monitor according to which option you have chosen The displays are identical Add Job Monitor MOnLEOL gt S Sie e ae eH al ek Ge ee Sa a TEST Type choices press Jop Name smig 4 Se Be Zoned 44 Name ALL USEE s ak we ds Shs el A ae SR et A Se Name ANY Subsystem s s s e ww ee we e Name ANY Check if ran l s oe as cee e ch Ar ee oe YES NO Maximum run time Minutes 1 999 NOMAX Check if Not active a 2 4 w 8 3 NO YES JOD status sri es si foe ce Ow Pe 8 MSGW LCKW F4 Sehedule y Gal s ey we ew Bee ae Name ALLDAYS F4 Inactivity interval Minutes 1 999 ACETO 2 8 eS 4s Hh aI eni Sere a et Name F4 for list Text Some important fields for the job monitor display includes the following Job name The name of the job you want to monitor User The name of the user that is associated with the job ANY indicates that any user can be associated with this job Subsystem The name of the subsystem where the job resides ANY indicates that the job can be associated with any subsystem Check if ran The monitor will che
226. nding time before which entries are included Any items created after the specified time and date are not included in the entries for the display AVAIL Any time that is available for the ending date is included end time Specify the ending time for the specified ending date that indicates which entries are to be included Ending date One of the following is used to specify the ending date on which or before which the entries must have been made Any spooled file entries made after the specified date are not included in the display CURRENT Entries whose date is on or before the current date are included in the display END The entries to the end of the log information are included in the display end date Specify the ending date The date must be specified in the job date format number of days Specify a number to represent the number of days before the current date that you want to use for the search An example would be 10 If today s date were 3 22 03 date format is mm dd yy the End date for the ICOM 400 log would be 3 12 03 ICOM 400 User Manual 167 Chapter 11 Automated Customer Support Automated Customer Support ACS is designed to permit remote user access to the Pinnacle customer support AS 400 This product is offered at no charge to customers who are under a software maintenance license agreement It provides menu screens to assist you in defining ACS connectivity to the Pinnacle customer support machine and in o
227. nds 1 999 NONE Position to Type options press Enter 1 Add Opt Seq Msg ID MsgType Sev Job name 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Remove 5 Display 7 Change compare data T Schedule Action Skip Fre I E 1 ALL AI iL AL 2 ALL RE iL AL iDAYS BYTEST NEXT NO INC iDAYS NONE END NO EXC An example of a monitor is a message queue monitor Message queue entries are the parameters for a monitor which include such things as the job characteristics and Actions that will be applied to messages at the message queue Messages are sent to the message queue via jobs you run or a scheduled job run by a job scheduler If the message meets the specifications of the message queue monitor entry the Action is performed You can set up an unlimited number of entries with varying specifications You will need to specify The name of the monitor The name of the message queue for the monitor The name of the library of the message queue The amount of time that you would like for ICOM 400 to pause between scanning the message queue for new messages The text which describes the monitor and The sequence number of the message queue entry You will also need to specify Filtering information such as the severity limit Job name user ID program name message type and message ID The schedule assigned to the entry The Action assigned to the entry Whether ICOM 400 should
228. ng Option 12 you are taken to the Display Message Queue DSPMSGICM command display You may select which message queue you want to display as well as specific message ID within that message queue For more information on the Display Message Queue command see Chapter 10 Once you have selected the message queue that you want to display you are taken to the Display Message Queue display which shows all the messages in the message queue you have selected 116 Position to message Type options press 5 Display Message D Count PCA08C PC8A21 PC8A22 PD2692 PFAFAF PFA11A PF0934 PF0993 PF1103 PF1187 PF1804 Opt m e A N ONIOPRPENREHEE AAAAAAAAAAAH Display Message Queue ID Enter Message 2 14 00 93935 KAKKKKKKKKKKKAKX File system mounted Activity related to documents and folders is now allowed All documents and folders are now available Device x x xx k vary on failed Reset required KKKKKKKKKK completed successfully IP over SNA not activated IPL completed Start of controlling Subsystem KAKKKKKKKKK Subsystem KAKKKKKKKKK Subsystem KAKKKKKKKKK subsystem in progress during IPL started cannot allocate work station x in library starting You may display a message by entering a 5 beside the message ID you want to display and pressing enter The Display Detail screen displays the details of the message 2 14 00 9 255319 2 14 00 STRMSF compl
229. ng a User Code for more information on the Change User Code display fields Copying a User Code To copy a user code enter a 3 beside the user code you want to copy on the Work with User Codes display You are taken to the Copy User Code display Enter a number for your new user code in the New Name field and press Enter Your new user code is added to the list of existing user codes Removing a User Code To remove a user code enter a 4 beside the user code s you want to remove You are taken to the Confirm Remove of User Codes display Pressing Enter removes the user code s To change your selections press F12 to return to the Work with User Codes display 180 Displaying a User Code To display a user code enter a 5 beside the user code you want to display on the Work with User Codes display You are taken to the Display User Code display Refer to Adding a User Code for more information on the Display User Code display fields Option 2 Work with Voice Menus Entering 2 on the command line takes you to the Work with Voice Menus display Work with Voice Menus Positron GO a Ce ae eee A Starting characters Type options press Enter 1 Add 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Remove 5 Display Opt Menu Text BRUCI Bruce menu LANCI Lance menu IN Main menu ESSAGE Message menu EOPTION One option RTDEMO PART DEMO SAMPLE Sample Messages Commands User information SAMPLE2 Sample menu System information SECONDARY Secondary menu m
230. ni 300 600 1200 2400 9600 Bata en ak eo ie ae a os oye ae ea GS EVE EVEN ODD NONE Data bits Stop bits So Re ee Sa oe ES Duplex srs Seo ew ee wh Oe e o iL FULL HALF Text To add technical information about a pager company from which you rent or purchase pager equipment go to the Work with Pager Companies Display You will need to specify The name of the pager company The name of the contact from the pager company optional The address for this pager company also optional The phone number of the computer that ICOM 400 will dial to establish communications with the pager company You can enter characters required to dial the computer phone number such as a 9 for an outside line If a pause is required you can use the character Each comma will cause a one second delay Note You should not use dialing characters here if you are using two resources have two lines The dialing characters should be entered for each line in the Telephone prefix field in the Change System Attributes display e The password required by the pager company if any The password can be up to 10 characters in length e The maximum message length for the pager company The message length specified can be from 1 to 999 characters e The maximum number of messages that can enter the queue before the messages are transmitted for this company If the maximum number of messages is reached before t
231. nswer Yes The ICOM 400 AS 400 product was designed to wait up to 30 minutes for the PC to become available in case other calls were being issued from one or more AS 400s Is there a way I can secure the message from playing for just anyone Answer Yes When defining the PHONE delivery type you can enter a security code that will be required by the recipient before the message is played What are the different ways I can define the introduction message Answer For starters if a something other than NONE is entered in the text field of the recipient it is assumed that it is the name of the recipient Therefore the introduction would start out by saying Message for Lance Scott if Lance Scott was entered in the text field The default for the Introduction field in the PHONE delivery type is from amp SYSID Since multiple AS 400s may be used it may be necessary for the recipient to know which system initiated the call If the default was used and a name entered in the text field the introduction would say Message for Lance Scott from system S Y S 00 1 All replacement variables like amp SYSID amp JOB USER amp MSGID etc will be spelled out If they were not spelled out the text to speech engine would try to pronounce the Job name and it would not be understandable You can also define your own introduction After the introduction is played the user is asked to enter a security code if required or 1 to continue
232. nt either alpha or digital e Specify any pre or post message information For e mail you will need to e Specify the e mail address of the recipient and e Specify any pre or post message information For telephones you will need to e Specify the phone number that is to be dialed e Specify any pre or post message information For message queues you will need to e Specify the message queue and library to which the recipient s messages are sent e Specify any pre or post message information For faxes you will need to e Specify the fax phone number that is to be dialed e Specify any pre or post message information For spooled files you will need to Specify the output queue and library Specify the number of copies you want to produce Specify the form type Specify the user ID and address Specify if you want to hold or save the spooled file Specify any pre or post message information For network messages you will need to e Specify the message queue and library e Specify the remote location name of the system where the message queue resides e Specify if you will allow replies to the message queue ICOM 400 User Manual 15 Create Recipient Group Create Recipient Group Recipient group Text Type choices press E Seq Recipient 10 JULIA 20 LANCE 30 BYEMATL Recipient Groups consist of a group of recipients that you want to send a message to as a group rat
233. nt Reply Cmd Text EST RCP ELLSOUTH 2WAY NO NON RCP E NONE YES NON RCP E NONE YES NON RCP E NONE YES NON AAA ARCP E 2WAY NO NON RCP E NONE NO Sample action From this display you can add change copy remove or display Actions as well as change the command list associated with an Action Adding changing or displaying an Action To add change or display an Action enter a 1 on the first line under the Opt column on the Work with Actions display To change an existing Action enter a 2 beside the Action you want to change or enter a 2 in the first line under the Opt column along with the name To display an existing Action enter a 5 beside the Action you want to display or enter a 5 in the first line under the Opt column along with the name of the Action When you press Enter you are taken to the Add Action display the Change Action display or the Display Action display according to which option you have chosen The displays are identical ICOM 400 User Manual 113 Add Action Type choices press Enter AGIO a aioa ls occ cn cl Me a a ok e Se Name Send BY PE pe ae Me Eke fer Sen oe os Ss rs RCP RCP GRP Recipient Group Name ALL NONE F4 Selected recipients ALL ALL ONCALL essage detail JOBINF NONE JOBINF SECLVL Pre defined message ID NONE Name NONE F4 for lis
234. nt to receive the successful unsuccessful messages that are a result of ICOM 400 batch processing The default recipient is the user of the batch job NONE indicates that the messages are not sent to a user or message queue Q Interactive message queue The message queue and its associated library that you want to receive the successful unsuccessful messages that are a result of ICOM 400 interactive processing The default recipient is the user of the interactive job NONE indicates that the messages are not sent to a user or message queue Option 2 Work with Function Authorities To go to the Work with Function Authorities display enter a 2 on the command line of the System Controls menu Work with Function Authorities Type options press Enter 2 Edit function authority unction Text CHGSYSDFT Change system attributes DSPLOG Display log DSPQHST Display QHST ENDMON End monitors LDMON Hold monitor ONMSGQ Monitor message queue in restricted state Release monitor Remove activity Remove log entries Security Send to all recipients Send message Send spooled file Start monitors Opt 3 D J lt F F F F FY NANA AAS T Work with Function Authorities Type options press Enter 2 Edit function authority Opt Function W W W W W W R actions R R R R R WR R R R R R R activity pager companies escalation tables functions recip
235. nter you will go to the Recipient Information menu Here you may choose from six different options to Work with recipients groups pager companies schedules escalation tables and pre defined messages Option 5 History information go ICMHIST Select this option to Work with History information When you press enter you will go to the History Information menu Here you may choose from eight different options For instance you can Remove history Display the log Remove log entries Display Resource communication entries Print Resource communication entries OOOO Option 6 System monitors go ICMMON Select this option to Work with System Monitors When you press enter you will go to the System Monitors menu Here you may choose from eleven different options For instance you can display name schedule adjust start and end system monitors You may also Work with Actions Work with Monitor Subsystem or Send a Program Message Option 7 System controls go ICMSYSCTL Select this option to Work with System Controls When you press enter you will go to the System Controls menu Here you may choose from the following four options Change the system attributes Work with function authorities Reset ICOM 400 Work with page queues OOOo Option 20 Quick Start Wizard Select this option to go to ICOM 400 Quick Start Wizard From here you can add or change entries that you originally specified Option 30 Remote custo
236. nts and delivery methods When you are finished simply leave the Recipient field blank and press Enter Quick Start Wizard display 24 ICOM 400 Quick Start Wizard will take you through the steps necessary to deliver messages via e mail pager message queue or to ring a telephone The first step will be to set specific system attributes that can be used by recipients Then we will define individual recipient information ld yo j to send e mail messages y n ld yo j send fax messages y n ld yo j to send pager messages y n ld yo j add recipients y n ld yo j to send a test message y n You are now asked if you would like to send a test message If you do place a Y in the space provided otherwise put an N If you choose to send a test message you will be asked to provide additional information If you choose not to send a test message you are finished setting up ICOM 400 and are taken to Quick Start Wizard display 27 ICOM 400 User Manual 35 Quick Start Wizard display 25 Enter recipient name for test Name F4 for list To send a test message you must enter a recipient in the space provided For a list place your cursor on the field and press Enter Quick Start Wizard display 26 ICOM 400 Quick Start Wizard will take you through the process to test each delivery method for the recipient you selected Enter y for each method that you want to test Test net mess
237. number of entries generated so far within this escalation process The total number of entries that have been processed so far Display ICM Log Information 3 23 03 Display ICM Log Information 17 07 40 Position to 3 23 03 3 23 03 Monitor TSTJOB type JOB held Sending spooled file QPUOPRTF number 0002 for job 019891 BRIAN QPADEV0017 ATTACH sent to briany webzone net 1 type EMAIL sent 0 spooled file pages not sent Recipient SAMPLE changed User message initiated by LANCE at 3 23 03 09 49 07 Recipient SAMPLE notified by delivery type FAX Error creating line description ICOM4005 Fax error Value for parameter RSRCNAME not a valid name Error found on CRTLINASC command Value for parameter RSRCNAME not a valid name Error found on CRTLINASC command Sending message to recipient SAMPLE The Display ICM Log Information display is a result of processing the Display Log using ICM DSPLOGICM command Based on parameters requested in the command the display lists text messages associated with ICOM 400 processing You can specify a severity level for the messages to be included in the display Messages with severity levels equal to or greater than the selected severity level will be included in the display For example if you specified 30 all messages with a severity of 30 or higher would be selected for the display If the display does not contain the information needed you can
238. ny text in the body of the e mail message message Specify a message that you want to send File type to send FILTYP Specifies if you want to send a file as an attachment NONE You do not want to attach a file to the message TEXTFILE You want to attach a textfile to the message SPLF You want to attach a spooled file to the message Note The file is attached to an e mail the message text is sent as the body of the e mail message while the file is sent as an attachment to the message File FILE Specify the text file that you want to attach to the message file name Specify the name of the text file that you want to attach to the message LIBL Your library list is used to locate the text file CURLIB The current library is used to locate the text file If no current library is specified QGPL is used library name Specify the library name which contains the text file Member MBR Specifies the member in the file associated with the text file FIRST The first member of the file is used to locate the text file member name Specify the name of the member associated with the text file Spooled file SPLF Specifies the spooled file that you want to attach to the message spooled file name Specify the name of the spooled file that you want to attach to the message Job name JOB Specifies the name of the job that created the spooled file you want to attach to the message The job that created the spooled file issued
239. o NO indicates that you are to automatically run the command without verification Q Command Specify the CL command that you want to run when this menu option is selected You can prompt the command by pressing F4 Information INFO The INFO menu item type allows you to play a simple customized message or it allows you to runa CL program that you have created This item type is used when an interface into your application is needed such as playing the current sales for the week You can specify the option number a text description of the menu item a message to be associated with the menu item the program to process and library as well as program value and whether to pass a reply or not The INFO type allows a user exit program to be in control of the dialogue between the AS 400 and the person on the phone Within the ICOMTOOLS source file found in the ICOMTOOLS library are two sample programs that will help you understand how this process works The source members start with PARTDEMO and SAYSTATUS The SAYSTATUS sample program is the equivalent to the ICMCSTS program that is used in the SAMPLE2 menu Add Menu Item TYPE ods E a a AY se tay Rn be ae BA INFO Type choices press Option humber ss ebay e es Are oh 8 Number 01 10 Menu item text Message Program to process Library Program value Pass reply Some important fields include Message Specify the message you want to
240. o no want a default pager ID Default pager company The default pager company that is used on the SNDMSGICM command when NONE is specified for the recipient and SYSDFT is specified for the default pager and pager company NONE on this field indicates that you do not want a default pager company Pre and Post modem instructions Pre and post modem instructions are set up strings that are sent to the modem before and after the communication session These strings are composed of the Hayes Attention command set are fairly standard but allow for an expanded command set to be defined by the modem manufacturer to fully utilize a modem s capabilities NOTE For 99 9 of modems including the IBM 5853 ECS modem both of these set strings can normally be left blank However if you do need to put instructions in these fields your pager company will inform you of the strings that you will utilize Reply message inactivity interval The amount of time you want ICOM 400 to wait before checking for a reply to a message This is used only when two way communication is available This can range from 1 to 99 minutes with the default being 15 minutes Voice The following defaults apply to voice messaging m m Communication PC IP address The IP address of the machine that you want to use for voice messaging Communication PC port The port of the PC you are using for voice messaging that runs the text recognition software This can
241. obs in your job queue as well lets you know if a job is not active Message queue MSGQ This monitor allows you to monitor a specified message queue Network file NETF This monitor allows you to monitor for the presence of network files Object size OBJSIZ This monitor allows you to monitor the size of an object Output queue OUTQ This monitor allows you to monitor the number of spooled files QHST QHST This monitor allows you to monitor the system history log to catch messages that are not available in a message queue Remote device RMTDEV This monitor allows you to monitor for the presence of remote devices to see if you have a network failure Spooled file SPLF This monitor allows you to monitor for specific spooled files within an output queue Subsystem SBS This monitor allows you to monitor the number of jobs running in a subsystem User defined USRDFN This monitor allows you to monitor operations that have been defined by users These are the monitors listed under Monitor type Other entries may include one of following User message USRMSG The activity was initiated by the SNDMSGICM command Send spooled file SNDSPLF The activity was initiated by the SNDSPLFICM command To reach the Work with Activity display select Option 3 Work with activity from the ICOM 400 Main Menu You are taken to the Work with Activity WRKATVICM command display where you can restrict the activity that you di
242. ocess is still active Expired The message has expired This is similar to Escalated but here the escalation process is no longer active None There is no escalation associated with this message a File sent If there was a file attached to the message the name and information about the file are displayed The file can be a spooled file or a text file If the file was a text file the text file name library and member associated with the file are displayed If the file was a spooled file the spooled file name job user job number and spooled file number associated with the file are displayed Option 8 from the Work with History display takes you to the Display Escalation Information display Here you can see the escalation detail associated with a particular message 50 Display Escalation Information Message ID number 1204120 Escalation status Sent from Acknowledged by DOD wee i les os A St E OZRESRVS Table passes USE aiir 4h ae lt i f Gy ve QUSER Entries generated Numb r en 2 oe l 018828 Entries processed Escalation table TEST Entry Entry Delivery Escalation Opt Date Time Type Recipient Status Message 8 3 05 03 12 04 12 EMAIL JULIA Expired test tes 8 3 05 03 12 04 15 NETMSG JULIA Expired 018828 8 3 05 03 12 04 25 EMAI ANC Expired Expired Expired Expired 8 3 05 03 12 04 26 ANC 8 3 05 03 12 04 28 ANC 8 3 05 03 14 49 38 PAG ANC
243. of EXPD NONE Remove history entries with a escalation status code of NONE 150 Remove Log Entries using ICOM 400 RMVLOGEICM Remove ICOM 400 Log Entries RMVLOG Type choices press Enter EVD Erce cag she Gy p a a ie ae Shae MSG MNT From date ote te te Ogee gar MS et eh ee l CURRENT BEGIN nnnnn TO daori oe st Beat terete As GP an l CURRENT nnnnn The Remove Log Entries from ICM RMVLOGEICM command allows you to clear the ICOM 400 log based on a date range that you specify Type TYPE Specifies the type of entries that you want to clear from the ICM log Examples of types of entries are messages and maintenance ALL Selects all log entries to clear within the specified date range MSG Selects only message log entries to clear within the specified date range MNT Selects only maintenance log entries to clear within the specified date range From date FROMDATE Specifies the beginning date that you want to use when clearing the ICOM 400 log The From date is the beginning point in the ICOM 400 log that is cleared CURRENT The current date is used as the beginning point of the date range date Specifies the date entered in system format with or without date separators that is 12 23 03 or 122303 that you want to be the beginning date of the date range nnnnn Specifies a number to represent the number of days before the current day that you want to clear An exampl
244. on ssessssrsrrssrssrrsrnarnsennennesnssnsnnsennernornornoernerrerrennrannannannannnennnn 37 Pager Compani ES i edi sean detec a AAAA E ENA NANET ANATAET NEE E eae NEE A ayes AE ANE TANAAN AARNA EENE ete 37 Esmail aenn a a ae E AE aaa aun ota ine aleea Ia E eee deed al a a A a a 38 BAEN EE EA E EIE T AS A EE TA A sa des de 38 ACTIONS E E E E E E A A TA TT E A E E E 38 Monitor Config ratioN sriesosisiiiesne iriaren iS o ma a aaa aE AEA A E a E nal e aa aaa aa 38 DEEE E EA E N A a A OAT 38 AUTOS Tea reste ec ian acca face fiche NEA cinlets ate siatintealgn spascee acta A alk noble A A ancten macs eset oats 39 REMOVING ICOM 400 eis vc tekecr es ceveawer sas ewes Teentidiid va wend seveeemennd CEEE EA EANA AN AAAA ames ee i 39 MODEM CONFIGURATION ahar rran Ee EI OA ADA AAAA AIAN AA ADN E AANA AAA S PAEAN 39 ICOM 400 MAIN MENU ssasasnassssnnsnnnnnsnnsnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnsnnnsnnnnnnannnssnnnnnunnnnnnnsnnnnnsnnnnnannnsnnnnnnnnnnan 42 Pein pe E L E A E S E A E ET iaeed rae 43 CHAPTER 3 SENDING A MESSAGE USING ICOM 400 ccccsscsececeeneeneeeeeeeeesesneaseesessensenee 45 CHAPTER 4 WORK WITH HISTORY ccccccccsceccescesceseeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeseeaeeeneaseaaeaseasensensense 48 CHAPTER 5 WORK WITH ACTIVITY cccccccscccscescesseseesceseeeeeeeeeeeeceeneeseeeeeaseaseaseaaeasensensense 52 CHAPTER 6 RECIPIENT INFORMATION ccccccceccccseesceseeeseeseeceeceeneeneeaeeaneaseaseneensensensense 56 Option 1 Work With Recipients NN I UU
245. on Should it be deleted it will automatically be re created when the next fax is sent by ICOM 400 Line description resource name CMNO1 Depending upon your phone system it may be necessary to use a telephon prefix An example would be to dial a 9 to access an outside line or possibly a code used for tracking or billing purposes Commas can be used when a pause is required before dialing the telephone number Each comma will cause a one second delay Telephone prefix 9 The next display asks you to provide a telephone pre fix for the telephone line you will be using with ICOM 400 A pre fix is something that needs to be placed in front of the telephone number that you will dial with your AS 400 modem For example in order to get an outside line to use the modem many times a 9 or something similar needs to placed in front of the telephone number If this is the case specify the character along with a comma for a pause Each comma equals a one second delay before a telephone number is dialed Press Enter to proceed to the next display Quick Start Wizard display 6 ICOM 400 automatically creates an asynchronous line description named ICOM4005 This line description is used only by ICOM 400 and needs no configuration Should it be deleted it will automatically be re created when the next fax is sent by ICOM 400 Company names m m See ae ak a ae Pinnacle Business Systems Return fax number d
246. on specified in Quick Start Wizard follow the steps outlined below Modem Configuration An asynchronous modem must be attached to your system in order to use ICOM 400 To configure you modem to asynchronous mode please follow the instructions at the end of this chapter ICOM 400 is capable of support a variety of asynchronous modems and is limited only by the requirements of your AS 400 Some types of modems require a more complex configuration than others and therefore more initial set up time You must use a PC application such as Terminal or HyperTerminal that will allows you to issue a string of AT commands Here are a few modem configurations IBM 5853 Modem To configure the IBM 5853 modem for use with ICOM 400 all of the front panel buttons must be in the released position The A S button switches between Asynchronous OUT and Synchronous IN operating modes and must be in Asynchronous OUT position See the end of this chapter for an illustration of the settings IBM 7855 10 Modem To configure the IBM 7855 10 modem for use with ICOM 400 the modem must be configured in an asynchronous operating mode The IBM 7855 10 can be configured via the four directional buttons on the front of the modem See the end of this chapter for an illustration of the settings Other asynchronous modems See the Modem configuration at the end of this chapter Line Description Information Line description information can be inputted from the
247. onal search locations that you specify To start the search click Next If you are searching on a floppy disk or CD ROM drive insert the floppy disk or CD before clicking Next Optional search locations J Floppy disk drives P CD ROM drives IV Specify a location F Microsoft Windows Update cows _ Found New Hardware Wizard 7 xi Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into the drive selected and then click OK i And finally click the OK button Cancel The driver will be searched Specify the path as shown in the example Copy manufacturer s files from CAMPNSDrd Browse ICOM 400 User Manual 195 Found New Hardware Wizard E Driver Files Search Results CN The wizard has finished searching for driver files for your hardware device Sy The driver for this device has been recognized in the selected directory The wizard found a driver for the following device a Telephony Accelerator Windows found a driver for this device To install the driver Windows found click Next Click Next button c mpn5drv mpisa2 inf lt Back Cancel Found New Hardware Wizard E Hardware Install Windows is installing drivers for your new hardware D aAa e e will a ppear b riefly to gt Prone a ane Wait while the wizard is installing the driver for the PhoneRider ISA 1 2 Accelerator Installing software necessary to support your hardware Cancel
248. ons press Enter 1 Add 2 Chang 3 Copy 4 Remov 5 Display 6 Hold Release 7 Work with activity 8 Check now S2 Wakesup lt lt Opt Monitor Type Schedule Date Time H oO X BYMSGQ MSGQ ALLDAYS WAIT BYOUTQ SPLF ALLDAYS WAIT JANCECFG CFGS1 SAMPLE HELD LBSCFG CFGS1 ALLDAYS WAIT LBSMSGQ MSGQ ALLDAYS HELD SGQ MSGQ ALLDAYS HELD EW MSGQ ALLDAYS HELD R SPLF ALLDAYS WAIT PLE JOB SAMPLE HELD zZ 2 tor PAGEMGR line f t 3 controllers mon Tp F zZ Oro a A ee ee Zz onitor QSYSOPR messag NONE he text onitor SAMPLEJOB if r More Oe Ov Or O Oor OO 222222222 Zt texte t The Work with Monitors display shows all entries for a monitor which you selected and defined to ICOM 400 Monitor entries are parameters which include the name of the monitor the type of monitor the name of the schedule you want the monitor to follow the scheduled times you want the monitor to be activated and a text description of the monitor You can set up an unlimited number of monitors with varying specifications The appropriate monitor must be active to monitor and send messages from the monitors 10 Message Queue Monitor Monitor Message queue Library Inactivity interval Text Change Message Queu BYMSGQ BYMSGQ BYLIB 15 Monitor Name Name LIBL Seco
249. or and reply messages are sent ICMDEFT The value for the return e mail is found in the ICOM 400 defaults e mail address Specify the return e mail address Send Message using ICOM 400 See Chapter 3 for details on sending a message using ICOM 400 Send Spooled File SNDSPLFICM See Chapter 9 for details on sending a spooled file using ICOM 400 Work with Actions using ICOM 400 WRKACTICM 156 This command allows you to work with all Actions defined in ICOM 400 This command takes you directly to the Work with Actions display There are no parameters to enter or display This display is reached by typing WRKACTICM on the command line and pressing F4 Work with Pager Companies using ICOM 400 WRKCMPICM Work with Pager Companies WRKCMPICM Type choices press Enter Output The Work with Pager Companies WRKCMPICM command allows you to work with all or selected pager companies by taking you to the Work with Pager Companies display From there you can add remove change copy or display pager company information Output can be a display or printed report You may reach this screen by typing WRKCMPICM on the command line and pressing F4 Output OUTPUT Use the following values to specify whether pager companies are to be shown on the Work with Pager Companies display or printed Displays the Work with Pager Companies display PRINT Prints the Work with Pager Companies report Work with Escalation Tab
250. ord SUPPORT AS Manager Communication This option allows you to configure your communications support to access ACS This process must be completed before you can access ACS AS Manager Communication Configuration options press Enter Line Resource Nam to OR Ak er Us Mee SEMNOT Line Speed 2400 AS Manager Dial in Number SST19185876923 Some important fields for this display include QO Line resource name This is the name of the AS 400 line resource used to access ACS It will normally be LINO11 This line has to be in synchronous mode when using ACS If your not sure of your line resource name enter DSPLIND QESLINE on a command line and use the Resource name value returned as the line resource name Q Line speed This is your communication speed The default is 2400 baud This value should not go above 2400 OQ AS Manager Dial in Number This is the Pinnacle ACS phone number If you are using a PBX system your string should be similar to SST9 19185876923 the first 9 is the value to get an outside line yours may be different Once all values are correct press Enter This will create a line ASM LINE a controller ASM CTL and a device ASM DEV The user should not vary these objects on The order process will vary them on during the procedure and off at the end You must ensure that no other lines are varied onto the resource that you name for this line In most cases the screen can b
251. ortion of the specified Action is not conditioned upon the receipt of a message YES indicates that the notification portion of the Action is conditioned upon the receipt of message ICM3333 Changing Compare Data Once you have added your message queue monitor entry s you can change the compare data for an entry Type 7 beside the entry whose compare data you want to change and press Enter You are taken to the Change Compare Data display Change Compare Data MOnTEOr auk ce 4 ae as A ck AS amp a 7 CBYMSEO Entry sequence 1 Type choices press Enter Seq A O Str Len Test Compare data The Change Compare Data display allows you to change the criteria used by ICOM 400 to determine which messages are monitored for in message queues or QHST and in turn the subsequent Action initiated by the message The Change Compare Data display works in conjunction with the Message ID field on the Monitor entry display You must know what data with the message ID s you want to use as criteria to initiate an Action For example message ID CPI5935 states Controller amp 1 failed Automatic Recovery started whereas amp 1 is the message data There are many different controllers that can fail But for instance you only want to monitor for controller ETHCTL If controller ETHCTL fails you want to receive a pager message or any other defined Action You must define the compare message data on this display in order to distin
252. ot specifically named To add users press F6 Q Group authority The authority that a user has to functions associated with a recipient group Several system defined group authority levels may be assigned to users USE allows the user to send a message to the recipient group EXCLUDE excludes the user from being able to send a message to the recipient group Option 3 Work with Schedules Entering Option 3 on a command line from the Recipient Information display takes you to the Work with Schedules display 68 Work with Schedules POSICION CO aial a ewh Starting characters Type options press Enter 1 Add 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Remove 5 Display Opt Schedule Text HMMMMM NONE ATEST NONE iIBSSCHE NONE SAMPLE Sample off hours TEST test The Work with Schedules display shows all schedules that are defined to ICOM 400 Schedules are user defined groupings of dates that suggest when ICOM 400 processing should be used Schedules have many uses including specifying a recipient s availability and on call schedules scheduling a monitor to monitor your job events or for message queue or QHST entry scheduling From this display you have many options You may add a schedule Option 1 change an existing schedule Option 2 or copy a schedule Option 3 You may also remove a schedule Option 4 or display a schedule Option 5 Adding a Schedule To add a schedule enter a 1 on the first line un
253. ou must have a person or group to which it will be sent This chapter includes information on setting up and sending messages to recipients and recipient groups as well as defining schedules and configuring pager companies You will also learn how to set up and use escalation tables and create pre defined messages ICMRCP Recipient Information Select one of the following Wo ith recipients Wo ith recipient groups Wo ith schedules Wo ith pager companies Wo ith escalation tables Wo ith pre defined messages Wor ith IP entries From the ICOM 400 Main Menu select Option 4 Recipient Information and press Enter You are taken to the Recipient Information menu where you have several choices Option 1 Work with Recipients Entering Option 1 on a command line takes you to the Work with Recipients display Work with Recipients POSTEDOM COs sek Yet Starting characters Type options press Enter 1 Add 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Remove 5 Display 7 Send messag 9 Edit authority H 0 X Opt Recipient Escalation IAN N N N N N N N N N N N m m AA y webzone net N F F F OF O F F HF aj O O O O O O O O O O la G m A a E ma A m ARE ms OA ma A a ee m AAAA The Work with Recipients display shows all recipients that have been defined to ICOM 400 Recipients are individuals or locations that are config
254. ou to verify whether your PhoneRider can open the line using the Speakerphone To start the test click the button below Diagnostic Status The Diagnostic Status window opens If the board is correctly er The line has been established g i ay You must now hear the dial tone on your speakers configured you can hear the card click Click Stop to end the Press Stop to end the diagnostic test Stop 198 The Wizard asks if it performed correctly Click Yes You will return to the Line and speakerphone Diagnostic panel iS Has PhoneRider performed correctly Click Next The diagnostic is finished The Microphone setup panel appears It allows you to mae finely adjust the microphone gain gy Microphone setup Click Next Depending on the microphone you have you may need to adjust the gain Speak as you usually do on the phone Gain VU meter and use the slider to adjust the gain so that the red area of the VU meter will Ea line not be lit too often You can also use a Ike the Auto calibration button to have the cant e gain adjusted automatically a i Auto calibration 14 0 dB MediaPhonics PhoneRider Board Wizard The Handset diagnostic panel opens Press the Test the Handset button ay Handset diagnostic This test allows you to verify whether your PhoneRider can open the line using your telephone set To start the test click the button below then pick up your handset Cancel T
255. ou would like to hold ALL You would like to hold all types of monitors CPU You would like to hold a CPU monitor CFGSTS You would like to hold a configuration status monitor 144 JOB You would like to hold a job monitor JOBQ You would like to hold a job queue monitor MSGQ You would like to hold a message queue monitor NETF You would like to hold a network file monitor OBJSIZ You would like to hold an object size monitor OUTQ You would like to hold an output queue monitor QHST You would like to hold a QHST monitor RMTDEV You would like to hold a remote device monitor SPLF You would like to hold a spooled file monitor SBS You would like to hold a subsystem monitor USRDFN You would like to hold a user defined monitor Hold Message Queue Monitor HLDMSGQICM Hold Message Queue Monitor HLDMSGQICM Type choices press Enter Message queue Name ALL The Hold Message Queue HLDMSGQICM command allows you to hold all or specific message queue monitors Message queue MSGQ Specify the message queue monitor to hold or that you want to hold all message queues monitors ALL Hold all message queues message queue name Specify the name of the message queue that you want to hold Monitor Message Queue MONMSGQICM Monitor Message Queue MONMSGOQICM Type choices press Enter Message Queue s s s a oe 2 p a is Name LIbrary gt e arira yoa o Name LIBL CURLIB MO
256. oup of persons or a device to whom you want to deliver a pager message AS 400 message e mail message ring a telephone or fax Recipients can have multiple delivery methods i e pager e mail etc Enter the recipient name JULIA A Pager ID is required for paging and is assigned to the recipient by the paging company Typically it is a seven digit number usually a phone number that can be used to send a numeric page from a touch tone phone to alpha numeric or digital pagers However some paging companies do use five digit pager ids with alpha numeric pagers If this delivery method is not needed leave blank and press Enter to continue Pager ID Sa er ee es A S Paget VDE os vs Se ee OS Bip Hace Oe ce BO ae 8 A for Alpha D for Digital This display asks you to provide a Pager ID for the recipient you are adding Typically the ID is a seven digit number i e telephone number which will indicate which pager is to receive the pager message If you do not want the recipient to receive pager messages simply leave this field blank Press Enter ICOM 400 User Manual 33 Quick Start Wizard display 20 A recipient is a person group of persons or a device to whom you want to deliver a pager message AS 400 message e mail message ring a telephone or fax Recipients can have multiple delivery methods i e pager e mail etc r the recipient name JULIA A telephone number is required for each
257. ows all spooled files that you requested as a result of processing the Work with Spooled Files using ICM WRKSPLFICM command The display can contain all spooled files regardless of status or can be conditioned to only include selected files a date range of files and so on The time and date of the entry along with the job user and output queue associated with the spooled file are shown You may change display or send a spooled file as an attachment to a message From this display you have several options You can change Option 2 the attributes of a spooled file display Option 5 the contents of a spooled file and send Option 7 a spooled file as an attachment to a message The required information is automatically entered into the SNDMSGICM command display parameters For more information on sending a message refer to Chapter 3 Send Spooled File SNDSPLFICM The Send Spooled File SNDSPLFICM command display Option 8 is used to send a spooled file in its entirety to an e mail address or fax number as an attachment or split up a spooled file and send each selection as an attachment to different e mail addresses or fax numbers A partial send can be accomplished by entering your selection information in the Selection text SLTTXT parameter You may also send you spooled file to a fax number Send Spooled File SNDSPLFICM Type choices press Enter Spooled file Name DOO WaMer wr fod he by ok ee ee MS Name
258. p a list of messages You can place a 1 beside the message you want to send or press F9 from this display to go to Work with Pre defined Messages 114 Q Escalation table The escalation table to be used with this Action Press F4 to bring up a list of tables You can place a 1 beside the table you want to use or press F9 from this display to go to Work with Escalation Tables NOTE If you specify an escalation table you will override the escalation table if any defined for the recipient RCP indicates to use the escalation table if any currently defined for the selected recipient associated with this Action NONE indicates that there is no escalation table defined for this Action therefore the Action will not escalate This will override the escalation table if any defined for the recipient QO Message reply The reply to be issued as an Action in response to an inquiry message The inquiry message is sent to a message queue being monitored by ICOM 400 that contains a message queue monitor entry specifying the inquiry message that would initiate this Action The message can also be sent to a pager e mail client or remote location if two way communications is available You can specify up to 10 characters and if the reply is not valid for the inquiry message the reply will be rejected 2WAY indicates that if you are using two way communications the reply is sent via a message from a pager e mail client or network message NONE indicate
259. pecified criteria recipient name Specify the name of the recipient for which you want to remove history entries Recipient group GRP Specifies the name of the recipient group or all groups for which you want to remove history entries ALL You want to remove history entries for all groups that meet the other specified criteria group name Specify the name of the group for which you want to remove history entries From date FROMDATE Specifies the beginning date that you want to use when removing ICOM 400 history entries The From date is the beginning point in the ICOM 400 history that is cleared CURRENT The current date is used as the beginning point of the date range BEGIN The earliest entry date in the file is used as the beginning date in the date range date Specifies the date entered in system format with or without date separators that is 12 23 03 or 122303 that you want to be the beginning date of the date range ICOM 400 User Manual 149 nnnnn Specifies a number to represent the number of days before the current day that you want to remove An example would be 10 If today s date were 3 12 03 the From date would be 3 2 03 To date TODATE Specify the ending date that you want to use when removing ICOM 400 history entries The To date is the ending point in the ICOM 400 history that is cleared CURRENT The current date is used as the ending date of the date range END The last entry date in the file i
260. play or work with pages in a selected company queue you can hold or release the company queue or you can send the pages in a company queue immediately There are no parameters for this command Work with Recipients WRKRCPICM Work with Recipients WRKRCPICM Type choices press Enter Company Escalation table Output The Work with Recipients WRKRCPICM command allows you to work with all or selected recipients by taking you to the Work with Recipients display From there you can add remove change or display recipient information You can also designate recipients as on call Output can be a display or printed report You may reach this display by typing WRKRCPICM on a command line and pressing F4 Company CMP Specifies the company whose recipients you want to work with ALL Include all recipients for all companies in the display or report company name Specify the company whose recipients you want to include in the display or report Escalation table ESCTBL Specifies the escalation table whose recipients you want to work with ALL Include all recipients for all escalation tables in the display or report escalation table name Specify the escalation table whose recipients you want to include in the display or report Output OUTPUT Use the following values to specify whether recipients are to be shown on the Work with Recipients display or printed 164 Disp
261. previously not mentioned in the manual Those commands include DSPLOGICM Display ICOM 400 log entries DSPMSGICM Display ICOM 400 message IDs ENDMSGQICM End message queue monitor HLDMONICM Hold monitor using ICM HLDMSGQICM Hold message queue monitor MONMSGQICM Monitor message queue RLSMONICM Release monitor using ICM RLSMSGQICM Release message queue monitor RMVATVICM Remove ICOM 400 activity RMVHSTICM Remove ICOM 400 history RMVLOGEICM Remove log entries using ICM SNDICM Send using ICOM 400 SNDMSGICM Send message using ICOM 400 SNDSPLFICM Send spooled file using ICOM 400 WRKACTICM Work with Actions using ICM WRKCMPICM Work with pager companies using ICM WRKESCICM Work with escalation tables using ICM WRKGRPICM Work with recipient groups using ICM WRKMSGICM_ Work with pre defined messages WRKMAILICM Work with ICOM 400 e mail WRKPAGICM_ Work with pages using ICM WRKPAGQICM Work with page queues using ICM WRKRCPICM Work with recipients using ICM WRKSCDICM Work with schedules using ICM WRKSPLFICM Work with spooled files using ICM ICOM 400 User Manual 137 Display ICOM 400 Log Entries DSPLOGICM Display Log for ICOM 400 DSPLOGICM Type choices press Enter Type Spare pak HP ae es bes te Time period for log output Start time and date Beginning time Beginning date nnnnn End time and date Ending time Ending dale a gei Pe wie ae 4 F F END nnnnn Severity Output MSG MNT R
262. r a specific user ID From user ID The name of the user ID from whom the network file is being sent You can specify any user on the remote system that sends a network file ALL or a specific user ID Address The address of the user ID from whom the network file is sent You can specify any address on the remote system that sends a network file ALL or a specific address Network file type The type of network file that is being sent You can specify all file types ALL or one of the files types listed below DTA Data file e JOB Job file e SAVF Save file e SRC Source file O oO O 0 O0 O0 Object Size OBJSIZ The object size monitor allows you to monitor the size of a particular object If the object that you are monitoring exceeds the size limit you have specified the specified Action is initiated Adding changing or displaying an object size monitor To add change or display an object size monitor enter a 1 on the first line under the Opt column on the Work with Monitors display You will also need to enter a name for your new monitor under the Monitor column and OBJSIZ under Type To change an existing monitor enter a 2 beside the monitor you want to change or enter a 2 in the first line under the Opt column along with the name 102 and monitor type To display an existing monitor enter a 5 beside the monitor you want to display or enter a 5 in the first line under the Opt column along with the nam
263. r characteristics of voice messaging ICOM 400 User Manual 175 Frequently Asked Questions about Voice Messaging 176 Why does the computer not wait for me to say hello when I answer a call Answer The voice modems such as the ModemBlaster cannot detect when the call is answered Therefore the introduction is started as soon as the number is dialed The introduction is played 4 times unless a security code is entered or the number 1 if a security code is not required After that the message is played If no numbers were entered the call is flagged in error because no one actually heard the message Can I use a ModemBlaster on Windows NT Answer No The drivers provided by the manufacturer does not contain everything needed for voice applications Can I use more than one PC to issue calls Answer Yes The ICOM 400 AS 400 product was designed to handle multiple PCs issuing outbound calls Each PC is defined as an IP entry in the ICOM 400 AS 400 product specifying the IP address as well as a telephone prefix i e 9 if needed The PHONE delivery type is used to define the voice feature for a recipient This delivery type allows you to specify the IP entry name or ANY If an entry name is used every call will be issued from the PC associated with the IP address of the IP entry If ANY is used ICOM will search for any IP entries that are active but not currently busy Can I have multiple AS 400s use the same PC to issue calls A
264. r the current sales figures for the month and so on Please refer to the manual for more details on the exit program as well as where to find sample programs that will help you get started How can I find the message number of a message in order to replay it at a later time Answer There are several ways to find the message number For starters you can use a replacement variable QMSGNBR in the pre post text of a recipient This would cause the message number to be part of the outgoing message If the outgoing message is to a phone the message would contain Message number is 45 Also on phone messages the message number can be played at anytime during the body of the message by pressing the button The message number is also played during the 3 and 4 repetition of the introduction This would allow you to hear the message number in case you were not at home and the introduction is being recorded on your answering machine How can I replay a message if I don t know the message number Answer A menu option can be set up with type MSGL which will list previous messages within ICOM 400 The menu item can be set up to only list messages based on the recipient found in the user code definition and whether to include only unanswered messages Can I answer a message at a later time using inbound voice Answer Yes Either by replaying a specific message or when listing messages PhoneRider Installation under Windows 98 Locate the Window
265. r your use This information will be used with the Work with Pager Companies and Change System Attributes displays Pager company name _ __ _ gt gt gt S O Contact name employee ee S y O Address Company modem phone number OOOO o OO Company s password if any FT Maximum length pager message 1 999 O Modem rate 300 1200 2400 9600 etc lt o Parity even odd none Lo Data bits 7 8 Stop bits 1 2 LY Duplex support full half oo SEY Number of pages per transmission o O O E mail server address eae Mailhost port id ICOM 400 e mail address eae User name OT Password SSCS Pager Holder ID E mail Holder Address Name Pager ID Name E mail address 2138 A Action 11 12 13 37 59 75 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 101 102 103 104 105 107 109 110 111 112 113 114 Adding 112 Activity SNDSPLE 51 52 53 124 126 USRMSG 51 52 53 Activity retention days 121 Additional ICM Log Information 81 Advanced Set up 36 AS Manager Communication 168 asynchronous modem 22 23 36 Attaching Spooled file or text file 45 Automated Customer Support 166 Autostart 38 Autostart monitors 121 B Base on command response 97 99 104 Batch message queue 119 124 C Change command list 13 113 114 Change System Attributes 17 36 37 38 61 62 71 119 120 133 1
266. rate 24 hours a day seven days a week Or you can specify the name of a specific monitor that you would like to use with the monitor Schedules are set up in the Add Schedule display To select from a list of existing schedules place your cursor on the Schedule field and press F4 to bring up the list You may select the schedule by entering a 1 beside the schedule you want to use If you want to work with schedules press F9 from this pop up display Q Inactivity interval The amount of time in minutes that you would like for ICOM 400 to pause during monitoring 15 minutes is the default amount of time This means that while the monitor is in active status it will check for the conditions that you have specified every 15 minutes You can specify a number of minutes between 1 and 999 minutes NOTE The inactivity interval for your monitor can be lengthened or shortened depending on if a user needs to use a message queue or other device that might be locked up by the monitor For example you might want to make the time between monitoring 60 minutes so that the device you are monitoring will not be locked up by the monitor as often as the default 15 minutes Note The inactivity interval for message queue and QHST monitors is listed in seconds Q Action The name of an Action that you want to execute in response to the monitor s specified conditions being met An Action can be many things Action entries can include such items as the name of the recip
267. rdering any necessary enhancements or corrections PTFs to Pinnacle software products ACS is automatically installed at ICOM 400 installation time ACS allows you to Order PTFs for any AS Manager product Send a message to technical support Page a technical support representative for emergencies Ask questions or search for answers on Q amp A database Automated Customer Support is provided as a service to our valued customers in order to assure the highest level of support If you are interested in purchasing the product for your own PTF distribution requirements call us and we will provide additional information To access ACS choose Option 30 from the ICOM 400 Main Menu or enter the command GO ASM from a command line This will take you to the Automated Customer Support menu Troubleshooting OQ Check line resource name Check for another line varied on Use the WRKCFGSTS LIN ASMSLINE command to look at the status of the ACS line Enter a 1 beside it to vary it on The line should then show connect pending Now enter a 2 beside it to vary it off If you get a failure on the vary on then there is another line currently varied on to the resource Enter the command WRKHDWRSC TYPE CMN to look at all lines that share this resource Then use WRKCFGSTS command to vary the line off Make sure your modem is set for synchronous operation Refer to Chapter 2 for more information on configuring modems AS M
268. re defined message message Specify a message that you want to send 152 phone number Specify additional numbers to be used with the phone number specified within the recipient or the Phone field NONE You do not want to send a message You are ringing a phone The phone number that you want to use is retrieved from the recipient Send message as DVYTYP Specify the type of delivery you would like to use for the message You can enter multiple values for this parameter If you are on an entry display and you need additional entry fields to enter multiple delivery types type a plus sign in the entry field opposite the phrase for more values and press the Enter key RCP You want to send the message to all the delivery types already assigned to that recipient EMAIL You want to send the message to the e mail addresses that have been defined for that recipient Note When you want to send a notification using e mail a default subject will auto matically be applied to the message If you wish to change the subject enter a new subject within the first 32 characters of the message in the Message field and then the body of the message An example would be Subject Meeting Sales meeting at 2pm where Subject Meeting is the new subject and Sales meeting at 2pm is the message Otherwise a default subject of ICOM 400 Notification will be applied MSGQ You want to send the message to the message queues that
269. re information on escalation tables see Chapter 6 Work with Recipients 8 Specify if you want to want all recipients entered in the Name field to receive the message or only recipients that are on call to receive the message When you have finished entering all the pertinent information press Enter to send the message Using ICOM 400 to Send a Message An Example You were recently contacted by the manager of the building where your business resides She stated that the power for the building would be out temporarily the following Monday at 10pm for needed maintenance procedures Since this will affect your AS 400 operations you must let your users know about the situation You decide to send a page and e mail to your users that will be on call Monday morning of the day that the power is scheduled to go out Since this is Friday you want to schedule the messages for Monday morning You take Option 1 Send a message from the ICOM 400 Main Menu to go to the SNDMSGICM command display In the Name field you enter ALL In the Message parameter you enter the message you want to send ATTENTION Building manager announced that power will be going out at 10pm on Monday Please run all necessary backup and maintenance jobs before that time You specify that you want the message sent on the date of the power outage and the time to be 8am 08 00 00 In Delivery type you specify EMAIL and PAGER assuming that all of your employees have these de
270. re spooled file will be sent Message The message text that will be sent in the body of the e mail NOTE If you specify amp NL in your message all the text after amp NL will appear on the next line of the message You may specify as many new lines as you wish amp NL will not appear in the message text Delivery type The delivery type for the spooled file You can send your spooled file to an e mail address EMAIL or a fax number FAX NOTE You may specify PGM as a delivery type if you want to let a program you have written determine the delivery type You must specify the program to be called that will return the email address or fax number The SNDINF parameter will be used to locate the key information that the program will need to find the email address or fax number The program must receive two parameters the first being character with a length of 10 and the second being character with a length of 60 The first parameter will determine what delivery type will be used to send the spooled file either EMAIL or FAX You must move one of these values into the first parameter being EMAIL or FAX The second parameter contains the key information found in the spooled file but will also return the email address or fax number The second parameter should return blanks if no email address or fax number is found Please refer to the following example gt SNDSPLFICM SPLF QPINVOICE JOB SPLNBR LAST MSG Attached is your invoice DV
271. re the time separator specified for your job is used to separate the hours minutes and seconds If you enter this command from the command line the string must be enclosed in apostrophes If a time separator other than the separator specified for your job is used this command will fail Element 2 Beginning date ICOM 400 User Manual 141 One of the following is used to specify the beginning date on or after which the messages were made Any messages created prior to the specified date are not included in the display or report CURRENT Messages with a current date creation date and between the specified beginning and ending times if specified are included BEGIN Messages from the beginning of the message queue are included begin date Specify the beginning date The date must be specified in the job date format number of days Specify a number to represent the number of days before the current date that you want to use for the search An example would be 10 If today s date were 3 12 03 date format is mm dd yy the Begin date for the ICOM 400 log would be 3 2 03 Element 3 Ending time One of the following is used to specify the ending time before which messages are included Any items created after the specified time and date are not included for the display or report AVAIL Any time that is available for the ending date is included end time Specify the ending time for the specified ending date that indicates which mess
272. ress If you are connected to the Internet the default address will be adequate but for better performance specify your ISP s mail server address If you are protected by a firewall you must ask your mail administrator for the address number If you aren t able to obtain the SMTP address but do know the server NAME you can access the SMTP address Simply type ping lt server name gt from any command line An example of a server name is mail pbsnow com Port The port through which you access your outgoing mail This is a number between 1 and 65535 The default is 25 POP3 host server address The Post Office Protocol POP3 server s address which is used to manage incoming mail An example of a POP3 server address is pop3 pbsnow com Port The port through which you access your incoming mail This is a number between 1 and 65535 The default is 25 Account name The name that is used to logon to the ICOM 400 e mail address This is usually the text that appears before the sign in the e mail address For example for the e mail address support domain com the account name is support Password The password for the e mail account specified in the Account name field This password will be used to logon to your e mail account ICOM 400 User Manual 125 Other attributes The following defaults specify the message queues you want to use for ICOM 400 processing a Batch message queue The message queue and its associated library that you wa
273. ribution list 26 Specifies queue name for message queue monitoring 27 Specifies minimum message severity for message queue monitoring 28 Specifies job name that sent the message for message queue monitoring 29 Specifies user id that sent the message or is associated for message queue monitoring 30 Specifies the program name that sent the message 31 Specifies the specific message ID received ee SE OM ET a ICOM 400 User Manual 9 Send Message using ICOM 400 This command SNDMSGICM has many uses For example not only can you send a pager message to your employees reminding them of that 2 00 meeting that they must attend you can also send them e mail messages or message queue messages You can send the message now or you can specify when you would like to send the message by designating a time in the schedule time field You can send messages to one recipient or to only those recipients who are on schedule to be paged Another important feature of this command is the ability to use SNDMSGICM with a job scheduler or within a CL program ICOM 400 can send a message to your users when a job has finished or at a time that you specify This is useful when you have a message that you send at a certain time every day or week You don t have to keep keying in the message everytime but can have your job scheduler work with ICOM 400 to do the job for you Work with Monitors Work with Monitors 3 23 03 16 52 42 Position to Type opti
274. rmat FULL The detail of each entry is printed in an expanded format ICOM 400 User Manual 143 End Message Queue Monitor ENDMSGQICM End Monitor Message Queue ENDMSGQICM Type choices press Enter Message queue s e pr 3 4 8 o a Name TVD MALY s d mrien hinm owned Hk E Name LIBL CURLIB The command stops the message queue monitor started by MONMSGQICM The parameters for the ENDMSGQICM command are listed below Message queue MSGQ Specifies the message queue you are monitoring as well as the library which contains the message queue message queue Specify the message queue that you want to end monitoring LIBL The library is contained in your library list library name Specifies the name of the library which contains your message queue Hold Monitor using ICOM 400 HLDMONICM Hold monitor using ICOM 400 HLDMONICM Type choices press Enter Monster as a ee ress oR oe cs BA iL iL BYMSGQ BYOUTQ Monitor type s s 6 e 3 dod o ee iL iL CFGSTS CPU The Hold Monitor using ICOM 400 HLDMONICM command allows you to temporarily pause a monitor from executing The parameters for this command are listed below Monitor MON Specifies the monitor which you would like to hold ALL You would like to hold all monitors monitor name Specifies the name of the monitor you would like to hold Monitor type MONTYP Specifies the type of monitor which y
275. rt menu and run X ICOM400 ICOMVoice WinNt FWN4E0500002 exe where X is the CD ROM drive or browse the CD ROM drive to find the program in the mentioned folder MediaPhonics Intelligent Firmware Updater This will create a folder with the latest drivers Follow the prompts until asked if you want to install the version even though there is no firmware installed Click No and continue with instructions below A There is currently no firmware installed on your computer Do you want to install the version FWN4E 05 00 002 now It is necessary to first install the PnP Plug n Play function for Windows NT 4 0 To determine whether PnP is installed the pnpisa sys file will exist in the C WINNT system32 drivers folder If PnP is not already installed follow the next 2 steps 1 Using the CD provided by Pinnacle Business Systems locate file pnpisa inf in the Icom400 ICOMVoice WinNt folder It may be the one without the inf extension Right click on the file and select Install 2 Reboot when prompted When the PnP function is installed shut down and turn off the computer Install the PhoneRider board Then Analog Devices 4D1815 ey turn the PC on ve When Windows NT 4 0 starts a Building driver Select which driver you want to install for your new hardware information database panel appears showing the Windows NT default diver progress of the procedure Driver from disk provided by hardware manufacturer Then the Ne
276. ry 40 7 Press 4 until display shows Synchronous 8 Press lt First Setup 9 Press gt Synchronous 10 Press 4 until display shows Get Profile 11 Press gt Profile NVMO 12 Press 4 until display shows Profile V 25BIS 13 Press lt First Setup 14 Press lt Exit Enter 15 Press lt Remain Unlocked 16 Press lt Save Profile O 17 Press lt SYNC Int 9600 a Configuring the IBM 7855 10 Model for Asynchronous Operation Since utilizing the hardware buttons on the front panel does not require physical disconnection from the AS 400 this method will be presented here as follows Configuring the IBM 7855 10 Model for Asynchronous Operation ACTION FRONT PANEL DISPLAY 1 Power off the modem none 2 Power the modem back on Wait for TST light to go out 3 Press and gt together then release Exit Enter 4 Press gt View Only 5 Press 4 First Setup 6 Press gt may vary 7 Press 4 until display shows Asynchronous AT 8 Press First Setup 9 Press gt Asynchronous AT 10 Press 4 until display shows Get Profile 11 Press gt Profile NVMO 12 Press 4 until display shows Profile AT 13 Press lt First Setup 14 Press lt Exit Enter 15 Press 16 Press 17 Press Remain Unlocked Save Profile 0 ASYN8N A 9600 a Configuring an IBM 7852 Modem for Asynchronous Operation There are two possible ways to use the 7852 modem You can use it in asynchronous or synchronous
277. s monitor name Specifies the name of the monitor you would like to release Monitor type MONTYP Specifies the type of monitor which you would like to release ALL You would like to release all monitor types CPU You would like to release a CPU monitor CFGSTS You would like to release a configuration status monitor 146 JOB You would like to release a job monitor JOBQ You would like to release a job queue monitor MSGQ You would like to release a message queue monitor NETF You would like to release a network file monitor OBJSIZ You would like to release an object size monitor OUTQ You would like to release an output queue monitor QHST You would like to release a QHST monitor RMTDEV You would like to release a remote device monitor SPLF You would like to release a spooled file monitor SBS You would like to release a subsystem monitor USRDFN You would like to release a user defined monitor Release Message Queue Monitor RLSMSGQICM Release Message Queue Monitor RLSMSGQICM Type choices press Enter Message queue Name ALL The Release Message Queue RLSMSGQICM command allows you to release all or specific message queue monitors Message queue MSGQ Specify the message queue monitor to release or that you want to release all message queue monitors ALL Release all message queue monitors message queue name Specify the name of the message queue monitor
278. s 03 23 03 00 00 00 Active jobs 152 5 Work with 13 Disconnect 6 Releas 7 Display message Type CPU Function SBS BCH BCH 0 0 PGM ICMCMSGOQ 0 BCH 0 0 0 0 0 PGM ICMCDQM PGM ICMCDQM PGM ICMCDQM PGM ICMCDQM PGM ICMCRPY PGM ICMC2MSGQ BC BC BC BC The Work with Active Jobs display shows the performance and status information for ICOM 400 jobs that are currently active on the system This display is reached by taking Option 4 Work with Monitor subsystem on the Work with Monitors Main Menu This is an IBM command For more information see the help text or your IBM manual 112 Option 6 Work with schedules See Chapter 6 for information on ICOM 400 schedules Option 7 Work with Actions The Work with Actions display shows all entries for Actions which are defined to ICOM 400 Action entries are parameters which include such items as the name of the Action the type of recipient the name of the recipient you want the Action to affect the reply whether a command needs to be executed and a text description of the Action You can set up an unlimited number of Actions with varying specifications You can reach the Work with Actions display from the System Monitors menu Option 6 Work with Actions POS ETON CO a Ys lt a Se a Starting characters Type options press Enter 1 Add 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Remove 5 Display 7 Change command list Rep Opt Action Type Recipie
279. s 98 CD Rom It may be used later in the installation Load the latest drivers for the PhoneRider board using the CD provided by Pinnacle Business Systems Select Run from the Start menu and run X ICOM400 ICOMVoice Win98 FW98E0500002 exe where X is the CD ROM drive or browse the CD ROM drive to find the program in the mentioned folder This will create a folder with the latest drivers MediaPhonics Intelligent Firmware Updater x Follow the prompts until asked if you want to R install the version even though there is no Gi There is currently no firmware installed on your computer firmware installed Click No and continue with Do you want to install the version FW98E 05 00 002 now instructions below No Shut down and turn off the computer Install the PhoneRider board Turn the PC on When Windows 98 starts a Building driver information database panel appears showing the progress of the procedure Add New Hardware Wizard Then the first panel of the Add New Hardware Wizard appears informing you that it will search for new drivers for MediaPhonics PhoneRider Card v1 2 This wizard searches for new drivers for MediaPhonics PhoneRider Card v1 2 Click Next 4 device driver is a software program that makes a hardware device work Add New Hardware Wizard On the second panel select the Search for the best driver for your device Recommended radio button and then click Next Display a list
280. s Enter 1 Add 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Remove 5 Display 7 Change compare data Opt Seq Msg ID MsgType Sev Job name Schedule Action Skip Fre From this display you can add change copy remove or display a message queue entry as well as change the compare data for an entry Enter 1 and a sequence number for the message ID you want to add Press Enter and you are taken to the Add Message Queue Monitor Entry display Add Message Queue Monitor Monaro d Js oak al Go sae a Ge es ls wk a e BYMSGQ Type choices press Sequence 668 2 ber 1 999 senedule s s w tes a ean Gee oe Be e ALLDAYS Severity LIMIE see ai Sh cep oe ee eck ber 00 99 JOb Mame ara pdp lt i BE ma ee SE EY te eg e generic USEE eS or See es rey ey am Sots e generic Programas de tee en Ro QE Ok tee eG e generic Message ID Sh tele ney wee ee en we Set AS e generic Message type e66 ALL AGETDON AAs oe ep GS OR we ee Sok Se aS e NONE F4 Include Exclude INC EXC Skip to sequence 1 1 999 EN Force action oe 4 Gs Bo Bee e OO As NO HY Base on command response ZNO NX Some important fields on this display include Q Severity limit The lowest level message severity that when associated with a message that is sent to a message queue is a candidate to initiate an Action Before initiating an Action all o
281. s date were 3 12 03 the From date would be 3 2 03 To date TODATE Specifies the ending date that you want to use when reporting on page activity The To date is the ending limit of a date range of page activity END The latest date file is used as the ending date in the date range CURRENT The current date is the ending date of the date range date Specifies the date in system format with or without date separators that is 2 23 03 or 22392 that you want to be the ending date of a date range nnnnn Specifies a number to represent the number of days before the current day that you want to use for the search An example would be 10 If today s date were 3 22 03 the To date would be 3 12 03 ICOM 400 User Manual 161 Page status STATUS Specifies the status of the messages that you want to include in the message activity display or report ALL You want to include all messages in the display or report regardless of status SENT You only want to include messages that have been sent in the display or report PEND You only want to include messages that are waiting to be sent in the display or report Pending messages are normally waiting for company queue depth or queue times to be satisified ERROR You only want to include messages that had an error associated with them in the display or report HELD You only want to include messages that are currently held in the display or report SCHED You only want to include
282. s that there is no reply for the inquiry message DFTRPY indicates the default reply for the inquiry message is issued Q Use recipient pre post information Whether to use recipient pre post information for this Action This is defined in the Work with Recipients display Q Delivery type The type of delivery method used for the selected Action Delivery types are defined in Chapter 6 Work with Recipients Delay range A time range during which the Action is delayed If you want to enable the delay range you must specify a begin and end time The time is specified in hh mm format Once you have added your Action you may wish to change the command list associated with the Action Type 7 by the Action whose command list you want to change and press Enter You are taken to the Change Command List display Change Command List CHECKJOB NONE Type choices press Enter Seq Command 10 CALL ICOMTOOLS CHKJOB PARM QTCPIP QSYSWRK The Change Command List display shows the current stored commands for the Action that you have selected You can enter an unlimited number of commands for each Action Each command line is assigned a sequence number Commands can be added changed or removed from the Change Command List display Commands can be prompted using F4 You can select from the following variables for use in this command Place single quotes around each variable used amp MSGQ Message queue name amp MSGL
283. s used as the ending date in the date range date Specifies the date in system format with or without date separators that is 12 23 03 or 122303 that you want to use as the ending date of the date range nnnnn Specifies a number to represent the number of days before the current day that you want to clear An example would be 10 If today s date were 3 22 03 the To date would be 3 12 03 Entry status STATUS Specifies the status of the history entries that you want to remove ALL You want to remove history entries for all status special values that meet the other specified criteria SENT Remove history entries with a status code of SENT PEND Remove history entries with a status code of PEND ERROR Remove history entries with a status code of ERROR HELD Remove history entries with a status code of HELD SCHED Remove history entries with a status code of SCHED READY Remove history entries with a status code of READY Escalation status ESCSTS Specifies the escalation status of the history entries that you want to remove ALL You want to remove history entries for all escalation status special values that meet the other specified criteria ESCING Remove history entries with a escalation status code of ESCING ACKD Remove history entries with a escalation status code of ACKD ESCD Remove history entries with a escalation status code of ESCD EXPD Remove history entries with a escalation status code
284. sages e REPEAT This special value will cause the escalation process to repeat from the original recipient through each recipient in the escalation table When the REPEAT special value is processed each message generated from this pass through the escalation table is flagged as EXPIRED and a new pass is started beginning with the original recipient This process will continue forever or until one of the messages in the process is acknowledged The REPEAT special value can occur anywhere in the recipient list Only recipients prior to the REPEAT special value in the recipient list will receive messages e ORIGINAL This special value will cause the escalation process to send the message to the recipient to which the message was originally sent Q Delay The length of time in minutes that must pass before the corresponding recipient will be sent a message Ifa zero value delay time is entered the message will escalate immediately Changing an Escalation Table To change an existing escalation table enter a 2 beside the table you want to change on the Work with Escalation Tables display Press Enter to go to the Change Escalation Table display For more information on this display s fields refer to Adding an Escalation Table Copying an Escalation Table To copy an escalation table enter a 3 beside the table you want to copy on the Work with Escalation Tables display Press Enter to go to the Copy Escalation Table display Enter t
285. seems to be stopped you will need to Alt Tab in order to see a second Confirm File Replace panel where you will select the No to all button c The ICOM400 Voice panel appears when Windows opens after restarting the PC Select the appropriate device and desired voice 6 Asa quick test use a telephone to dial the number of the phone line connected to the voice modem device a Reinstallation 1 Close the ICOM 400 Voice dialog box w ICOM 400 Voice olx 15 27 36 Application started fi 40 Talk Faster Talk Slower Volume tf Low Medium High Device PhoneRider 2 0 Line 0 0 Voice Mary for Telephone Z 2 Follow step 3 for your appropriate version of Windows 15 27 36 Ready 174 Installation Instructions AS 400 Overview ICOM 400 has a great way of eliminating the cost of a pager as well as offering 2 way capabilities virtually anywhere With voice messaging virtually any phone cellular or land line can be called the AS 400 message spoken and the response received Through the use of TCP IP and a PC with a voice modem your AS 400 can talk to you and you can respond back This feature truly enhances our message queue monitor With a message queue monitor you could monitor for any inquiry message After an inquiry message is encountered a recipient phone can be dialed and the message spoken along with a list of responses The response entered by the recipient will in turn answ
286. sides LIBL specifies that the library is a member of your library list 2 Specify the number of copies that you want to produce for the recipient ICMDFT refers to the value specified in the Change System Attributes display 3 Specify the form type to use for reports that you produce for the recipient ICMDFT refers to the value specified in the Change System Attributes display 62 4 Specify the user ID for the recipient This is the user ID of the recipient who is to receive the spooled files NONE specifies that the spooled file is created locally 5 Specify the address of the user ID in the Address field 6 Specify if you want to hold the spooled file when produced by ICOM 400 ICMDFT refers to the value specified in the Change System Attributes display 7 Specify if you want to save the spooled file when produced by ICOM 400 ICMDFT refers to the value specified in the Change System Attributes display All other information is optional NETWORK MESSAGE NETMSG The NETMSG delivery method sends a message to a message queue on a remote system Add Recipient Delivery Delivery CYPE e ies w ee Se ee wi ee Se tt NETMSG Type choices press Enter SequenGe lt a cd Hh oe as ak ee he nis Number 001 999 Available schedule I Name ALLDAYS F4 On call schedule E Name NONE ALLDAYS F4 Message QUeUE sr so s m ap ce AP a o Name Libary s wwe a OR we we we a o Name LIBL Remote
287. sing the ICOM 400 Inbound Voice feature This code can consist of up to 20 numbers Password code An optional numerical password code that allows you to ensure extra security when using the ICOM 400 Inbound Voice feature You can specify a password code of up to 10 numbers When you dial in you will be asked to enter a user code and then the password code Initial menu Specifies what menu will be played when the person with this user code uses the ICOM 400 Inbound Voice feature To bring up a list of existing menus press F4 Associated recipient Specifies a recipient that you want to associate with this user code To select from a list of existing recipients press F4 Associated user profile Specifies a user profile that you want to associate with this user code The authority of this user will be used when calling exit programs or executing commands Allow answer messages Indicates if you want this user code to be able to answer pending messages or just play messages without answering them Identifier Specifies the identifier to be associated with this user code The identifier is a name or number that can be used with the INFO menu item type NONE indicates that there is no identifier associated with this user code Changing a User Code To change a user code enter a 2 beside the user code you want to change on the Work with User Codes display You are taken to the Change User Code display Refer to Addi
288. splay or report 52 Work with Activity WRKATVICM Type choices pr Enter MOMLGOR mi oh bh ah RR he oh ck iL ALL t for more values Monitor type ACEGST Sy FCB ca a t for more values Time period for output Start time and date Beginning time Time AVAIL Beginning date 1 Date CURRENI EGIN nnnnn End time and date Ending ELMS ae e p or arae SE Time AVAIL Ending date E Date CURRENT END nnnnn Sequence option DATE MONTYP Entries to be displayed first FIRST LAST OULDUE slabs ee Be ee PRINT The Work with Activity command display allows you to specify the activity with which you want to work For example you can specify activity for certain monitors or all monitors You can work with all monitor types or only one type such as a message queue monitor or configuration status monitor You can set date limits on the activity you want to display or report or you can work with all available activity on the system Some important parameters of the WRKATVICM command are defined below If you require more information refer to the online help for WRKATVICM Q Monitor The name of the monitor that you want to display or report You can work with activity for all monitors ALL or enter a specific monitor Q Monitor type The type of monitor whose activity you want to display or report Yo
289. steps below 1 Enter the fax phone number to which you want to send the fax message All other information is optional SPOOLED FILE SPLF The SPLF delivery method sends a message as a spooled file to an output queue Add Recipient Delivery Delivery type 3 SPLF Type choices press Sequence 6868 2 Number 001 999 Available schedule Name ALLDAYS F4 On call schedule E Name NONE ALLDAYS F4 OUTPUT Guess ve so aka Be See ck Be ca te Name USER TOA Y ode etn a ek Age Oe ite ae Me ae Name LIBL COPIES 3 8 4 co Se Les la See ie 1 99 ICM Form CYPE fer ay cS ies ie ee SR Fy ay Be Name ICM User ID User LDS secs Ae CE ee AS te A a a ae a E Name NONE WAAL SSS so a8 ough ee RE RS BOS Name LCL Hold spooled file YES NO ICMDFT Save spooled file YES NO ICMDFT Pre message information Post message information To add a spooled file delivery entry follow the steps below 1 Specify the output queue and library that contains the spooled output that you want to monitor USER indicates that the spooled file is sent to the user specified in the User ID field at the address specified This is the only time USER is valid NOTE Specifying USER indicates that you want to send a message to a user on a remote system You must specify the user id and remote address of the system on which the user re
290. system 134 Start monitor 109 subsystem monitor 108 143 145 System attributes E mail 123 Faxing 122 Paging 121 Spooled files 122 System controls 119 T Technical Assistance Worksheet 215 Testing 37 to AS Manager Support System Sign on 167 Troubleshooting 166 Two way communication 16 57 58 70 71 U Upgrade 24 V voice message 45 60 77 173 175 voice messages 60 voice messaging 59 60 122 W Wakeup 90 Work with Actions 111 Work with Actions using ICOM 400 154 Work with Activity 18 51 52 53 Work with Escalation Tables 73 Work with Escalation Tables using ICOM 400 155 Work with Function Authorities 119 124 125 Work with History 18 19 42 47 48 49 73 Work with ICOM 400 e mail 133 135 Work with ICOM 400 E mail 156 Work with monitor subsystem 111 Work with monitors 89 124 Work with Page Queues 129 Work with Page Queues using ICOM 400 162 Work with Pager Companies 16 17 58 70 72 155 162 216 Work with Pages using ICOM 400 158 Work with Pre Defined Messages 74 Work with Pre defined Messages using ICOM 400 157 Work with Recipient Groups 64 65 66 155 156 Work with Recipients 14 44 45 46 55 62 63 113 162 163 Work with Schedules 13 14 67 68 69 163 Work with Spooled Files 119 130 131 163 WRKACTICM 135 154 155 WRKATVICM 18 42 51 52 53 WRKCMPICM 135 155 WRKESCIC
291. t Escalation table RCP Name NONE RCP F4 essage reply 4 2WAY Reply 2WAY DFTRPY Use recipient pre post information NO NO YES Delivery Cypers ie tee ee Wee cats ey ise event te RCP RCP EMAIL F4 for list Add Action Type choices press Delay range Begim TIME za se goss es SE RY ee od Time hh mm MnO etme s fr AU Ne ln aig amp As tek x Time hh mm Text Some important fields on the display include the following Send type Whether the Action is to effect a single recipient or group of recipients Recipient Group The name of the recipient or group depending on the value in the Send type field NONE indicates that the Action will not notify any recipient or group Press F4 to bring up a list of recipients You can place a 1 beside the recipient you want to choose or press F9 from this display to go to Work with Recipients QO Selected recipients Whether all recipients or only on call recipients will be affected by this Action ALL indicates that all recipients will be affected by this Action ONCALL indicates that only recipients that are on call will be affected by this Action The following rules apply to the ONCALL special value 1 If the Send type field contains the RCP special value and the Recipient Group field contains ALL only the on call recipients will be affected If no recipients are designated as on ca
292. t of a telephone number that you will dial with your PC modem For example you might have to dial a 9 or other number to get an outside line or enter a code that is to be used for tracking and billing purposes Commas can be used when a pause is required before dialing the number Each comma represents a one or two second delay Changing an IP Entry To change an IP entry enter a 2 beside the entry you want to change on the Work with IP Entries display Press Enter to go to the Change IP Entry display For more information on the fields of this display refer to Adding an IP Entry 78 Copying an IP Entry To copy an IP entry enter a 3 beside the entry you want to copy on the Work with IP Entries display Press Enter to go to the Copy IP Entry display Enter the name of the new entry in the New name field Press Enter to add your new entry and return to the Work with IP Entries display Removing an IP Entry To remove an IP entry enter a 4 beside the entry ies that you want to remove and press Enter You are taken to the Confirm Remove of IP Entries display Press Enter to remove your entry ies or F12 to return to the Work with IP Entries display where you can change your selections Displaying an IP Entry To display an IP entry enter a 5 beside the entry you want to display on the Work with IP Entries display Press Enter to go to the Display IP Entry display For more information on the fields of this display see Adding an
293. t this message identifier has appeared as a result of processing between the times specified in the DSPQHSTICM command a Message The text of the message associated with the Message ID Some message texts may have in place of specific message data This is because the IDs displayed are summarized and do no show specific details You may view the detail by typing a 5 beside a message Displaying Log Detail Enter a 5 beside the message ID whose detail you want display Press Enter to go to the Display Log Detail display 3 16 03 Display Log Detail 13 57 27 Position t s se 3 16 03 3 16 03 EFE9901 received by procedure TRKCIRCY C D I R EE9901 received by procedure TRKCIRCY C D I R The Display Log Detail display is a result of processing the Display QHST using ICOM 400 DSPQHSTICM command Based on parameters specified in the command the display lists text message that are in the system log You can specify a severity level of the messages that you want included in the display You have reached this display by entering Option 5 beside a message identifier The number of messages displayed is equal to the number displayed in the Count field Specific data information is displayed within each message If you want more information about a particular message place the cursor on the message and press Help or F1 You are taken to the Additional Log Detail display Additional Log Detail
294. t to work with pages for all recipients generic recipient name Specifies that the recipient name is generic For example specifying BAC would cause all recipients whose names begin with BAC to be included in the report or on the display recipient name Specifies the name of a specific recipient s pages that you want to display or report Recipient group GRP Specify the name of the recipient groups or groups that you want to report or display ALL You want to work with pages for all recipient groups generic recipient group name Specifies that the recipient group name is generic For example specifying MA would cause all recipient groups whose names begin with MA to be included in the report or on the display recipient group name Specifies the name of a specific recipient group s pages that you want to display or report From date FROMDATE Specifies the beginning date that you want to use when reporting on page activity The From date is the beginning of a date range of page activity BEGIN The earliest date on the file is the beginning date of a date range CURRENT The current date is the beginning date of a date range date Enter the date in system format with or without date separators that is 12 23 03 or 122303 that you want to be the beginning date of a date range nnnnn Specifies a number to represent the number of days before the current day that you want to use for the search An example would be 10 If today
295. talled and running For more information on installing this software refer to Chapter 2 You can start the software by going to the Start menu then Programs then ICOM400 Voice 2 Make sure that you have an IP entry set up for the recipient to which you are sending the voice message For more information on IP entries see Chapter 6 Work with IP Entries 3 Specify the name of the person or group to whom you want the voice message to be sent If you do not know the name leave SELECT in the Name field Specifying ALL will send the message to all defined recipients Recipients are defined on the Work with Recipients display If you specify NONE the message will not be sent to a recipient 4 Enter the message that you want to send Messages of up to 999 character in length can be entered Specify if you are sending the message to a recipient or group of recipients 46 5 Specify a scheduled date and time to send the message CURRENT means that you want to send the message immediately 6 For delivery type specify PHONE or RCP if you select a recipient who already has PHONE specified as a delivery type entry If you do not have a recipient with a PHONE delivery entry set up then you must specify NONE in the Recipient field and enter a phone number in the Phone number field 7 Specify if you want to escalate the message RCP specifies that you want to use the escalation table defined for the recipient you have chosen For mo
296. tault diver Driver from disk provided by hardware manufacturer C Do not install a driver Windows NT will not prompt you again Select from a list of alternate drivers cme On the Install From Disk dialog box click Browse or Insert the manufacturer s installation disk into the drive directly type in C MPI2DRV If the path was entered c selected andthen ciek OK the next panel will be Select Device Copy manufacturer s files from Eo Browse O A ea R When the Locate File assert opens click Cancel The device is not ready i In the Locate File dialog box that is displayed find the C MPI2ZDRV folder i ancel You should then see the files in the MPI2ZDRV folder shown in the picture Look in E MPI2Drv i c pap p ezez You do not need to select any of them Simply click Open File name Adispnp Files of type Setup Information inf gt Cancel 204 Install From Disk m E Select Device A The selected path is shown in the Install From Disk dialog box Click Ok Simply click OK on this panel The system will show that files are copied ICOM 400 User Manual 205 PhoneRider Accelerator Properties Then the PhoneRider Accelerator Properties panel appears Click the Set Configuration Manually button PhoneRider Accelerator Properties Le ee etd i Click OK if no conflict is signaled Otherwise resolve
297. th all your setup values pre installed then simply press F3 and exit w out saving If this is your first install Quick Start Wizard will take you through ICOM 400 set up quickly and easily Once you have finished Quick Start Wizard you will be taken to the Main Menu From that point on when you type GO ICM you will be taken to the Main Menu If you wish to access the Quick Start Wizard at any time after that select option 20 from the Main Menu If Option 20 does not exist type in the following command CRIDTAARA DTAARA ICOM400 ICMQS TYPE CHAR Len 1 ICOM 400 Voice Installation See Appendix B for more information on installing ICOM 400 Voice ICOM 400 Quick Start Wizard The ICOM 400 Quick Start Wizard will take you through all the necessary steps needed to get started using the program Please follow the steps provided Press F3 to exit the Quick Start Wizard or F12 to go back to a previous screen The Quick Start Wizard includes many examples and is self explanatory If after you have finished the Quick Start Wizard and would like to go back and change something simply choose Option 20 from the ICOM 400 Main Menu If Option 20 does not exit Enter the following command CRIDTAARA DTAARA ICOM400 ICMQS TYPE CHAR Len 1 Quick Start Wizard display 1 ICOM 400 Quick Start Wizard will take you through the steps necessary to deliver messages via e mail pager message queue or to ring a telephone The first step will be to set specifi
298. th history The display can contain all messages regardless of status or can be conditioned to only include selected messages a date range of messages and so on The time and date of the entry along with its current status and contents are shown Display Escalation Information Display Escalation Information Message ID number 1028440 Escalation status Sent from Acknowledged by Job QPADEVO007 Table passes USC ann bog we ed aa OS LANCE Entries generated NUMBEX yin ea aha 6S 020023 Entries processed Escalation table NONE Entry Entry livery Escalation Entry pt Date Time Type Recipient Status Status Message 8 3 10 03 10 28 44 NETMSG ANCE Escalated Error MBABKY 020023 8 8 O 3 10 03 10 33 35 EMAIL JULIA Escalated Error MBABKY 020023 3 10 03 10 38 43 PAGER ANCE Acknowledged Error MBABKY 020023 ICOM 400 User Manual 19 The Display Escalation Information display shows escalation detail about a message that you have selected This display includes The internal number generated by ICOM 400 to track this message The job name that sent the message The user name that sent the message The number of the job that sent the message The name of the escalation table used with this message The escalation status of the message The user ID of the person who acknowledged the message The number of passes through the specified escalation table The
299. that you want to display on the Work with Pager Companies display Press Enter to go to the Display Pager Company display See Adding a Pager Company for more information on the fields of this display ICOM 400 User Manual 73 Option 5 Work with Escalation Tables Entering Option 5 on the command line from the Recipient Information menu takes to you the Work with Escalation Tables display Work with Escalation Tables POSTELOM GO w a 4 alow 4 Starting characters Type options press Enter 1 Creat 2 Chang 3 Copy 4 Remove 5 Display 6 Work with recipients Opt Table Text BYTEST DAYS EST KEKENDS An escalation table is a group of recipients to whom a message will escalate with the passage of time An escalation table takes effect after the recipient to whom the message was sent originally does not respond to the message before the number of minutes specified in the Delay field for the first recipient in the escalation table Recipients in each table are ordered in the sequence that you want them to receive the message A delay time is assigned between recipients to allow a recipient in the escalation table to respond to the message Once a recipient responds to the message by acknowledging the message in the Work with History display or replying to a two way message the escalation process ends You can use special values to end the message when it has gone through the entire group once or to repeat the mess
300. that you want to release ICOM 400 User Manual 147 Remove ICOM 400 Activity RMVATVICM Remove ICOM 400 Activity RMVATVICM Type choices press Enter From date w oi e a eR ee ea A l Date CURRENT BEGIN nnnnn To date lt a Sat sae Gee Mae Gee Gee Gs OE l Date CURRENT nnnnn The Remove ICOM 400 Activity RMVATVICM command allows to you to remove activity that occurred between the dates you specify From date FROMDATE Specifies the beginning date that you want to use when removing ICOM 400 activity entries The From date is the beginning point in the ICOM 400 activity that is cleared CURRENT The current date is used as the beginning point of the date range BEGIN The earliest ICOM 400 activity entry date in the file is used as the beginning date in the date range date Specifies the date entered in system format with or without date separators that is 12 23 03 or 122303 that you want to be the beginning date of the date range nnnnn Specifies a number to represent the number of days before the current day that you want to remove An example would be 10 If today s date were 3 12 03 the From date would be 3 2 03 To date TODATE Specify the ending date that you want to use when removing ICOM 400 activity entries The To date is the ending point in the ICOM 400 activity that is cleared CURRENT The current date is used as the ending date of the date range END The last IC
301. the conflict s and then confirm by OK MNAM 0210 021F Basic configuration 0000 v El USE autonalc setmas 206 The panel shown here will appear only if the PhoneRider board that is being installed has the EPROM number MediaPhonics PhoneRider Card v1 2 Modem P Ss Soe ona ea eee Ewa 0305 the four last digits of the HW version number It does not appear if the PhoneRider board that is being Select which driver you want to install for your new hardware installed is specifically intended for Windows NT 4 0 and its EPROM number is 0306 If this panel is shown select Wit AS TW default drive the Do not install a driver option Driver from disk provided by hardware manufacturer Then click OK Select from a list of alternate drivers Cancel When you are prompted to reboot your PC click Yes to 2 You must restart your computer before the new settings will take effect do so Do you want to restart your computer now i 5 ioa The installation is finished m Continue with the PhoneRider board Wizard PhoneRider board Wizard The MediaPhonics PhoneRider Board Wizard appears when Windows opens after restarting the PC On the Welcome panel click Next ns Welcome to the MediaPhonics PhoneRider Board Wizard All PhoneRider board drivers have been successfully installed This Wizard will help you to configure your PhoneRider quickly and easily To begin the setup click Next
302. the log entries are selected for display or report You must specify the beginning time and date as well as the ending time and date for the date range Q Severity The message severity level that you want to include in the report or display a User The name of the user profile for log entries that you want to display or print Q Message identifier The message identifier for log entries that you want to display or print When you press Enter and you have specified in the Output field you are taken to the Display ICM Log Information display 3 16 03 Display ICM Log Information 13 33 16 Position to 3 16 03 3 16 03 18 records were removed from the ICM activity file 25 records were removed from the ICOM 400 history file 270 entries were removed from the ICM log Pre defined message SALESMEET added Based on the parameters requested in the DSPLOGICM command the display lists text messages associated with ICOM 400 processing You can specify a severity level for messages to be included in the display Messages with severity levels equal to or greater than the selected severity level will be included in the display For example if you specified 30 all messages with a severity level of 30 or higher would be selected for the display If the display does not contain the information needed you can run the command additional times with different values specified For any message that you want to se
303. ther message queue monitor entry requirements must be met For example a severity limit of 40 means that any message with a severity level of 40 or higher is a candidate to initiate an Action A message with a severity level of less than 40 would not be a candidate The limit can range from 00 to 99 Q Job name The name of the job that when associated with a message sent to the message queue will be a candidate to initiate an Action You can specify the name of a specific job or a generic job name ALL indicates that any job that sends a message to a message queue or 98 whose job name is associated with a message sent to a message queue is a candidate to initiate an Action User The user name that is a candidate to initiate an Action You can specify a specific user or a generic user name ALL indicates that any user that sends a message to a message queue is a candidate to initiate an Action Program The program that is a candidate to initiate an Action You an specify a specific program name or a generic program name ALL indicates that any program that sends a message to a message queue is a candidate to initiate an Action Message ID The ID of the message that when received by the message queue will initiate an Action You can specify a specific message ID or a generic one ALL indicates that any message ID sent to the message queue is a candidate to initiate the Action Message type The type of message that will be a candi
304. this command job name Specify the name of the job that contains the spooled file ICOM 400 User Manual 155 user name Specify the user name that identifies the user profile under which the job is run job number Specify the system assigned job number Spooled file number SPLNBR Specifies the unique number of spooled file in a job ONLY Only one spooled file in the job has the specified file name therefore the number of the spooled file is not necessary LAST If there is more than one spooled file with the specified file name the one with the highest number is the spooled file that you want to attach to the message spooled file number Specify the number of the spooled file that matches the file name that you want to attach to the message Send type TYPE Specify whether the message is to be sent to a single recipient or a group of recipients RCP The message is to be sent to a recipient or all recipients depending on the value specified in the Name prompt GRP The message is to be sent to a group or all recipient groups depending on the value specified in the Name prompt Email address EMAIL Specifies the e mail address to which you want to send this message NONE You are using a recipient name on the Name prompt that has an EMAIL delivery type email address Specify the address of the person s to whom you are sending the message Return e mail address RTNEMAIL Specifies an e mail address to which err
305. ties are the levels of authority that your users have to various features of ICOM 400 There are two types of function authorities The first type of authority either allows the user access to the function or not The second type of authority allows the user different authority levels within the function Work with page queues shows the user all the page queues that have one or more messages pending for a particular paging company Each paging company is implicitly defined as an individual page queue The Work with Spooled Files command display allows you to specify which spooled files you want to work with by specifying the name of spooled file as well as the job user output queue and time period for output for the spooled files you want to display Option 1 Change System Attributes Entering Option 1 from the System Controls menu takes you to the Change System Attributes display V2ROM10 Change System Attributes Type choices press Enter Activity retention days umber 1 999 Log entries retention days umber 1 999 Diale EVPE Ge Leakage es Butea ER A Tone P Puls Inactivity interval inutes 1 999 Autostart monitors so Ne Se SR k e NO YES Send message in restricted state NO YES Notify recipients not oncall NO YES Paging Resource 1 Primary shared resource name Name Secondary shared resource name Name Telephone prefix Character Resource 2
306. tiple values for this parameter If you are on an entry display and you need additional entry fields to enter multiple recipients type a plus sign in the entry field opposite the phrase for more values and press the Enter key If you need to choose a recipient name from a list of names specify SELECT to select one or more recipients or press F4 to prompt for a list SELECT A list is displayed for selection of one or more recipients without having to type each recipient name individually If the message to be sent has alphabetic characters the list will not contain any recipients with digital only pagers ALL The message is to be sent to all recipients recipient name Specify the name of the recipient that is to receive the message Message MSG Specify the message that you want to send Messages can be entered that are up to 999 characters in length In most cases pager and other equipment cannot handle this many characters For example the maximum message length that a pager company allows is specified in the Maximum message length field in the Work with Pager Company display Whatever length is specified will be used to break up the message you enter here into multiple messages that are sent to your equipment ICOM 400 also allows you to send pre defined messages These are defined on the Work with Pre Defined Messages display You can enter the identifier of the pre defined message in the message field to send any p
307. to create a new recipient with voice messaging 1 From the Recipient Information menu take Option 1 Work with Recipients 2 Use Option 1 to add a recipient 3 Key in the persons name in the text field This will be used in the introduction of the voice message 4 Use Option 1 to add a delivery type along with 10 as the sequence and PHONE as the delivery type PHONE can be used for just dialing a phone number and sending a tone signal or for voice messaging 5 From the Add Recipient Delivery Entry screen key in the person s phone number as well as an IP entry the one you added earlier and possibly a security code A security code will prevent unauthorized persons from hearing a voice message without first entering the specified security code There are different ways to define an introduction for the voice message Reference the FAQs for an explanation The Allow 2 way communication field must be set to YES in order to respond to the voice message by pressing the appropriate number Now ICOM 400 has everything it needs to know in order to send a voice message You can test it by using the SNDMSGICM Send Message command and by specifying the recipient just added To test the 2 way capabilities specify YES on the Check for reply CHKRPY field and then enter valid responses in the Valid reply list VLDRPYL field Displaying the history entry will show the response selected by the recipient of the voice message Reference the FAQs fo
308. to display your selected entries started from the top or bottom based on the value specified in the Sequence option prompt LAST You want to display the entries you selected starting from the bottom FIRST You want to display the selected entries starting from the top Work with Pre defined Messages using ICOM 400 WRKMSGICM Work with Pre defined Messages WRKMSGICM Type choices press Enter Output ICOM 400 User Manual 159 The Work with Pre defined Messages WRKMSGICM command allows you to work with all or selected pre defined messages by taking you to the Work with Pre defined Messages display From there you can add remove change copy or display message information Output can be a display or printed report You may reach this screen by typing WRKMSGICM on the command line and pressing F4 Output OUTPUT Use the following values to specify whether pre defined messages are to be shown on the Work with Pre defined Messages display or printed Displays the Work with Pre defined Messages display PRINT Prints the Work with Pre defined Messages report Work with Pages using ICOM 400 WRKPAGICM Work with Pages using ICOM 400 WRKPAGICM Type choices press Enter COMPANY 4 Irs he ar AB ae ee A E iL Name generic REGTPLEME mor bec ee ose ee tee A iL Name generic Recipient Group iL Name generic From date iy he tas Ses ay a e the see a as E Date CURRENT EGIN
309. to list and display all messages that were sent by the user If this authority is not granted the Dsp Lst field should be blank QO Release Hold Specify an X in the Release Hold field to specify the authority to hold or release a message If this authority is not granted the Release Hold field should be blank 130 Resend Specify an X in the Resend field to specify the authority to resend a message If this authority is not granted the Resend field should be blank Remove Specify an X in the Remove field to specify the authority to remove a message If this authority is not granted the Remove field should be blank Acknowledge Specify an X in the Ack field to specify the authority to acknowledge a message If this authority is not granted the Ack field should be blank Option 3 Reset ICOM 400 Select Option 3 to reset ICOM 400 When the product is reset the following processes take place Oooo ZICOM400 subsystem is ended and restarted All ICOM 400 lines controllers and devices are deleted All ICOM 400 data queues are deleted All files have their authority changed to allow QPGMR ALL authority Option 4 Work with Page Queues Choose Option 4 to go to the Work with Page Queues display Work with Page Queues tS 72225 Type options press Enter 2 Work with pages 3 Hold 6 Releas 8 Send now Pager Company Queu Forc Queu Force Schedule Opt Company Status Depth Depth Time T
310. to the log Program The name of the program that produced the message Area The type of entry that produced the log entry OUOOOCOCO 82 QO Message The full text of the message If applicable there is further descriptive text in the Additional message prompt Option 3 Remove Log Entries To remove log entries from ICOM 400 enter a 3 on the command line of the History Information display Press Enter to go to the Remove ICOM 400 Log Entries RMVLOGICM display Remove ICOM 400 Log Entries RMVLOG Type choices press Enter TYPE cae OANE lt a er cadre thet seg te Shay Bese oe MSG MNT From date te Ns Mba 1 hehe Ve Uist ogy es CURRENT BEGIN nnnnn TO Cate wo i sk Se le te ee wd 2d CURRENT nnnnn The Remove ICOM 400 Log Entries RMVLOGEICM command allows you to clear the ICOM 400 log based on a date range you specify Some important fields for this display include the following Q Type The type of entries that you want to clear from the ICOM 400 log Examples of types of entries are messages MSG or maintenance MNT From and To dates The date range for the entries that you want to clear Options 4 and 6 Display Resource Communication Entries 1 and 2 To display a resource communication entry enter a 4 for resource 1 or 6 for resource 2 on the command line of the History Information menu Display Physical File Member PELE rea n a E ICMASDI Library G s 4
311. tries Baud rate The baud rate of the modem that you are using to send faxes Company name The name of the company your company sending the fax that will be used with the fax header page Return fax number The fax phone number associated with the company that is sending the fax that will be used with the fax header page Line wrap action The step that you want to take when a line in a message or file has more characters than the page on which it is printed NOWRAP indicates that the message should not wrap around the page This means that any characters that cannot be displayed on the line on which they occurred will be cut off An example of NOWRAP is displayed below This is an example of NOWRAP for the Li field on the Change system attributes displ WRAP indicates that the message should wrap to the next line If there are too many characters for the page the extra characters wrap around to the next line The following line is placed on the line below An example of WRAP is displayed below This is an example of WRAP for the Line wrap action field on the Change system attributes display E mail These are the defaults associated with e mail Q Q ICOM 400 e mail address The e mail address that will used as a default when sending e mail messages All error messages and replies received will be routed to this e mail address SMTP host server address The Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP server s TCP IP add
312. u can work with all types of monitor activity or select a specific monitor type Q Time period for output The period of time for which the activities are select for display or report You may select a beginning time and date as well as an ending time and date OQ Sequence option You may specify the sequence in which you want to display or report ICOM 400 activity DATE displays or reports activity in date sequence MONTYP displays or reports activity in monitor type sequence Q Entries to be displayed first Specify the order in which you want activity to be displayed LAST shows last activity entry first FIRST shows first activity entry first Once you are satisfied with your specifications press Enter display or print your activity If you choose to display your activity you will be taken to the Work with Activity display Work with Activity Position to Type options press Enter 4 Remov 5 Display 8 Detail 9 Acknowledge Opt Type Date Time Activity information USRMSG 3 11 03 9 36 Sent by STEVEN USRMSG 3 11 03 15 18 Sent by QUSER USRMSG 3 15 03 10 48 Sent ANCE USRMSG 3 15 03 102572 Sent ANCE USRMSG 3 15 03 10 58 Sent ANCE USRMSG 3 15 03 11 04 Sent ANCE SNDSPI 3 15 03 14 46 Spooled file QPJOBLOG sent by STEVE SNDSPI 3 15 03 15213 Spooled file QSYSPRT sent by JULIA ICOM 400 User Manual 53 The Work with Activity display shows all activity that you spe
313. u may add Option 1 a pager company change an existing company Option 2 or copy a company Option 3 You may also remove an existing company or companies Option 4 display a company Option 5 or work with the recipients that use a certain pager company Option 6 Adding a Pager Company To add a pager company enter a 1 on the first line under the Opt column on the Work with Pager Companies display Press Enter to go to the Add Pager Company display Add Pager Company Type choices press E Pager COMPANY ssm sow ae To w OS BLACKDOG Contact name Address line 1 Address line 2 Computer phone number 3 2 way communication type E E ELLSOUTH Mailbox user ID Mailbox password 2 Pager company password Characters Maximum message length Number 1 999 Maximum paging queue depth Number 1 999 Maximum paging queue time Number 0 3600 Maximum pages per connection Number 1 9999 ICOM 400 User Manual 71 Number of retries Number 1 9 Limit one page per messag Baie oe NO YES Sending system Name LCL Add Pager Company Type choices press Modem Fate fy T miim a SI oa a ar 300 600 1200 2400 9600 PARLEY ao a Sb ao nd eaa aes oe A GOS EVE EVEN ODD NONE Data bits Stop bits Duplex Text The Add Pager Company display is used to add a pager company and technical inform
314. umeric characters 4 If your pager company supports two way paging specify if you want to allow two way communication for this recipient NOTE The recipient s pager equipment must be able to receive and send messages in order to be able to support two way communication NOTE If you want to dial a numeric pager directly rather than going through the pager company use the PHONE delivery method see below for more information EMAIL EMAIL The EMAIL delivery method sends a message to an e mail address You must specify the e mail address for the recipient as well as if you want to allow two way communication for this recipient Add Recipient Delivery Delivery CY OE g an 2 Selene Gale aid EMAIL Type choices press Enter Sequence Number 001 999 Available schedule Name ALLDAYS F4 On call schedule F Name NONE ALLDAYS F4 E mail address Allow 2 way communication NO YE Pre message information Post message information To add an e mail delivery entry follow the steps below 1 Specify the e mail address of the recipient The address is specified in the yourname domain com format 2 Specify if you want to allow two way communication when sending e mail This allows the recipient to send replies to e mail that they have received NOTE When you are sending a reply to an e mail from an e mail package using two way communication you must place
315. unction authorities where you can setup by a specific user s or PUBLIC to include or exclude certain functions For example you might not want a user to be able to delete messages that are in your Work with history screen You could simply change the special value WRKHST that s in the list of special values on the function authorities screen to ICOM 400 User Manual 215 exclude the user from getting into the screen at all There are also ways of doing partial excludes from the user to a specific function or recipient So if for example you wanted a user to be able to display the Work with History screen but not delete the message records it could be set up that way Note Anyone with SECOFR class and or ALLOBJ authority will override this feature For more information on function authorities See ICOM 400 manual Chapter 9 System Controls Also see the section of Chapter 6 Recipients Edit recipient authority to set up user authorities on specific recipients Can I use ICOM 400 to page my alphanumeric pager without using a modem A Yes with ICOM 400 s email feature and a pager company that supports this kind of paging you can set it up to send an email to your pager company with a unique email address which in turn will page your pager For further instructions In the ICOM 400 manual See Chapter 6 for setting up an EMAIL delivery type for a recipient and Chapter 9 for setting up your system attributes for email C
316. urce is busy A modem similar to the one attached to the primary resource should be attached to the secondary shared communication resource The secondary resource name is not edited You can have a secondary shared resource for either of two resources Telephone prefix The telephone prefix associated with your resources A telephone prefix is a number or symbol that needs to be placed in front of a telephone number that you will dial with your AS 400 modem For example you might have to dial a 9 or other number to get an outside line or enter a code that is to be used for tracking and billing purposes Commas can be used when a pause is required before dialing the number Each comma represents a one or two second delay Other defaults for paging include Q Vary lines off after transmission Whether to vary communication resources off after paging is complete The default for this field is YES If you have changed the value of the ICOM 400 User Manual 123 field to NO and you have changed the information for a paging company you must process Option 3 Reset ICOM 400 from the system controls menu to inform the monitor to retrieve changes within the paging company NO is typically used when you have only one paging company Default pager ID The default pager ID that is used on the Send Message using ICOM 400 SNDMSGICM command when no recipient is specified and specific delivery information is required NONE indicates that you d
317. ure the IBM 5853 modem for use with ICOM 400 all of the front panel buttons must be in the released position The A S button switches between Asynchronous OUT and Synchronous IN operating modes and must be in Asynchronous OUT position For synchronous operation i e for IBM Electronic Customer Support or for Pinnacle s AS Manager Customer Support this button must be pushed in The following is an illustration of this modem ICOM 400 User Manual 39 2400 bps Modem ONH FS DTR TD RD CD ECLTST ST ECLAS RL FS DA 108 103 104 109 OOO0QO0O000 E EEHEHE EE IBM 7855 10 Modem To configure the IBM 7855 10 modem for use with ICOM 400 the modem must be configured in a asynchronous operating mode The IBM 7855 10 can be configured either via AT commands issued from a display station or via the four directional buttons on the front of the modem 7855 10 ONH DTR RFSTD RD CD TST O000000 108 106103104109142 Configuring the IBM 7855 10 Model for Synchronous Operation Since utilizing the hardware buttons on the front panel does not require physical disconnection from the AS 400 this method will be presented here as follows Configuring the IBM 7855 10 Model for Synchronous Operation ACTION FRONT PANEL DISPLAY 1 Power off the modem none 2 Power the modem back on Wait for TST light to go out 3 Press lt and together then release Exit Enter 4 Press gt View Only 5 Press 4 First Setup 6 Press gt may va
318. ure your communications support to access ACS This process must be completed before you can access ACS PTF Retrieval This option allows you to order PTFs for all AS Manager products Simply enter the PTF ID supplied by AS Manager technical support or the ICMSUMMARY The PTF will be transferred to your machine and will be accompanied by a report highlighting the PTF and giving instructions on how to load it AS Manager PTF Retrieval Type options press PTF Identifer Company Name Contact Name Telephone Number Some important fields for this display include the following PTF ID The ID of the PTF that you want to download This is provided to you by AS Manager technical support Customer information Enter your company name contact name and telephone number A message will be displayed at the bottom of the screen giving the status of the transfer operation To view a summary of all available PTF s for ICOM 400 enter ICMSUMMARY in the PTF ID Sign on to AS Manager Support System ICOM 400 User Manual 169 You can perform the following support functions Send a message to technical support Page a technical support representative Ask questions or search for answers on Q amp A database Note Your page will not be sent until you sign off ACS Sign on to AS Manager Support System Enter to continue Beginning passthru to AS Manager When signon appears enter Userid SUPPORT Passw
319. ured to receive messages from ICOM 400 From this display you have many options You can add Option 1 recipients change Option 2 recipients that you have already defined copy Option 3 recipients remove Option 4 recipients 56 and display Option 5 recipients You can also send a message to a selected recipient Option 7 or edit the authority of a particular recipient Option 9 The display lists the name of the recipient the escalation table associated with the recipient and a text description of the recipient If the recipient is not a member of an escalation table the Escalation field will have a value of NONE You may also view the delivery types of each recipient by pressing F6 Each delivery type is listed as well as Y to indicate that the recipient has this delivery type set up or N to indicate that this delivery type is not set up for the recipient The possible delivery types include PAGER PHONE EMAIL MSGQ FAX SPLF NETMSG OUOOCOUCO Adding a Recipient To add a recipient enter a 1 on the first line of the Opt column along with the name of the recipient you want to add Press Enter to go to the Add Recipient display Add Recipient RECIpPLEME ke ce Se e a Gh a er ce RECP1 Escalation table NONE Name NONE F4 for list POKE ta pan OS es St Zane GSE peeks Gh es ie Cah ok NONE Position to Type options press Enter 1 Add 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Remove 5 Disp
320. users that will be able to use or be excluded from using this particular activity The types of authorities that use this display include ICOM 400 User Manual 127 CHGSYSDFT Allows user to change system attributes DSPLOG Allows user to display the ICOM 400 log DSPQHST Allows user to display the QHST log ENDMON Allows user to end a monitor HLDMON Allows user to hold a monitor MONMSGQ Allows user to monitor a message queue during a restricted state RLSMON Allows user to release a monitor RMVATV Allows user to remove activity RMVLOGE Allows user to remove ICOM 400 log entries SECURITY Turns security on and off for a user SNDALL Allows user to send a message to all recipients SNDMSG Allows a user to send a message SNDSPLF Allows user to send a spooled file to recipients STRMON Allows a user to start a monitor WRKATV Allows a user to work with activity WRKFCT Allows a user to work with function authorities WRKPAGQ Allows a user to work with page queues The Edit Function Authority display shows a list of the current users authorized to a function You can add users to the list remove users from the list and change the level of authority of the users To add users to the list press the F6 key Add new users to get another display similar to this one where you can type the new users and the desired authority levels To remove users from the list typ
321. varying specifications Add Action Add Action Type choices press AGELON osom a Be a e e ta ah et Name Send CYPE 4 0 ay die Ud i ie a Cio ae da E e F RCP GRP Recipient Group Name ALL NONE F4 Selected recipients I ALL ONCALL Message detail NONE JOBINF SECLVL Pre defined message ID I Name NONE F4 for list Escalation table F Name NONE RCP F4 Message reply Reply 2WAY DFTRPY Use recipient pre post information NO YES Delivery type F RCP EMAIL F4 for list m F py ma F a The Add Action display allows you to add an Action and specify the parameters for the Action you want to add When adding an Action you will be asked to specify The name of the Action Whether the Action is to notify a single recipient or a group of recipients The name of the recipient or group that the Action will notify Whether all recipients or only on call recipients will be notified by this Action The level of message detail that you want to send for the specified Action 12 You will also want to note The reply to be issued in response to an inquiry message Whether to use the recipient pre post information for this Action The delivery method for the selected Action and A time range that the Action is to be delayed If you want to enable the delay range you must specify a begin and end time
322. w Hardware Found pa nel a ppears C Do not install a driver Windows NT will not prompt you again Select from a list of altemate drivers Select the Driver from disk provided by hardware manufacturer option and then click OK Cancel Install From Disk x Tare l The Install From Disk dialog box opens a een me manufacturer Lm disk into the drive l ee Click Browse or directly type in C MPI2DRV If the path was entered the next panel will be Select Device Copy manufacturer s files from X Browse Locate File x A is not accessible The device is not ready The Locate File assert opens Click Cancel ICOM 400 User Manual 201 Locate File PRIX In the Locate File dialog box that is displayed find the S elf mi C MPI2DRV folder Locate File Sy MPI2Drv al e lee You should see the following files in the MPI2DRV folder You do not need to select any of them just click Open pom OOOO l Z cancel Install From Disk The selected path is shown in the Install From Disk aa dialog box Click OK Select Device gt On the following Select Device dialog box simply click OK 202 Configure Analog Devices SoundComm HE Resources Settings About Analog Devices SoundComm Codec amp SB amp OPL3 Ports The system will show that files are copied Resource settings Resourcetype Setting eee
323. want to follow a message for The PAGER delivery method sends a message to an alpha or numeric pager You must specify a pager ID for the recipient as well as the pager company that will be used to send the message and the type of the pager If your pager company is BellSouth and the pager itself supports two way communication specify to allow two way communication Add Recipient Delivery Delivery Cypa e w oe nw aed we Ww de a PAGER Type choices press Enter Sequence Number 001 999 Available schedule Name ALLDAYS F4 On call schedule E Name NONE ALLDAYS F4 Pager ID si PIi a Pager companys cb ani vate gN e a a e dg Name F4 for list Pager Cype a sa Sua Abe a ah UG E e A Alpha D Digital Allow 2 way communication NO YES Pre message information Post message information To add a pager delivery entry follow the steps below 58 1 Specify a pager ID for the recipient This specifies the destination pager number NOTE This could be a pager phone number or a PIN number 2 Enter the pager company that is associated with the pager ID For a list of pager companies place your cursor on the Pager company field and press F4 You may also press F9 to Work with Pager Companies 3 Enter the type of pager A specifies that the pager is an alpha pager capable of both alpha and numeric characters D specifies that the pager is a digital pager capable of only n
324. when one of three conditions occur 1 The Queue depth equals the value specified in the Force depth field 2 The number of seconds in the Queue time filed exceeds the number of seconds in the Force time field 3 When other pages not included in the queue are sent to this paging company i e when a page is sent specifying PAGQ NO ICOM 400 User Manual 131 Force depth The number of messages in the company page queue that forces the automatic transmission of the messages to the specified pager company Queue time The number of seconds remaining before pages in this queue are automatically sent Messages are transmitted automatically when one of three conditions occur see Queue depth for a list of the conditions Force time The maximum number of seconds that a pending message may remain in the queue Scheduled date The date that the messages in the queue are scheduled to be sent in month day year MM DD YY format This date is calculated based upon the Queue time and Force time values Scheduled time The time that the messages in the queue are scheduled to be sent in hour minute second HH MM SS format This time is calculated based on the Queue time and Force time values Option 5 Work with Spooled Files Choose Option 5 to go to the Work with Spooled Files WRKSPLFICM command display Work with Spooled Files WRKSPLFICM Type choices press Enter Spooled File Name Job User So Output Queue Library Z
325. x received by procedure C D I R CPCA08C KAKKKKKKKKKKKKKK File system mounted CPC1134 Shared pool changed CPC1236 CPC1601 CPC1602 CPC1611 CPC1612 CPC2191 CPC2602 CPC2605 Job submitted for job schedule entry Subsystem description x 4 created In FAKE RAAK AK Subsystem description x xx in library cha Job description created in library Job description in library x changed Object KAKA KKK KKK in KKK K KKK KKK type KKK KKK KK deleted Description for device x xxx deleted Vary on completed for device xxxaxx OrFRFrRRENAEF UW hb The Display QHST Log Entry display is a result of processing the Display QHST using ICOM 400 DSPQHSTICM command Based on the parameters requested in the command the display lists text messages associated with processing For example if you specified a severity of 30 all messages with a severity of 30 or higher would be selected for the display If the display doe not contain the 86 information needed you can run the command additional times with different parameter values specified From this display you have one option You can display the detail of messages by entering a 5 beside a message Some important fields for this display include the following o Message ID The message ID that is associated with the text description of the message Q Count The number of times tha
326. you to verify whether your PhoneRider can open the line using the Speakerphone The Line and Speakerphone Diagnostic is displayed Press the Test the line and speakerphone button To start the test click the button below lt Back Hert Cancel The Diagnostic Status window opens If the board is 3 Toere A correctly configured you can hear the card click Click Stop to You must now hear the dial tone on your speakers end the test Press Stop to end the diagnostic Stop Diagnostic Status The Wizard asks if it performed correctly Click Yes You will aae O E a return to the Line and speakerphone Diagnostic panel Click Next The Microphone setup panel appears It allows you to xi Microphone setup finely adjust the microphone gain Depending on the microphone you have you may need to Cl ick Next adjust the gain Speak as you usually do on the phone Gain VU meter and use the slider to adjust the gain so that the red area of the VU meter will not be lit too often You can also use the Auto calibration button to have the gain adjusted automatically T Auto calibration 14 0 dB Cancel ICOM 400 User Manual 209 The Handset diagnostic panel opens Press the Test ey liens the Handset button This test allows you to verify whether your PhoneRider can open the line using your telephone set To start the test click the button below then pick up your hands
327. you want to use for pager equipment for this company i e 1200 bytes per seconds 300 bps 600 etc ICOM 400 User Manual 17 e The type of parity that you want to use for pager equipment for this company Even Odd or None e The number of data bits that you want to use for pager equipment for this company 7 or 8 e The number of stop bits that you want to use for pager equipment for this company 1 or 2 e Whether or not the pager equipment for this company supports full 2 way communication or half one way communication duplex Work with Escalation Tables Work with Escalation Tables POSTEVON TO a ar Tals ta h Starting characters Type options press Enter 1 Creat 2 Chang 3 Copy 4 Remove 5 Display 6 Work with recipients Opt Table Text BYTEST DAYS EST KEKENDS An escalation table is a group of recipients to whom a message will escalate with the passage of time An escalation table takes effect after the recipient to whom the message was sent originally does not respond before the number of minutes specified in the Delay field for the first recipient in the escalation table Recipients in each table are ordered in the sequence that you want them to receive the message A delay time is assigned between recipients to allow a recipient in the escalation table to respond to the message Once a recipient responds to the message by acknowledging the message in the Work with History display the
328. ype choices press Enter Pager command SNDMSGICM TOUSER amp RCP MSG amp MSGTXT Changing the Paging Command In this example there are two substitution variables amp RCP the recipient of the pager message and amp MSGTXT the message that you are sending The substitution values for these substitution variables come from the ADDJOBJS CHGJOBJS and SBMJOBJS commands PGRRCPNORM and PGRRCPABN parameters Note When using with ICOM 400 you will need to create a dummy recipient called QIJS so IJS will use ICOM 400 s command You will not have to use this dummy recipient for anything it just needs to be in the recipient file for ICOM 400 When I upgrade from an old version of Page Manager or ICOM 400 to a new version of ICOM 400 do I have to retype in all my data again A No the installation program for ICOM 400 is designed to copy your files from Page Manager to the files in ICOM 400 or if you are already using ICOM 400 and you are just installing the newest release of ICOM 400 the install program will save the data files while installing the new software so you will not lose any data that you have already typed in previously See Chapter 2 in the ICOM 400 manual ICOM Installation for further information on how to install ICOM 400 Why do I keep getting an error when I send an email through ICOM 400 ICOM 400 User Manual 213 A There are basically 4 things that you need to have right to

View Online

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents